JP2019063568A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preferably improving interest in a game.SOLUTION: A sub MPU 82 shifts a game state to a usual AT state when a shift condition is satisfied. In the usual AT state, when a bell accessory is won, a stop order corresponding to that is notified. In this case, when an AT continuing winning is performed in AT continuing lottery processing, a usual AT state is successively performed, and, even when the AT continuing winning is not performed in the AT continuing lottery processing, the usual AT state may be successively performed on the condition that another continuing condition is satisfied. A probability of the AT continuing winning in the AT continuing lottery processing is set in six steps. When the AT continuing winning is performed in the AT continuing lottery processing, promotion lottery processing with the AT continuing probability may be performed, and when a promotion is won in the promotion lottery processing, the probability of the AT continuing winning is raised by one step.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is provided to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is general that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  Specifically, with respect to the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means by operating the start lever in the situation where the medals are betted. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reel is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-295707 A

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is a pattern display means for variably displaying a pattern;
Starting operation means operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Role lottery execution means for executing the role lottery process when the start operation means is operated;
Stop operation means operated to stop variable display of the pattern;
Variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling;
A winning correspondence giving unit for giving a winning correspondence bonus as a winning when the stop symbol corresponding to the winning combination in the combination lottery processing is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped;
Advantage transition means for transitioning the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state in which the player's degree of interest is higher than the predetermined gaming state, at least one condition being that the predetermined part winning is won in the part drawing process in the pre-transition state;
A means for increasing the expectation for the advantageous gaming state in the pre-transition state, using at least one condition that the winning combination has been won in the part drawing process in the pre-transition state;
Equipped with
The separate role does not serve as a trigger for giving the advantageous gaming state in the pre-transition state, but in the other gaming states, it has a configuration to serve as the trigger for giving the bonus state,
The predetermined combination is characterized in that, when the combination drawing process is won, a combination is generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means in relation to the variable display position of the pattern.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the slot machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a perspective view of a slot machine showing the state where the front door was opened. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of the design and combination line which can be visually recognized from a display window. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a prize mode and the privilege provided. (A)-(g) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect of the stop symbol when each prize generate | occur | produces. (A)-(g) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect of the stop symbol when each prize generate | occur | produces. (A) It is a front view of an acquisition number display part and an internal condition informing part, (b) It is a front view of a privilege point informing part and a stock informing part, (c) It is a front view of a victory number informing part. It is an electric block diagram of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process performed by main side MPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for non-internal states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for internal state. It is an explanatory view for explaining the relation between the stop order of a reel, and the winning combination established. It is a flow chart which shows acquisition processing of winning data performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the prize determination processing performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows CB state processing performed by main side MPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining a mode of transition of a game state which occurs under control of main side MPU. It is a timing chart for explaining the luminescence control mode of an internal state informing part. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st weight setting process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd weight setting process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus AT management processing performed by main side MPU. FIG. 18 is a timing chart showing how the first special replay is won or missed in the CB internal rear state; FIG. FIG. 18 is a timing chart showing how a second special replay win or a third special replay win is made in the internal state of the CB; FIG. It is a timing chart for explaining the relation between the CB in state and the bonus AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the periodic processing performed by sub side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows waiting production setting processing performed by sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for CB performed by sub side MPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining a transition mode from a non-AT state to an AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the process in non-AT performed by sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer opportunity management process performed by sub side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows processing during a shift chance performed by sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ceiling game management processing performed by sub side MPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining each game state included in AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the process in AT performed by sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT states before branch performed by sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 1st addition performed by sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the additional state performed by sub side MPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting control processing performed by sub side MPU, It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for stock alerting | reporting (b). (A) It is a timing chart for explaining a situation that bonus points are distributed to a plurality of games and added in the pre-branch AT state, and (B1) to (B4) light emission modes of the bonus point notification unit and the stock notification unit. It is an explanatory view for explaining. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the branch AT state performed by sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for branch AT states performed by sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 2nd addition performed by sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the completion | finish process of the branch AT state performed by sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting processing of the pre-branch AT state performed by sub side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the advancing aspect of a branch AT state, and is a figure which shows simply the content of the battle rendition in (B1)-(B6) image display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that AT continuation probability in AT continuation lottery process is promoted. It is a timing chart which shows the transition timing to the additional state in the pre-branch AT state and the branch AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the additional state performed by sub side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the superimposition mode in a superposing state, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a privilege point counter. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the last chances performed by sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for bonus ATs performed by sub side MPU. (A) It is the schematic for demonstrating the outline | summary of the electric constitution of the game hall in which many slot machines were installed, (b) It is a front view of the external terminal board provided in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process at the time of completion | finish performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the bell prize determination processing performed by main side MPU. It is a timing chart which shows a mode that the output state of AT1 signal is changed in relation to a bell combination. It is a flowchart which shows the normal replay pushing order determination processing performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process at the time of the start performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for normal replay performed by sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for push order avoidance performed by sub side MPU. It is a timing chart which shows signs that an output mode of AT1 signal is changed in relation to a regular replay part. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process before the start performed by main side MPU. It is a timing chart which shows the output mode of AT1 signal and AT2 signal in the case of changing to a normal AT state triggered by a bonus AT state. It is a timing chart which shows the output mode of AT1 signal and AT2 signal in, when it shifts to a bonus AT state in the middle of a normal AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of AT1 signal and AT2 signal which are performed by the main side MPU in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the last chance state performed by sub side MPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the completion | finish process of the normal AT state performed by sub side MPU in 4th Embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment in the case where the present invention is applied to a slot machine, which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 is provided with a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape having an open front as a whole by fixing a plurality of wooden panels.

  A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so that the internal space of the housing 11 can be opened and closed with the left side portion as a pivot. The front door 12 is locked so as not to be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the back of the front door 12. The locked state is released by an unlocking operation of the key cylinder 14 with a predetermined key.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 for notifying the player of the game state is provided on the upper side of the central portion of the front door 12. In the game panel 20, three vertically long display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R are formed in a line. The display windows 21L, 21M, 21R are made of a transparent or semi-transparent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate, and the reel unit 31 is attached to the top of the partition plate. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R which are respectively formed in a cylindrical shape. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the central axis thereof is the rotational axis of the reel. The rotational axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are disposed on the same axis extending substantially in the horizontal direction, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are in one-to-one correspondence with the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R. There is. Therefore, a part of the surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 21L, 21M, 21R. In addition, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surface of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is projected as if it were moving from the top to the bottom through the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R.

  Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor (not shown), and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be driven to rotate individually, ie independently, by driving the stepping motors. It has become.

  As shown in FIG. 1, on the lower left side of the game panel 20, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. When the start lever 41 is operated while medals have been inserted, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate all at once.

  On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43 and 44 are provided which are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M and 32R. The stop buttons 42, 43 and 44 are disposed immediately below the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M and 32R to be stopped. The respective stop buttons 42, 43 and 44 can be stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed after the left reel 32L starts to rotate.

  The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped based on the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44, and medals are awarded. And until the execution of various processes such as management of the game state is completed corresponds to one game.

  On the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R, a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting a medal as an investment value is provided. The medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 is guided to the hopper device 53 if it can be inserted by the selector 52 provided on the back of the front door 12 as shown in FIG. The medal discharge port 58 provided at the lower front of the front door 12 guides the medal receiver 59. The hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal receiver 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a prize corresponding to the awarding of medals is established on the above-mentioned effective line. There is.

  Below the medal insertion slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 is provided which is pressed when the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 is jammed in the selector 52. In addition, on the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R, a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting a credited virtual medal and a maximum amount of bets which can be bet at one time, and two virtual medals at one time A second credit insertion button 48 for the purpose and a third credit insertion button 49 for inserting one virtual medal at a time are provided.

  A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing the surplus insertion medals and the payout medals at the time of winning as the predetermined maximum value (for 50 medals) as virtual medals. When the settlement button 51 is operated under the situation where it is stored and stored, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal discharge port 58 as a real medal.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a power supply device 54 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 53 inside the housing 11. The power supply device 54 includes a power button 55 operated at the time of power on or power off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and a setting state of the slot machine 10 from "setting 1" And a setting key insertion hole 57 operated to change in the range of setting 6 ".

<The symbols attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R>
Next, the symbols attached to the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

  FIG. 3 shows the symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Moreover, although the number is attached | subjected to 0-20 corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, these numbers are in the state which the main control apparatus 70 can visually recognize from the display window parts 21L, 21M, 21R. It is a number for recognizing a symbol, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the following description will be made using the corresponding numbers.

  As a symbol, "bell" symbol (for example, 20th of left reel 32L), "replay 1" symbol (for example, 19th of left reel 32L), "watermelon" symbol (for example, 18th of left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol (for example, 15th of left reel 32L), "Replay 2" symbol (for example, 11th of left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (for example, 10th of left reel 32L), "cherry" There are nine types of symbols (for example, ninth of left reel 32L), "Replay 3" symbols (for example, sixth of left reel 32L), and "white 7" symbols (for example, fifth of left reel 32L). And as shown in FIG. 3, the number and arrangement | positioning order of various symbols in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are completely different.

  FIG. 4 is a front view of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R. Each of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R is formed such that among the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels, there are three symbols that allow the entire symbol to be visible. For this reason, in the state where all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols become visible through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

  In the slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect positions where the symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be visually recognized. The main line ML is a line connecting the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R. The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started with a prescribed number of medals bet, and when a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, a bonus such as medal payout, replay One of the benefits and the benefit of the transition of the gaming state is provided.

  That is, in the slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line on which winning can be established. The main line ML is not a straight line but a bending line. Therefore, the upper line pattern of left reel 32L, the subline SL1 connecting middle step pattern of middle reel 32M and the lower line pattern of right reel 32R, the upper line pattern of left reel 32L, the upper line pattern of middle reel 32M and the upper pattern of right reel 32R The subline SL2 connected, the middle design of the left reel 32L, the subline SL3 connecting the middle design of the middle reel 32M and the middle design of the right reel 32R, the lower design of the left reel 32L, the lower design of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R The symbol of the symbol to be won on a straight line such as subline SL4 connecting the lower symbol of the lower symbol, lower symbol of the left reel 32L, middle pattern of the middle reel 32M and subline SL5 connecting the upper symbol of the right reel 32R Even if the combination is established, the winning will not be established. The number of main lines is not limited to one, and may be two, three, four or five or more. In the configuration in which a plurality of main lines are set in this manner, the number of bets depends on the number of main lines. The number of main lines to be activated may be different. Moreover, the main line is not limited to the configuration in which it is a bending line, and may be a line extending in a straight line.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, the correspondence between the combination of symbols to be won and the benefit to be awarded will be described. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view for explaining the correspondence between a combination of symbols to be won and a benefit to be awarded when the symbol is won, and FIG. 6 (a) to FIG. 6 (g) and FIG. (A)-FIG.7 (g) are explanatory drawings for demonstrating the aspect of the stop symbol when each prize generate | occur | produces.

  As a small winning combination in which medals are paid out, there are first to twelfth compensation winnings, a first bell winning, a second bell winning, a first watermelon winning and a second watermelon winning.

  Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is one of the "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is The symbol is "Replay 1", "Replay 2" or "Replay 3", and the stop symbol for the right reel 32R is "Replay 1", "Replay 2" or "Replay 3". In the case of “1”, it becomes one of the first compensation winning to the ninth compensation winning. In addition, when the "red 7" symbol, "bell" symbol and "bell" symbol stop from the left on the main line ML, the 10th compensation prize is awarded, and from the left on the main line ML, the "BAR" symbol and "bell" symbol And when the "bell" symbol stops, it becomes the eleventh compensation prize, and when the "watermelon" symbol, the "bell" symbol and the "bell" symbol stop from the left on the main line ML, it becomes the twelfth compensation prize. In the case of one of the first to twelfth prizes, one medal is paid out in the case of a 3-bet bet, and two medals are paid out in the case of a 2-bet bet.

  The stop symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol on the middle reel 32M is either the "replay 1" symbol, the "replay 2" symbol or the "replay 3" symbol, right When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, the first bell prize is won. When the first bell prize is achieved, four medals are paid out in the case of a 3-bet bet, and two medals are paid out in the case of a 2-bet bet.

  In the case of winning the first bell, as shown in FIG. 6A, the stop symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R all become "bell" symbols in the lower subline SL4. The player can easily recognize that the winning is achieved when the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed on the straight line. In this case, by stopping and displaying the combination of the same "bell" symbols in the first bell winning, it is made easy for the player to recognize the occurrence of winnings in the configuration aiming to diversify the winning establishment mode on the main line ML. It becomes possible.

  The stop symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "cherry" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol If it is either, it will be a second bell prize. When the second bell prize is won, nine medals are paid out in the case of a 3-bet bet, and two medals are paid out in the case of a 2-bet bet.

  In the case of winning the second bell, as shown in FIG. 6B, the stop symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R all become "bell" symbols in the subline SL5 rising to the right. This makes it easy for the player to recognize that the second bell prize has been won. Further, the line on which the combination of "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed at the second bell winning is the subline SL5, and is different from the subline SL4 at which the combination of "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed on the first bell winning. Due to this difference, it is possible to make the first bell prize and the second bell prize distinguishable to the player who judges the presence or absence of the prize depending on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed.

  The stop symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is either "Replay 1", "Replay 2" or "Replay 3", and the stop symbol on the middle reel 32M is "Watermelon", right When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol, the first watermelon prize is won. When the first watermelon prize is achieved, four medals are paid out in the case of a 3-bet bet, and two medals are paid out in the case of a 2-bet bet.

  In the case of winning the first watermelon, as shown in FIG. 6C, the stop symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R can all become the "watermelon" symbol in the subline SL1 which is downwardly sloping right. This makes it easy for the player to recognize that the first watermelon prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of the left reel 32L, the combination of "watermelon" symbols is not displayed in a straight line. When the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the "cherry" symbol passes the upper, middle or lower stage, the combination of the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed in the subline SL1 at the time of the first watermelon winning.

  The stop symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is either the "BAR" symbol or the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is " If it is a "watermelon" symbol, it will be a second watermelon prize. When the second watermelon prize is won, four medals are paid out in the case of a 3-bet bet, and two medals are paid out in the case of a 2-bet bet.

  In the case of winning the second watermelon, as shown in FIG. 6D, the stop symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R all become "watermelon" symbols in the subline SL4 in the lower stage. This makes it easy for the player to recognize that the second watermelon prize has been won. The line on which the combination of "watermelon" symbols is stopped and displayed when the second watermelon is won is the subline SL4, which differs from the subline SL1 where the combination of "watermelon" symbols is stopped and displayed when the first watermelon is won. With such a difference, it is possible to make a player who judges the presence or absence of a winning according to whether or not the combination of the same symbol is stopped and displayed, distinguish between the first watermelon winning and the second watermelon winning.

  A normal replay play, a first bell replay play, a second bell replay play, a first prize as a prize to which a bonus of replay is awarded, which allows the player to play the next game without betting medals (or virtual medals). There are a Cherry Replay prize, a second Cherry Replay prize, a first Special Replay prize, a second Special Replay prize, a first Special Replay prize, a second Special Replay prize and a third Special Replay prize.

  Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is one of the "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is If the symbol is "Replay 1", "Replay 2" or "Replay 3", and the stop symbol on the right reel 32R is any of "White 7" and "Watermelon" symbols, the normal replay winning combination is It becomes.

  In the case of a regular replay prize, as shown in FIG. 6 (e), all the stop symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are "Replay 1" symbols, "Replay 2" symbols and "Replay 3" in the middle subline SL3. Become one of the symbols. This makes it easy for the player to recognize that the normal replay winning is achieved.

  The stop symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is one of the "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is "cherry" symbol When the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is either the "cherry" symbol or the "watermelon" symbol, the first bell replay prize is won.

  In the case of winning the first bell replay play, as shown in FIG. 6 (f), the stop symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R all become "bell" symbols in the upper sub-line SL2. As a result, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the first bell-replay winning is achieved. In addition, the line on which the combination of "BELL" symbols is stopped and displayed at the first bell replay win is the subline SL2, and the combination of "BELL" symbols is stopped and displayed at the first bell win and on the second bell winning. It differs from subline SL5 in which the combination of "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed. Due to this difference, the first bell replay winning combination can be distinguished for the first bell winning combination and the second bell winning combination for the player who determines the presence or absence of the winning combination depending on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed. It becomes possible.

  The stop symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is either "Replay 1", "Replay 2" or "Replay 3", and the stop symbol on the middle reel 32M is "Bell", right When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is any one of the "white 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol, the second bell replay play wins.

  In the case of winning the second bell replay play, as shown in FIG. 6 (g), the stop symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R all become "bell" symbols in the middle sub-line SL3. As a result, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the second bell replay play has been won. In addition, the line on which the combination of "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed at the time of the second bell replay play is the subline SL3, and the combination of the "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed at the time of the first bell winning. This is different from subline SL5 in which the combination of "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed and the subline SL2 in which the combination of "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed in the first bell replay play. Due to this difference, the second bell replay play is awarded to the first bell prize, the second bell prize, and the first bell replay play to the player who judges the presence or absence of the prize depending on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed. It becomes possible to make it distinguishable.

  The stop symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol And, if it is any of the "watermelon" symbol, it will be the first Cherry Replay prize.

  In the case of winning the first cherry replay, as shown in FIG. 7A, the stop symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R can all be the "cherry" symbol in the subline SL1 which is downward to the right. This makes it easy for the player to recognize that the first cherry blossom replay win has been achieved. However, depending on the stop timing of the left reel 32L or the right reel 32R, the combination of "cherry" symbols is not displayed in a straight line. When winning the combination corresponding to the first cherry replay winning, the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12 tries to stop and display the "cherry" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification A motivating presentation is performed. The two "Cherry" symbols or three "Cherry" symbols are stopped in the subline SL1 by each stop button 42 to 44 being operated to stop displaying the "Cherry" symbols by confirming the effect. It can be displayed.

  The stop symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol on the middle reel 32M is either the "replay 1" symbol, the "replay 2" symbol or the "replay 3" symbol, right When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is any of the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol, the second cherry-replay prize is won.

  In the case of winning the second cherry replay, as shown in FIG. 7B, the stop symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R can all be "cherry" symbols in the upper sub-line SL2. This makes it easy for the player to recognize that the second cherry-replay winning is achieved. However, depending on the stop timing of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of "cherry" symbols is not displayed in a straight line. When winning the combination corresponding to the second cherry replay winning, the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12 tries to stop and display the "cherry" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification A motivating presentation is performed. The two "Cherry" symbols or three "Cherry" symbols are stopped in the subline SL2 by each stop button 42 to 44 being operated to stop displaying the "Cherry" symbols by confirming the effect. It can be displayed. The line on which the combination of "cherry" symbols is stopped and displayed at the second cherry replay winning is the subline SL2, which is different from the subline SL1 at which the combination of "cherry" symbols is stopped and displayed on the first cherry replay winning. Due to this difference, it is possible to make a player who judges the presence or absence of a winning according to whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed, distinguish between the first cherry replay winning and the second cherry replay winning.

  The stop symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is either "Replay 1", "Replay 2" or "Replay 3", and the stop symbol on the right reel 32R is "Replay 1", "Replay" When it is either 2 'symbol or "Replay 3" symbol, it becomes the first special replay prize. In addition, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is arbitrary as to whether or not the first special replay winning is achieved.

  The stop symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "Replay 1" symbol, "Replay 2" In the case of any of the symbol and the "replay 3" symbol, the second special replay prize is awarded.

  When the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "white 7" symbol on the main line ML, the first special replay prize is awarded. In addition, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is arbitrary regarding whether or not the first special replay winning is to be achieved.

  When it becomes the first special replay winning, as shown in FIG. 7 (c), the stop symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are all "white 7" symbols in each of the subline SL1 going down to the right and the subline SL5 going up to the right It can be This makes it easy for the player to recognize that the first special replay winning is achieved. However, depending on the stop timing of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of "white 7" symbols is not displayed in a straight line. When winning a combination corresponding to the first special replay winning, the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12 tries to stop and display the "white 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification. A presentation that serves as a motivation is performed. The three white 7 symbols can be stopped and displayed in the sub-line SL1 by confirming the effect and stopping the display of the "white 7" symbol and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop. Note that the effect can be executed even when the player has not won the role corresponding to the first special replay winning.

  The stop symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is either "White 7" symbol or "Replay 1" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is "Cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is In the case of the "white 7" symbol, it becomes the second special replay prize.

  In the case of the second special replay winning, as shown in FIG. 7D, the stop symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R can all become the "white 7" symbol in the subline SL2 of the upper stage. In addition to this, the stop symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R can all be the "white 7" symbol in the lower sub-line SL4. This makes it easy for the player to recognize that the second special replay winning is achieved. However, depending on the stop timing of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of "white 7" symbols is not displayed in a straight line. When winning the part corresponding to the second special replay winning, the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12 tries to stop and display the "white 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification. A presentation that serves as a motivation is performed. By confirming the effect and stopping and displaying the "white 7" symbol, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop, so that the three "chi 7" symbols can be stopped and displayed in the subline SL2. In addition, the line for which the combination of the "white 7" symbol is stopped and displayed at the second special replay winning is the subline SL2 or the subline SL4, and the subline SL1 for which the combination of the "white 7" symbol is stopped and displayed at the first special replay winning. And the sub line SL5. Due to this difference, it is possible to make a player who judges the presence or absence of a prize according to whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed, distinguish between the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning. In addition, the said production | presentation may be performed also when not winning a combination corresponding to a 2nd special replay play prize.

  The stop symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is either the "white 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol or the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, the right reel When the stop symbol of 32R is "Red 7" symbol, it becomes the third special replay prize.

  In the case of the third special replay winning, as shown in FIG. 7E, the stop symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R can all be the "red 7" symbol in the lower subline SL4. This makes it easy for the player to recognize that the third special replay winning is achieved. However, depending on the stop timing of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of "red 7" symbols is not displayed in a straight line. When winning the part corresponding to the third special replay winning, the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12 tries to stop and display the "red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification. A presentation that serves as a motivation is performed. By confirming the effect and stopping and displaying the “red 7” symbol, the three “red 7” symbols can be stopped and displayed in the subline SL4 by the stop operation of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44. Note that the effect may be executed even when the player has not won the role corresponding to the third special replay winning.

  When one of the above-described replay wins, it becomes possible to play the next game while making the bet unnecessary for both the medal and the virtual medal. Specifically, when any of the replay wins in a game in which three bets of medals are made, the game of the next game may be started in a bet of three sheets, making betting unnecessary for both medals and virtual medals. It becomes possible. In addition, in the case of a game in which two bets of medals are played, it becomes possible to start the game of the next game in a two bet state, making betting unnecessary for both medals and virtual medals. .

  There is a CB (challenge bonus) winning as a state transition winning where only the transition of the gaming state is performed. Specifically, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "BAR" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol If there is, it will be a CB prize. When the CB winning is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

  The CB state is a gaming state in which, when the combination of symbols corresponding to a small winning combination in the main line ML is stopped, medals are paid out as winning establishment regardless of the presence or absence of a winning combination. For example, even if the winning flag corresponding to the first bell prize is not set to "1", if the combination of symbols corresponding to the first bell prize stops on the main line ML, the first bell prize The player is awarded the number of medals corresponding to. On the other hand, regarding the replay winning, it is established on the condition that the winning combination corresponding to the lottery is won.

  In the CB state, reel control different from the non-CB state which is not the CB state is performed. In the non-CB state, reel control is performed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can slide up to a maximum of four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. In other words, in the non-CB state, it can be said that reel control is performed for each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which is stopped before the specified time (190 msec) elapses after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. On the other hand, in the CB state, the reel control similar to that in the base game is performed for the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, but the reel control is not performed for the left reel 32L. With regard to the left reel 32L, reel control is performed in which the left stop button 42 is operated and then only a maximum of one symbol can be slid. In other words, in the CB game state, it can be said that reel control is performed on the left reel 32L to be stopped until the specified time (75 msec) shorter than the specified time elapses after the left stop button 42 is operated.

  In the CB state, the replay winning is prioritized when the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning is won, and any small winning combination occurs at 100% when the replay winning is not possible. In addition, when the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning combination has not been won, any small winning combination occurs at 100%. In this case, in the CB state, the number of bets for each game is set to two. As described above, in the case where the number of bets is two, the number of medals paid out is two regardless of which small winning combination is made. Therefore, in the CB state, only two medals are paid out when the minor winning combination is established. In addition, when the replay winning combination is established in the CB state, the number of bets in the next game is two. Therefore, in the CB state, one of two medals will be paid out in each betted game and replaying in the two bet state will occur, and in the CB state, the player's possessed medal will increase or decrease. do not do. The said CB state is complete | finished when a minor winning combination occurs 19 times.

  Note that, in the CB game, reel control that slides only up to one symbol is not limited to the left reel 32L, and control that only slides up to one symbol about the reel corresponding to the stop button operated first The reel control may be performed in which only a maximum of one symbol is slipped only for predetermined reels. Furthermore, the stop button operated in a certain order, such as a reel control in which the reel corresponding to the stop button operated second or the stop button operated last is slipped up to a maximum of only one symbol is performed Reel control may be performed in which a maximum of one design slips on a reel corresponding to.

  As described above, there are a small winning combination, a replay winning and a CB winning as modes of winning, but there are outliers in which all these winnings can not occur in the lottery results of the internal lottery. And when it comes out, as shown in FIG.7 (f), while the combination of the "white 7" symbol may be stopped on subline SL3 of middle stage as shown in FIG.7 (f), as shown in FIG.7 (g), The combination of "red 7" symbols may stop on the middle sub-line SL3. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the out-of-focus result is obtained. However, when the result of the deviation is obtained, the combination of symbols corresponding to any one of the above-mentioned winning combinations is not displayed stopped on the main line ML. In addition, since the line on which the combination of the "white 7" symbol or the combination of the "red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the case of the out result is the subline SL3, the first special replay prize, the second special replay prize and the third special This is different from the sub-line in which the combination of "white 7" symbols or the combination of "red 7" symbols is stopped and displayed in the case of the replay winning. With respect to the player who judges the presence or absence of the prize by the difference between the same symbol due to the difference, the result of the first special replay prize, the second special replay prize, and the third special replay prize is obtained. Can be distinguished.

<A device for performing various notification and various effects>
Next, an apparatus for executing various types of notification and various types of effects will be described.

  On the game panel 20 of the front door 12, a credit display portion 61 for displaying the number of virtual medals stored and stored, and the number of medals obtained at the time of winning are displayed at positions below the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R. An acquired number display unit 62 is provided. These display parts 61 and 62 are constituted by a 7-segment display, and for each segment, a single color emission type LED such as green is used.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 8A, the acquired number display unit 62 is provided with an internal state notification unit 63 separately from the segment light emitting unit 62a for displaying the acquired number. The internal state notification unit 63 uses a single color light emission type LED of a display color different from that of the segment light emission unit 62a. Further, while the segment light emitting unit 62a is disposed on the center side on the display surface of the acquired number display unit 62, the internal state notification unit 63 is disposed on the corner of the display surface of the acquired number display unit 62. There is.

  The internal state notification unit 63 is a display unit for notifying that the user is in the state of winning the CB role. In the case of winning the role of CB, unlike the other winning roles, the winning state of the relevant role of CB is carried over until the winning of the CB in the main line ML, and the winning state of the role of CB is cancelled. . In this case, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned off as a non-internal notification mode when the CB condition is not won or not, and as the internal notification mode when the CB condition is won. It is turned on. The lighting state is a state in which lighting is maintained, but instead, it may be configured to blink at a predetermined cycle.

  By providing the internal state notification unit 63, it is possible to notify the administrator or the like of the game hall that the player is in the condition of winning the CB role. The segment light emitting unit 62a of the number-of-acquisitions display unit 62 is turned on when medals or virtual medals are given at the end of one game, and turned off at the start of the next game. Is maintained until a new small winning combination is established. Therefore, in the configuration in which the internal state notification unit 63 is arranged in the acquired number display unit 62 to prevent the player from becoming too conspicuous, the acquired number display unit 62 is selected in the situation where the player is elected as the CB. In this case, it is possible to positively generate a situation in which only the internal state notification unit 63 is in the lighted state, and the administrator of the game hall can facilitate confirmation of the internal state notification unit 63. The effect of facilitating such confirmation can also be achieved by the internal state notification unit 63 having a light emission color different from that of the segment light emitting unit 62a.

  Note that other displays such as a liquid crystal display device may be used as the credit display unit 61, the segment light emitting unit of the acquired number display unit 62, and the internal state notification unit 63. Even in this case, by setting the internal state notification unit 63 in the display surface of the acquired sheet number display unit 62, confirmation of the internal state notification unit 63 can be facilitated.

  In the upper part of the front door 12, an upper lamp 64 which lights up or blinks with the progress of the game, and a pair of left and right which sound various sound effects or inform the player of the game state with the progress of the game The speaker 65 and an image display device 66 such as a liquid crystal display device for giving various information to the player are provided.

  A bonus point notification unit 67 and a stock notification unit 68 are provided below the image display device 66, and a winning number notification unit 69 is provided on the right of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R in the game panel 20. It is done.

  FIG. 8B is a front view of the reward point notification unit 67 and the stock notification unit 68. As will be described later in detail, bonus points are added when a predetermined winning combination is won in the normal AT (assist time) state and the bonus points are won, and the number of points accumulated by the addition is determined as the reference point When it reaches 7 points, the number of times of setting of the normal AT state is added once and the state shifts to the additional state.

  The reward point notification unit 67 is for notifying the number of surplus points when the number when the number of reward points is divided by 7 is 1 or more. The benefit point notification unit 67 is provided with 7 × 2 unit point display units 67a each using a single color light emission type LED, and these unit point display units 67a sandwich the stock notification unit 68 so It is evenly distributed. Seven unit point display portions 67a are provided in each of the left and right display areas, and, for example, when the number of bonus points is “1”, one each of the outermost sides in each of the left and right display areas is provided. The unit point display section 67a is turned on. For example, when the number of bonus points is "5", five unit point display sections 67a from the outside are turned on in each of the left and right display areas.

  The stock notification unit 68 is for notifying the number of quotients when the number of reward points is divided by 7 and the quotient is 1 or more. The stock notification unit 68 uses a multi-color light emission type LED, and the light emission color indicates that the number of stock in the normal AT state is equal to or more.

  FIG. 8C is a front view of the victory number notification unit 69. As will be described later in detail, a pre-branch AT state and a branch AT state exist in the normal AT state, and in the branch AT state shifted after the pre-branch AT state, battle effect is performed by the image display device 66. Then, when the normal AT state continues, a winning effect of the ally side character or a draw effect between the ally side character and the enemy side character is performed as the battle effect, and when the normal AT state does not continue, As the battle effect, defeat effect of the ally character is performed. Then, when the winning effect of the predetermined number of executions is executed in the series of normal AT states, the winning probability in the continuous AT state continuous lottery is set to the highest probability.

  The win number display unit 69 is for notifying the number of times the win effect has been executed in a series of normal AT conditions. The victory number display unit 69 is provided with 12 unit victory number display units 69a using a single color light emission type LED, the number corresponding to the predetermined number of executions, and the unit victory number display unit 69a has an outer edge It is arranged to be circular. For example, when the number of victory effects in a series of normal AT states is one, one unit victory number display section 69a is turned on, and in the case of five, for example, five consecutive unit victory numbers are displayed. The part 69a is turned on.

<Various control devices>
The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main control device 70 is attached to the back plate of the housing 11. The main control device 70 is provided with a main substrate, and the main substrate is accommodated in a substrate box as a covering means made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box includes a substantially rectangular box base and a box cover covering an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are non-openably fastened by a fastening unit. In the case of opening the substrate box, it is necessary to release the fastening state, and a broken part will occur when the fastening state is released. By checking the presence or absence of the broken portion, it is possible to simply check whether the substrate box has been opened.

  The slot machine 10 is provided with a sub control device 80 in addition to the main control device 70. The sub control device 80 is disposed on the front door 12 so as to overlap the rear of the image display device 66. Sub control device 80 executes control of upper lamp 64, speaker 65, image display device 66, benefit point notification unit 67, stock notification unit 68, and victory number notification unit 69 based on the command received from main control device 70. . In the same manner as the main control device 70, the sub control device 80 is configured such that the control substrate is accommodated in the substrate box.

<Electric Configuration of Slot Machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  The main control device 70 has a main control board 71 which controls the main control of the game. The MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71. The MPU 72 is a ROM 73 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 72 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 73 is executed. A certain RAM 74, a clock circuit 75 for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, etc. are incorporated. The fact that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 72 is not an essential configuration, and each may be configured as an individual chip.

  The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 72, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor for individually detecting that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has made one rotation), a start detection sensor 41a for detecting the operation of the start lever 41, Stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a for individually detecting the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, respective credit insertion buttons 47, 48, 49 Of the credit input detection sensor 47a, 48a, 49a which individually detects the operation of the payback detection sensor 51a which detects the operation of the settlement button 51, the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, the reset detection sensor 56a which detects the operation of the reset button 56 , The setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 And various sensors such as setting the key detection sensor 57a for detecting are connected to it, these signals from the sensors are input to the MPU 72.

  On the output side of the MPU 72, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R), a payout motor of the hopper device 53, a credit display 61, an acquired number display 62, an internal state The notification unit 63, the sub control device 80, and the like are connected. In each game, the rotational driving control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R of the reel unit 31 is performed by the MPU 72, and when the small winning combination is realized and the medal payout is executed, the driving control of the hopper device 53 is MPU72. It is done by Further, the display control of the credit display unit 61, the obtained number display unit 62 and the internal state notification unit 63 is directly executed by the MPU 72 without passing through another control device. A command is transmitted to the sub control device 80 from the MPU 72 at each timing of each game.

  In addition, an external terminal board 90 is provided on the output side of the MPU 72. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 90 is provided adjacent to the main control device 70 on the back plate of the housing 11. Although the details will be described later, the MPU 72 externally outputs various signals corresponding to the state of the slot machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall through the external terminal board 90.

  The power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply unit 54 is equipped with a power supply unit that supplies drive power to the main control unit 70 and other electronic devices in the slot machine 10 and a power failure monitoring circuit, and the power failure monitoring circuit applies power to the power supply unit from an external power supply. The voltage which is being monitored is monitored, and a power failure signal is output to the MPU 72 when the voltage falls below the reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes power failure processing by receiving a power failure signal, and enables recovery to the processing state before the power failure after power recovery. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power-off power supply unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power-off power in a situation where supply of operation power from the external power supply is cut off. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted, the data is stored and held in the RAM 74 in a state (for example, one day or two days) where backup power can be supplied by the power supply part during power interruption. Be done. However, by turning on the power of the slot machine 10 in a state where the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54 is pressed, the data stored in the RAM 74 is initialized.

  The sub control device 80 includes a sub control board 81 for executing execution control of various notifications and various effects. The MPU 82 is mounted on the sub control board 81. The MPU 82 is a ROM 83 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 82 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 83 is executed. A certain RAM 84, a clock circuit 85 for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, etc. are incorporated.

  The fact that the ROM 83 and the RAM 84 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 82 is not an essential configuration, and each may be configured as an individual chip. In addition, backup power is supplied from the power supply unit of the power supply device 54 during interruption of the supply of operating power from the external power supply to the RAM 84, and the backup power is supplied (for example, one day) And 2), the data is stored and held in the RAM 84. However, by turning on the power of the slot machine 10 in a state where the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54 is pressed, the data stored in the RAM 84 is initialized.

  The MPU 82 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The MPU 72 of the main control apparatus 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 82 as described above, and receives various commands from the MPU 72.

  An upper lamp 64, a speaker 65, an image display device 66, a benefit point notification unit 67, a stock notification unit 68, and a win number notification unit 69 are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. In the MPU 82, the light emission control of the upper lamp 64, the sound output control of the speaker 65, the display control of the image display device 66, the light emission control of the benefit point notification unit 67, the stock notification unit By executing the light emission control of 68 and the light emission control of the winning number notification unit 69, various types of notification and various effects are performed.

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 of the main control unit 70 will be referred to as the main MPU 72, the main ROM 73 and the main RAM 74, respectively. The MPU 82, the sub ROM 83, and the sub RAM 84 are referred to.

<Process Performed by Main MPU 72 and Sub MPU 82>
Next, processing executed by the main MPU 72 and the sub MPU 82 will be described. First, the contents of the basic processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described.

  The processes of the main MPU 72 are roughly classified into a normal process repeatedly executed after execution of the main process started upon power-on and a timer interrupt process periodically interrupted and started to the normal process. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process will be described first, and then the normal process will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 1.49 msec.

  In the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 74. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1". If the power failure flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

  The power failure flag is set when the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 54 is input to the main MPU 72. In the power failure process, it is first determined whether or not the transmission of the command has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, the present process is terminated to return to the timer interrupt process and the transmission of the command is completed. When the transmission of the command is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is stored in the main RAM 74. After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators not shown are turned off. Then, a determination value for determining whether or not the data in the main RAM 74 is normal is calculated when the power failure is eliminated, and is stored in the main RAM 74 to prohibit subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, the system enters an infinite loop in preparation for the fact that the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed.

  When the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed. That is, in step S104, the watchdog timer clear processing is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S105, interrupt termination declaration processing is performed to enable setting of the next timer interrupt to the main MPU 72 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process is performed to drive each stepping motor. In step S107, while reading the states of various sensors connected to the input port, a sensor monitoring process is performed to monitor whether the read result is normal or not. In step S108, timer operation processing is performed to reduce the values of the counters and timers. In step S109, a counter process is performed to externally output the result of counting the bet number of medals and the number of payouts.

  In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands to the sub control device 80 is performed. In step S111, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port. In step S112, the value of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S101 is restored to the corresponding register in the main MPU 72, respectively. Thereafter, in step S113, an interrupt permitting process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and the series of timer interrupt processes are ended.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S201, an interrupt permitting process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the start pre-processing, the process waits until the sub control device 80 or the like completes the initialization. If the initialization of the sub control device 80 or the like is completed, the process proceeds to step S203 to step S219.

  In step S203, it is determined whether the wait time before the start set in the previous game has elapsed. If the wait time before the start has not elapsed, the process of step S203 is performed again. If the wait time before the start has elapsed, the start waiting process is performed in step S204. When the wait time before the start is set, the measurement of the wait time is started when the negative determination is made once in step S203. If the wait time is not set, the process directly proceeds to step S204.

  In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay win has occurred in the previous game. If one of the replay wins has occurred, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically insert virtual medals of the same number as the previous bet number, and the start waiting process is ended. If no replay prize has occurred, it is determined whether or not the settlement button 51 has been operated, and if the settlement button 51 has been operated, medals of the same number as credited virtual medals are paid out Perform medal return processing. After completion of the medal return process or when the settlement button 51 is not operated, it is determined whether or not the medal input or the credit input button 47 to 49 is operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If any one of the bet numbers is determined, the medal insertion process is performed to change the bet number, and the start waiting process is ended. If neither medal insertion nor the operation of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is ended.

  After completion of the start waiting process, it is determined in step S205 whether the bet number of medals has reached a specified number ("3" or "2" in this embodiment), and the bet number has not reached a specified number. In this case, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204. If the bet number has reached the specified number, the external output setting process before the start is executed in step S206. In the external output setting process, various settings for external output to the hall computer HC through the external terminal plate 90 are performed. Thereafter, in step S207, it is determined whether the start lever 41 has been operated.

  When the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204. On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the specified number of medals are bet, so the game is started to be started. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, after the main line ML is validated, the bet acceptance is prohibited by controlling the selector 52 in step S208. Thereafter, in step S209, a lottery process is performed to draw a lottery for the part in the current game, and in step S210, various settings are externally made to the hall computer HC through the external terminal plate 90. Execute external output setting processing at the start of. Then, in step S211, it is determined whether the freeze time set in the lottery process in step S209 has elapsed. If the freeze time has not elapsed, the process of step S211 is performed again. If the freeze time has elapsed, the process of step S212 and the subsequent steps is performed. When the freeze time is set, measurement of the freeze time is started when the determination in step S211 is negative. If the freeze time is not set, the process proceeds to step S212 and thereafter.

  In step S212, a reel control process is performed to drive and control each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Thereafter, in step S213, medal payout processing is executed. In the medal payout process, when a small winning combination is established in the current game, a process for providing the player with medals or virtual medals of the number corresponding to the small winning combination is executed. Specifically, when giving a virtual medal, a value corresponding to the small winning combination is added to the virtual medal area provided in the main RAM 74, and the value of the virtual medal area reaches the maximum value. If it is, the hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that medals for a few minutes exceeding the maximum value are paid out to the medal receiver 59.

  Thereafter, in step S214, CB state processing for controlling the CB state is executed, and in step S215, bonus AT management processing for controlling the bonus AT (assist time) state is executed, and further, in step S216. Then, an external output setting process at the end time for performing various settings on the external output to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 90 is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S217, it is determined whether or not the pre-start wait flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". If an affirmative determination is made in step S217, the process returns directly to step S201. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S217, it is determined in step S218 whether or not the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has not elapsed, the process of step S218 is performed again. If the wait time has elapsed, the bonus AT setting process is performed in step S219, and then the process returns to step S201. When the wait time is set, measurement of the wait time is started when the determination in step S218 is negative. If the wait time is not set, the process directly proceeds to step S219.

  Hereinafter, the lottery process of step S209, the reel control process of step S212, the CB state process of step S214, and the bonus AT management process of step S215 will be described in detail. In addition, about the external output setting process of step S206, step S210, and step S216, after demonstrating the flow of a game, it demonstrates in detail.

<Lottery processing>
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the lottery process of step S209 in the normal process (FIG. 11).

  In step S301, a random number to be used when performing a pass / fail determination of the winning combination is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates a random number of 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the main MPU 72 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the main RAM 74. With this configuration, the random number can be acquired promptly at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

  After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for performing a pass / fail determination of the winning combination is read from the main ROM 73. In the slot machine 10, there are three types of gaming states in which the lottery table is different in the main side MPU 72: CB non-internal state, CB internal after state, and CB in state. In step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the contents of the flag corresponding to the gaming state provided in the main side RAM 74, and a lottery table corresponding to the gaming state is selected. Specifically, when the current gaming state is CB non-internal state, the non-internal state lottery table is selected, and when the current gaming state is CB internal post state, the internal post state lottery table is selected. If it is selected and the current gaming state is the CB state, the CB state lottery table is selected.

  Further, in the slot machine 10, there are prepared in six stages the winning probability from "setting 1" to "setting 6", and the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole to perform an ON operation and perform a predetermined operation. Thus, it is possible to set which internal process is to be executed based on which of the winning probabilities. The internal after-state lottery table is prepared in one-to-one correspondence to the six-step setting states, and in step S302, the internal after-state in which the expected value of medal payout is lowest when the setting state is "setting 1". The user selects the lottery table, and selects the internal after-state lottery table having the highest expectation value of medal payout in the case of “setting 6”. On the other hand, only one type of lottery table for non-internal state and lottery table for CB is prepared so as to be common to all setting states.

  Each lottery table will be described. First, the non-internal state lottery table will be described with reference to the explanatory view of FIG. In the following description, the explanatory view of FIG. 15 will be appropriately referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 13, index values IV are set in the lottery table for non-internal state, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination to be won and a point value PV is set. . The point value PV defines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value (“65535”) of the free run counter.

  Specifically, the second bell winning data, the first compensating winning data, the fifth compensating winning data, and the ninth compensating win data are set to IV = 1. In the case of winning with IV = 1, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, as shown in FIG. The bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In other cases, any one of the first compensating winning, the fifth compensating winning and the ninth compensating winning may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the first compensation winning, the fifth compensation winning and the ninth compensation winning may occur.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the second bell winning data, the second compensating winning data, the fourth compensating winning data, and the ninth compensating win data are set in IV = 2. In the case of winning with IV = 2, as shown in FIG. 15, the second stop is the second middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In other cases, any of the second compensating winning, the fourth compensating winning and the ninth compensating winning may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the second compensation winning, the fourth compensation winning and the ninth compensation winning may occur.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the second bell winning data, the second compensating winning data, the sixth compensating winning data, and the seventh compensating winning data are set in IV = 3. In the case of winning with IV = 3, as shown in FIG. 15, the second stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. The bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In other cases, any of the second compensating winning, the sixth compensating winning and the seventh compensating winning may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the second compensation winning, the sixth compensating winning and the seventh compensating winning may occur.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the second bell winning data, the third compensating winning data, the fifth compensating winning data, and the seventh compensating winning data are set in IV = 4. In the case of winning with IV = 4, as shown in FIG. 15, the second stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In other cases, any of the third compensating winning, the fifth compensating winning and the seventh compensating winning may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the third compensation winning, the fifth compensation winning and the seventh compensation winning may occur.

  In IV = 5, as shown in FIG. 13, the first bell winning data, the first compensating winning data, the third compensating winning data, the fourth compensating winning data, the fifth compensating winning data, and the eighth The supplementary winning data and the ninth supplementary winning data are set. In the case of winning with IV = 5, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the first bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, Otherwise, any of the first compensation winning, the third compensating winning, the fourth compensating winning, the fifth compensating winning, the eighth compensating winning and the ninth compensating winning may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, any of the first compensation prize, the third compensation prize, the fourth compensation prize, the fifth compensation prize, the eighth compensation prize and the ninth compensation prize does not occur. there is a possibility. The probability of this drop is lower than in the case of IV = 1 to 4.

  In IV = 6, as shown in FIG. 13, the first bell winning data, the first compensating winning data, the second compensating winning data, the fourth compensating winning data, the sixth compensating winning data, and the eighth The supplementary winning data and the ninth supplementary winning data are set. In the case of winning with IV = 6, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the first bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, Otherwise, any of the first compensation prize, the second compensation prize, the fourth compensation prize, the sixth compensation prize, the eighth compensation prize and the ninth compensation prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, any of the first compensation prize, the second compensation prize, the fourth compensation prize, the sixth compensation prize, the eighth compensation prize and the ninth compensation prize does not occur. there is a possibility. The probability of this drop is lower than in the case of IV = 1 to 4.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the first watermelon winning data, the second watermelon winning data, the tenth compensating winning data, the eleventh compensating winning data, and the twelfth compensating winning data are set to IV = 7. ing. In the case of winning with IV = 7, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the first watermelon winning or the second watermelon winning can be established. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that neither the first watermelon winning or the second watermelon winning may occur. Further, in the case where the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, any of the tenth compensation prize, the eleventh compensation prize and the twelfth compensation prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the tenth compensation winning, the eleventh compensating winning and the twelfth compensating winning may occur.

  As shown in FIG. 13, normal replay winning data is set to IV = 8. In the case of winning with IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 15, the regular replay winning is surely generated regardless of the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44.

  As shown in FIG. 13, CB winning data is set to IV = 9. In the case of winning with IV = 9, CB winning can occur regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the CB winning will not occur.

  When the lottery table for non-internal state is selected, the probability of being elected when IV = 1, the probability of being elected when IV = 2, the probability of being elected when IV = 3, when IV = 4 The probability of winning in each is about 1 / 9.3, the probability of winning in the case of IV = 5, and the probability of winning in the case of IV = 6 are respectively about 1 / 11.6. The probability of winning is about 1 / 66.7 when IV = 7, the probability of being won when IV = 8 is about 1/7, and the probability of winning when IV = 9 is It is about 1 / 4.3.

  Next, the internal rear state lottery table will be described with reference to the explanatory view of FIG. In the following description, the explanatory view of FIG. 15 will be appropriately referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 14, index values IV are set in the internal rear state lottery table as in the case of the non-internal state lottery table, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination. And the point value PV is set.

  The winning data set to IV = 1 to 8 is the same as in the case of the non-internal state lottery table.

  The first bell replay play winning data and the first cherry replay replay winning data are set in IV = 9. In the case of winning with IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the first bell replay play is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Otherwise, the first Cherry Replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44.

  In IV = 10, as shown in FIG. 14, second bell replay play winning data, first cherry replay replay winning data, and first special replay winning data are set. When the winning is made at IV = 10, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second bell replay winning or the first special replay winning occurs. In this case, the second bell replay winning may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, while the first special replay winning occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Do. When IV = 10 and the left reel 32L is stopped for the first time, if the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 is the timing to enable the occurrence of the second bell replay play, the second bell replay play is won In the case where it is the timing at which the occurrence of the second bell replay winning is not possible, the first special replay winning occurs. Further, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, the first cherry replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44.

  As shown in FIG. 14, in IV = 11, first bell replay play winning data, first cherry replay replay winning data, second special replay winning data, and third special replay winning data are set. In the case of winning with IV = 11, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the first bell replay play winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. . In the other cases, the first cherry replay win, the second special replay win, or the third special replay win occurs. In this case, the second special replay winning and the third special replay winning may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, but the first cherry replay winning is for each stop button 42 to 44. It occurs regardless of the operation timing. When IV = 11 and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped first, the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 enables the generation of the second special replay prize or the third special replay prize If it is the timing where the occurrence of the second special replay prize or the third special replay prize is prioritized and the occurrence of the second special replay prize or the third special replay prize is not possible, the first cherry replay prize is awarded. Occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the second bell-replay winning data, the first cherry-replay winning data, the first special-replay winning data, and the second special-replay winning data are set to IV = 12. In the case of winning with IV = 12, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second bell replay play winning or the first special replay winning occurs. In this case, the second bell replay winning may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, while the first special replay winning occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Do. When IV = 12 and the left reel 32L is stopped for the first time, if the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 is the timing to make it possible to generate the second bell replay play, the second bell replay play winning combination In the case where it is the timing at which the occurrence of the second bell replay winning is not possible, the first special replay winning occurs. When the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, the first cherry replay win or the second special replay win occurs. In this case, the second special replay winning may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, while the first cherry replay winning occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Do. When IV = 12 and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time, the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 is the timing to enable the generation of the second special replay prize. 2) The occurrence of the special replay winning is prioritized, and when it is the timing when the occurrence of the second special replay winning is not possible, the first cherry replay winning occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the second bell-replay winning data, the first cherry-replay winning data, the first special-replay winning data, and the first special-replay winning data are set to IV = 13. In the case of winning with IV = 13, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second bell replay play winning or the first special replay winning occurs. In this case, the second bell replay winning may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, while the first special replay winning occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Do. When IV = 13 and the left reel 32L is stopped for the first time, if the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 is the timing to enable the occurrence of the second bell replay play, the second bell replay play win In the case where it is the timing at which the occurrence of the second bell replay winning is not possible, the first special replay winning occurs. Further, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, the first cherry replay winning or the first special replay winning occurs. In this case, the first special replay winning may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, while the first cherry replay winning occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Do. When IV = 13 and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time, the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 is the timing to enable the generation of the first special replay prize. 1) The occurrence of the special replay winning is prioritized, and when it is the timing when the occurrence of the first special replay winning becomes impossible, the first cherry replay winning occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the first cherry replay replay winning data is set to IV = 14. In the case of winning with IV = 14, as shown in FIG. 15, the first Cherry Replay winning combination surely occurs regardless of the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. .

  As shown in FIG. 14, second cherry replay replay winning data is set to IV = 15. When winning at IV = 15, as shown in FIG. 15, the second cherry-replay winning combination surely occurs regardless of the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. .

  As shown in FIG. 14, in IV = 16, first special replay winning data and second special replay winning data are set. In the case of winning with IV = 16, as shown in FIG. 15, the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning occurs regardless of the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In this case, while the second special replay winning may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, the first special replay winning occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Do. In the case of winning with IV = 16, the occurrence of the second special replay winning is prioritized when the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 is the timing that enables the occurrence of the second special replay winning, and the second When it is the timing when the occurrence of the special replay winning becomes impossible, the first special replay winning occurs.

  When the internal post state lottery table is selected, the probability of being elected when IV = 1, the probability of being elected when IV = 2, the probability of being elected when IV = 3, when IV = 4 The probability of winning in each is about 1 / 9.3, the probability of winning in the case of IV = 5, and the probability of winning in the case of IV = 6 are respectively about 1 / 11.6. The probability of winning is about 1 / 66.7 when IV = 7, and the probability of being won when IV = 8 is about 1 / 2.9, and it is won when IV = 9 The probability is about 1/65, the probability of winning in IV = 10 is about 1/135, and the probability of winning in IV = 11 is about 1/3277, in the case of IV = 12. The probability of winning is approximately 1/1456, and the probability of winning at IV = 13 is approximately 1/1456, at IV = 14. The probability of winning is about 1/212, the probability of winning when IV = 15 is about 1/185, and the probability of winning when IV = 16 is about 1/328, IV = The probability of becoming an out-of-place result that does not win any of 1 to 16 is 1 / 65,536.

  Next, the CB state lottery table will be described.

  In the CB state lottery table, the index value IV is set in the same manner as the non-internal state lottery table and the internal after state lottery table, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination. And a point value PV is set. In the CB state lottery table, only normal replay winning data is set as IV = 1, and other winning data is not set. Further, the winning probability is the same as in the case of the internal state lottery table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning probability of the normal replay role may be higher or lower than that of the internal rear state lottery table.

  As described above, only the normal replay role is set in the CB state lottery table, but as described above, in the CB state, in the situation where the ordinary replay role is not won, the small winning combination is won regardless of the result of the lottery process. The reel control is executed so that any small winning combination is surely generated in a situation in which the player is not normally elected as the replay player. Therefore, in the CB state, the normal replay winning occurs reliably when the normal replay winning combination is won, and any small winning combination occurs reliably when the normal replay playing combination is not won.

  Returning to the description of the lottery process (FIG. 12), after the lottery table is selected in step S302, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and in the subsequent step S304, the determination value DV used when determining the success or failure of the winning combination is set. Do. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current determination value DV. In the first determination value setting process, the random number value acquired in step S301 is set as the current determination value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to 1 which is the current index value IV is added to the random number value to obtain a new value. The judgment value is set to DV.

  Thereafter, in step S305, it is determined whether or not the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV. It is determined whether the determination value DV exceeds 65535 in the success or failure determination of the winning combination. If it exceeds 65,535, the process proceeds to step S306, and the winning data acquisition process for setting the data of the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 is executed.

  In the winning data acquisition process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16, first, in step S401, the corresponding winning flag setting process is executed. For example, when IV = 1 is won in a state in which the inside of the CB is behind, among the flags provided in the main RAM 74, a flag indicating that IV = 1 has been won, and a second bell winning “1” is set to each of the flag, the first compensation winning flag, the fifth compensation winning flag, and the ninth compensation winning flag. Further, for example, when IV = 8 is won in a state in which the inside of the CB is in the internal state, a flag indicating that IV = 8 is won among the flags provided in the main side RAM 74, and a normal replay winning Set "1" to each of the flags.

  In the following step S402, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the CB winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 in the immediately preceding step S401. If an affirmative determination is made in step S402, the lighting process of the internal state notification unit 63 is performed in step S403, and the process of acquiring the winning data is ended. As a result, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned on, and the administrator of the game hall and the player are notified that the internal state of the CB is in the after state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S402, it is determined in step S404 whether the normal replay winning flag is set to "1". If an affirmative determination is made in step S404, a push order lottery process is executed in step S405, and in step S406, a push order command including push order data corresponding to the result of the push order lottery process is After being set to be transmitted to the side MPU 82, the process of acquiring the winning data is ended.

  As described above, when the normal replay role is won, the ordinary replay prize occurs regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In this case, in step S405, a push order lottery process is executed to generate a trigger for setting an AT1 signal described later to the OFF state. In the pressing order lottery process, the first stop target reel and the second stop target reel are determined by a lottery, and a lottery is performed so that the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is selected as the first stop target reel. The sub MPU 82 controls the display of the image display device 66 so that the stop order of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the push order data of the push order command is displayed when the normal AT state described later is continuous. Run. The actions and effects of the execution of the process will be described in detail later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S404, it is determined in step S407 whether the first special replay winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S407, the process of acquiring the winning data is ended. When an affirmative determination is made in step S407, a value corresponding to the first freeze time (specifically, 39 seconds) is set in the freeze counter provided in main RAM 74 in step S408, and then the winning data is selected. End acquisition processing of.

  If the value of the freeze counter is 1 or more, a negative determination is made in step S211 in the normal process (FIG. 11), and execution of the process from step S212 is on standby. That is, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not started. Also, the value set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process of step S108 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10). As a result, when "1" is set to the first special replay winning flag as a result of the lottery process, the start of the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is waited for 39 seconds. In the freeze period, as described later, the control by the sub MPU 82 is executed such that the speaker 65 and the image display device 66 perform the first freeze corresponding effect. Thus, the player can clearly recognize that the first special replay role has been won.

  When the winning flag in which “1” is set is not the CB winning flag, “0” is cleared after the end of the game in which the winning flag is set. On the other hand, when the winning flag in which “1” is set is the CB winning flag, it is reset under one of the conditions that the CB winning is achieved. That is, the state in which “1” is set to the CB winning flag may be validated over a plurality of games.

  Returning to the description of the lottery process (FIG. 12), if the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the player has fallen out of the role corresponding to the index value IV. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and it is determined in step S308 whether or not there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the index value IV incremented by one has exceeded the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined whether the determination is yes or no, the process returns to step S304, and the determination of the combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the determination value DV (that is, the current determination value DV) used to determine the success or failure of the previous combination to obtain a new determination value DV. In step S305, it is determined whether or not a winning combination has been made on the basis of the determination value DV.

  If it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination object to be determined as a result of the determination, it means that the lottery processing result of the current game is the outlier. In this case, in step S309, the flag in the main RAM 74 is checked to determine whether or not the internal state of the CB is followed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S309, a value corresponding to the second freeze time (specifically, 35 seconds) is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74 in step S310.

  As already described above, when the value of the freeze counter is 1 or more, a negative determination is made in step S211 in the normal process (FIG. 11), and execution of the process from step S212 is on standby. That is, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not started. Also, the value set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process of step S108 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10). As a result, when the result of the lottery process is out in the post-CB internal state, the start of the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is on standby for 35 seconds. In the freeze period, as described later, the control by the sub MPU 82 is executed so that the second freeze-compatible effect is executed in the speaker 65 and the image display device 66. As a result, the player can clearly recognize that the lottery result is out in the post-CB internal state.

  When the process of step S306 is performed, when a negative determination is made in step S309, or when the process of step S310 is performed, it means that the success or failure determination of the winning combination has ended. In this case, a lottery result command is set in step S311. The lottery result command is a command transmitted to the sub control device 80 in order to grasp the result of the winning determination of the winning combination, and the lottery result command includes data corresponding to the result of the winning determination of the winning combination. Thereafter, in step S312, stop information first setting processing for setting stop information for reel stop control is performed, and the lottery process is ended.

<Reel control processing>
Next, the reel control process of step S212 in the normal process (FIG. 11) will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  In the reel control process, first, in step S501, a rotation start process for starting rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed. In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the reel starts rotating in the previous game, and if the wait time has not elapsed, the wait time has elapsed Wait until you do. If the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and motor control initialization processing is performed to set rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74. By performing such processing, acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing of step S106 in the timer interrupt processing, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotation. Thereafter, the process waits until the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and the rotation start process is ended. In addition, when the rotational speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the main MPU 72 can generate a stop command by lighting on the lamps (not shown) of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Inform the player etc. of the event.

  Following the rotation start process, in step S502, it is determined whether any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated. When none of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated, the process waits until any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S503, and it is determined whether or not the stop button corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether a stop command has been generated. Do. If the stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S502, and waits until any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. If a stop command has been issued, a stop command is set in step S504.

  The stop command command is a command transmitted to the sub control device 80 in order to grasp which stop button 42 to 44 is operated and a stop command is generated. When the stop instruction command is set, the stop control process shown in steps S505 to S511 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

  In step S505, the symbol number of the reaching symbol which has reached the base position (the lower end in this embodiment) is confirmed at the timing when the stop button is operated. Specifically, the symbol number of the arrival symbol reaching the base position is confirmed by the excitation pulse number output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S506, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74.

  In the slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the stop mode for stopping the arrival symbol reaching the base position as it is when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated To stop after sliding 1 reel of reels, stop after stopping by sliding 2 reels, stopping after sliding 3 stops, and stopping after sliding 4 reels Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, including stopping modes. Therefore, in step S506, based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74, one of the values 0 to 4 is calculated as the slip number.

  After that, in step S507, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the arrival symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol to be actually stopped at the base position is determined. In step S508, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal. If it is equal, the reel stop processing for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed in step S509. Do. Thereafter, in step S510, it is determined whether all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed in step S511, and the process returns to step S502.

  Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12), and by using the stop information, each stop information is used. When the stop button 42 to 44 is operated to stop, it is possible to calculate the slip number (specifically, "0" to "4") for the arrival symbol reaching the base position. As the stop information, slip number data indicating the correspondence between each symbol and the slip number is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in association with each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that slip number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived during rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, etc. .

  As the process for setting the above-mentioned stop information, the first stop information setting process executed in step S312 of the lottery process (FIG. 12) and the stop information executed in step S511 of the reel control process (FIG. 17) There is a second setting process. In the stop information first setting process, the stop information is set according to the lottery process result. If the stop information set in this case is IV = 1 to 7 in the CB non-internal state, the stop information corresponding to the relationship between the first stop and the winning combination as shown in FIG. If IV = 1 to 7 and 9 to 13 in the rear state, stop information corresponding to the relationship between the first stop and the winning combination as shown in FIG. 15 is set.

  The stop information second setting process is a process for changing the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 in the stop information first setting process or the previous stop information second setting process after the reel is stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the stop appearance of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Do. In the slot machine 10, the winning data set and stop command are set when the winning is made in the case of IV = 1 to 7 and 9 to 13 in the CB non-internal state and the CB internal rear state (see FIG. 15). The stop information second setting process is performed to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 that generated the and the stop number.

  By the way, the symbols that form the symbol combinations corresponding to the first bell prize, the second bell prize, the normal replay prize, the first bell replay prize, the first cherry replay prize, the second cherry replay prize or the first special replay prize are The corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged such that the maximum number of symbols separated in the circumferential direction is four symbols. In this configuration, the combination of the lottery process result and the stop order of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the first bell prize, the second bell prize, the regular replay prize, the first bell replay prize, the first cherry replay prize, the first 2) In the case where any of the cherry-replay winning combination and the first special replay winning combination is made, stop information is set such that the winning is generated regardless of the operation order of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

  In addition, while in the internal state after the CB, it will be elected to any of the small winning combination or replay role under the situation that “1” is set to the CB winning flag, but in this case, the small winning combination winnings corresponding to that winning Alternatively, the stop information is set such that the replay winning is prioritized over the CB winning. For example, when winning in IV = 1 in the internal state after CB, even if the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at a timing that can generate a CB prize, the small winning a prize is won in relation to the stop information. The small winning combination occurs by selecting the number of priority slips and the CB winning does not occur. Also, for example, when the player is won in the replay role in the internal state of the CB, even if the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at a timing at which the CB prize can be generated, the replay win is performed in relation to the stop information. By selecting the number of priority slips, the replay prize occurs and the CB prize does not occur. However, when the lottery result is out of the results, there is no combination whose occurrence is prioritized over the CB prize, so the CB prize may occur depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

  Returning to the description of the reel control process (FIG. 17), when it is determined in step S510 that all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the prize determination process is executed in step S512, and the process proceeds to step S513. After a winning result command including data corresponding to the result of the winning determination process is set as an output target to the sub control device 80, the present reel control process is ended.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the winning determination process.

  In the prize determination process, in step S601, the type of symbol stopped on the main line ML in the left reel 32L is grasped, and in step S602, the symbol stopped on the main line ML in the middle reel 32M. The type is grasped, and in step S603, the type of the symbol stopped on the main line ML in the right reel 32R is grasped. At the time of grasping the type of the symbol, 2-byte data set for each type of symbol is read out from the main ROM 73. Then, in step S604, 2-byte data corresponding to a combination of symbols is obtained by AND processing each 2-byte data grasped in steps S601 to S603 with bits in the same order as logical operation processing of symbol combination. Derive data.

  In the following step S605, it is determined whether the 2-byte data derived in step S604 corresponds to any winning data. When an affirmative determination is made in step S605, a winning handling process is executed in step S606. In the winning response process, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the winning flag corresponding to the winning which occurred this time, and when "1" is not set, an abnormal command is output to the sub control device 80 Set as target. In the sub MPU 82, when the abnormal command is received, the speaker 65 and the image display device 66 execute an abnormality notification corresponding to the incorrect winning. If “1” is set in the winning flag, the number of medals to be paid out is set on the main side so that medals or virtual medals can be awarded in the medal payout process if the winning is a small winning combination. Set in the payout target counter of the RAM 74. On the other hand, if the winning is the replay winning, in the next step S204 in the normal processing (FIG. 11), a flag setting process for enabling the same number of bets as the current bet number is executed.

  Thereafter, the bell winning determination process is executed in step S607, and the normal replay pressing order determination process is executed in step S608. These processes are processes for switching the ON / OFF state of the AT1 signal output to the hall computer HC through the external terminal plate 90. Details of these processes will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S605, or if the process of step S608 is executed, the process proceeds to step S609, and the second special replay winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 or in the current lottery process (FIG. 12) It is determined whether "1" is set in the third special replay winning flag. If a negative determination is made in step S609, the first weight setting process is performed in step S610, and then the winning determination process is ended. If a positive determination is made in step S609, the first weight setting process is performed in step S611. After executing the two-weight setting process, the winning determination process is ended. The first weight setting process and the second weight setting process will be described later.

<CB state processing>
Next, the CB state process executed in step S214 of the normal process (FIG. 11) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S701, it is determined whether the gaming state is the CB state by determining whether the CB state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S701, it is determined in step S702 whether "1" is set in the CB hit flag provided in the main RAM 74 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S702, the present CB state process is terminated, and if a positive determination is made in step S702, the process proceeds to step S703. Further, in step S703, it is determined whether or not a CB winning has occurred by determining whether or not “1” is set in the CB formation flag provided in the main RAM 74. If a negative determination is made in step S703, the present CB state process is terminated, and if a positive determination is made in step S703, the process proceeds to step S704.

  In step S704, the CB status flag is set to "1", and the CB hit flag and the CB formation flag are cleared to "0". In the subsequent step S 705, “19” is set in the CB middle counter provided in the main RAM 74. The CB middle counter is a counter for specifying by the main MPU 72 whether or not the number of small winning combinations generated in the CB state has reached the CB end condition number.

  In the following step S706, "2" is set in the bet specified number counter provided in the main RAM 74. As a result, in step S205 of the normal process (FIG. 11), it is determined whether the bet number is "2". Therefore, if the number of bets has not reached "2", the operation of the start lever 41 is invalidated, and three or more bets can not be made.

  In the subsequent step S 707, the process of turning off the internal state notification unit 63 is executed. As a result, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned off, and the administrator of the gaming hall and the player are notified that the internal state after the internal CB termination has ended. Thereafter, in step S708, a CB start command including data indicating that the CB in progress state is started is set as an output target to the sub control device 80, and the present CB state processing is ended. As a result, the sub MPU 82 controls the speaker 65, the image display device 66, and the like so that the effect corresponding to the CB state is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is in the CB state and an affirmative determination is made in step S701, it is determined in step S709 whether or not the small winning combination is established in the current game. If a negative determination is made in step S709, the present CB state process is ended, and if a positive determination is made in step S709, the process proceeds to step S710.

  In step S710, the value of the CB counter in the main RAM 74 is decremented by one. Then, in step S711, it is determined whether or not the value of the CB middle counter is “0”. If it does not become "0", the present CB state processing is ended as it is, and if it becomes "0", it proceeds to the processing of step S712 to step S714.

  In step S 712, the CB status flag is ended by clearing “0” to the CB status flag of the main RAM 74. In the following step S713, "3" is set in the bet specified number counter of the main RAM 74. As a result, in step S205 of the normal process (FIG. 11), it is determined whether the bet number is "3". Therefore, if the number of bets has not reached "3", the operation of the start lever 41 is invalidated, and four or more bets can not be made.

  Thereafter, in step S714, a CB end command including data indicating that the CB in progress state has ended is set as an output target to the sub control device 80, and the present CB state processing is terminated. As a result, the sub MPU 82 ends the effect corresponding to the CB on state in the speaker 65, the image display device 66, and the like.

<Mode of transition of gaming state generated under control of the main MPU 72>
Next, the mode of transition of the gaming state generated under the control of the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the explanatory view of FIG.

  When the main RAM 74 is initialized, or when the setting change is performed under the condition that the CB hit flag is "0", the CB non-internal state ST1 is obtained. For example, at the time of the business start of the game hall etc., it becomes CB non-internal state ST1. In the CB non-internal state ST1, the normal replay probability is about 1/7. In the CB non-internal state ST1, no other replay role is set as the lottery role. Further, in the CB non-internal state ST1, the CB probability is about 1 / 4.3, and the payout occurrence probability is about 1 / 1.6. However, in the CB non-internal state, the control for the AT state is not executed in the sub-side MPU 82, and further, it is necessary to correct the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 which become 1/4 for the first bell prize. Since it is necessary to make correct answers in the order of pressing the stop buttons 42 to 44 which becomes 1/2 for the second bell prize, the number of sheets to be paid out even if the payout occurrence probability is a relatively high probability of about 1 / 1.6. Is basically one. This number is less than three, which is the specified number of bets.

  When the player is elected to the role of CB in the non-CB internal state ST1 and the CB prize is not generated, the processing shifts to the post-CB internal state ST2. Further, the state after CB internal state ST2 is also shifted when the setting change is performed under the condition that the CB hit flag is "1". In the CB internal rear state ST2, the normal replay probability is higher than the CB non-internal state ST1 and becomes approximately 1 / 2.9. Further, in the post-CB internal state ST2, since the replay role is present in addition to the normal replay role, the probability of occurrence of replay becomes higher. Further, in the post-CB internal state ST2, since the CB winning flag is already set to "1", the CB combination is not set as the lottery combination.

  Further, in the CB internal rear state ST2, the payout occurrence probability is approximately 1 / 1.6. Here, in the CB internal rear state ST2, control for the AT state can be executed in the sub MPU 82 as described in detail later. In the situation where the control for the AT state is not executed, as in the case of the CB non-internal state ST1, even if the payout occurrence probability is relatively high at about 1 / 1.6, the number of sheets to be paid out is basically It becomes one sheet. This number is less than three, which is the specified number of bets. On the other hand, in the situation where the control for AT state is being executed in sub side MPU 82, the pushing order of stop buttons 42 to 44 for achieving the first bell prize is informed and the stop for the second bell prize The pushing order of the buttons 42 to 44 is notified. As a result, in the AT state, the payout occurrence probability is relatively high at about 1 / 1.6, and the number of sheets to be paid out is basically nine or four. This number is greater than three, which is the specified number of bets.

  If a CB prize occurs in the internal state CB2 or if a CB prize is won in the CB non-internal state ST1 and a CB prize is generated in the game, the process proceeds to the CB state ST3. In the CB middle state ST3, as described above, a small winning combination or a replay winning occurs in each game. However, in the CB in-progress state ST3, the prescribed number of bets is limited to “2”, and therefore, even if a minor winning combination occurs, the number of coins to be paid out is limited to two. Therefore, in the CB state ST3, the medals owned by the player neither decrease nor increase. When the small winning combination is generated 19 times in the CB in progress state ST3, the state shifts to the CB non-internal state ST1.

<Light emission control mode of internal state notification unit 63>
Next, the light emission control mode of the internal state notification unit 63 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  21 (a) shows the execution period of the CB winning game, FIG. 21 (b) shows the execution period of the CB internal state, FIG. 21 (c) shows the execution period of the CB internal state, FIG. Shows the light emission period of the internal state notification unit 63.

  At timing t1, as shown in FIG. 21A, the game in which the role of CB is won is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 21D, the lighting of the internal state notification unit 63 is started at the timing of the time t1. The start of lighting of the internal state notification unit 63 at the start of the game winning the role of CB in this manner allows the player to start the stop operation of the button corresponding to the final stop reel among the stop buttons 42 to 44 It is possible to make the player recognize that the player has won the CB role by then.

  Thereafter, at t2, as shown in FIG. 21A, the game in which the role of CB is won ends. In this case, since the CB prize has not occurred, as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at time t3, a CB prize is generated, whereby the after-CB internal state ends as shown in FIG. 21 (b), and the state shifts to the CB state as shown in FIG. 21 (c). Further, at the timing of t3 when the state shifts to the state of CB, as shown in FIG. 21D, the internal state notification unit 63 is extinguished.

  Thereafter, at time t4, the CB in progress state ends as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (a) at the timing of t5, the game winning the CB role is started again, and the lighting of the internal state notification unit 63 is started as shown in FIG. 21 (d), At the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 21 (a), the game winning the CB role is completed without the establishment of the CB prize, thereby shifting to the CB internal rear state as shown in FIG. 21 (b). .

<First weight setting process>
Next, the first weight setting process executed in step S610 of the winning determination process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S801, it is determined whether the first special replay winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" in the current lottery process (FIG. 12). When an affirmative determination is made in step S801, the number-of-times lottery processing at the first special time is executed in step S802. In the first special number of times lottery process, the first number lottery table stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and the value of the number lottery counter periodically (eg, 1.49 msec) updated in the main RAM 74 is used. The data of the number of bonus ATs corresponding to the value of the number-of-times lottery counter is read out from the first number lottery table. Specifically, one, two and three times are set as the bonus AT number, the probability that one is selected is 2/10, and the probability that two is selected is 5/10. The probability that 3 times is selected is 3/10. Then, in step S803, a value corresponding to the result of the number lottery process in step S802 is set in the bonus AT frequency counter provided in the main RAM 74.

  In this slot machine 10, even if "1" is set to the first bell winning flag as described above, the correct answer is in the order of pressing the stop buttons 42 to 44, which becomes 1/4 to generate the first bell prize. Even if the second bell winning flag is set to “1”, it is necessary to correct the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 which are 1⁄2 in order to generate the second bell winning. In this case, the display control is performed by the sub MPU 82 so that the pressing order that is the correct answer in the image display device 66 is notified by being in the AT state. Therefore, in the AT state, nine or four payouts will occur with high probability. This number is greater than three, which is the specified number of bets.

  As the AT state, management of transition trigger and termination trigger is performed by the sub MPU 82 without the management of transition trigger and termination trigger being performed by the sub MPU 82, and management of transition trigger and termination trigger is performed by the main MPU 72. There is a bonus AT condition that can not be made. The bonus AT state is shifted by setting the bonus AT number counter to a value of 1 or more. The normal AT state will be described in detail later.

  After the process of step S803 is executed in the first weight setting process, it is determined in step S804 whether the value of the bonus AT counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. The bonus AT counter is a counter for specifying the number of continuations of one bonus AT state by the main MPU 72.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S804, the present first weight setting processing is ended as it is, and if a negative determination is made in step S804, the process proceeds to step S805. In step S805, the pre-start wait flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and in step S806, the value of the start wait time (8 sec) is set in the wait counter provided in the main RAM 74. The weight counter is a counter for measuring the wait time forcibly set in the game by the main MPU 72, and the pre-start wait flag indicates the set wait time at the end of the set game and next The main MPU 72 is a flag for specifying at which timing of the start of the game to be generated.

  Thereafter, after the start wait command is set as an output target to the sub control device 80 in step S807, the present first weight setting process is ended. By receiving the start weight command, the sub MPU 82 performs various controls so that the speaker 65 and the image display device 66 execute the effect corresponding to the start weight.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S801, the value of the CB winning flag is "1" in step S808, and it is determined whether or not the current lottery process (FIG. 12) resulted in an outlier. judge. By the way, as already explained, the probability that the lottery result will be out in the post-CB internal state is 1 / 65,536.

  If a negative determination is made in step S808, the present first weight setting processing is ended as it is, and if a positive determination is made in step S808, the process proceeds to step S809. In step S809, the number lottery process at the time of the outlier is executed. In the number-of-times lottery process at the time of the deviation result, the second number lottery table stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and the value of the number lottery counter periodically (for example, 1.49 msec) is read in the main RAM 74 The data of the bonus AT number corresponding to the value of the number-of-lots selection counter is read out from the second number lottery table. Specifically, the bonus AT number is set once, twice and three times, the probability that one is selected is 1/10, and the probability that two is selected is 3/10. The probability that 3 times is selected is 6/10. That is, when the second number lottery table is referred to, it is easier to select a greater number of bonus ATs than when the first number lottery table is referred to. Then, in step S810, a value corresponding to the result of the number drawing process in step S809 is set in the bonus AT number counter provided in the main RAM 74.

  Thereafter, in step S811, it is determined whether the value of the bonus AT counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. If an affirmative determination is made in step S811, the present first weight setting process is ended as it is, and if a negative determination is made in step S811, the process proceeds to step S812.

  In step S812, the weight generation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and in the subsequent step S813, the value of the start wait time (8 sec) is set in the weight counter of the main RAM 74. The weight generation flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that the wait time is generated at the end of the current game. Thereafter, in step S814, the start wait command is set as an output target to the sub control device 80, and the first weight setting process is ended. By receiving the start weight command, the sub MPU 82 performs various controls so that the speaker 65 and the image display device 66 execute the first weight-corresponding effect.

  As described above, when the first special replay role is won in the after state in the CB or when the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) is out in the after state in the CB, the bonus AT state is entered. In particular, when the first special replay role is won, a prize different from that of the first special replay prize may occur depending on the stop order of each stop button 42 to 44 and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, but bonus AT The state transitions regardless of the type of winning that occurred.

<Second weight setting process>
Next, the second weight setting process executed in step S611 of the winning determination process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The second weight setting process is activated when “1” is set in the second special replay winning flag or the third special replay winning flag as described above.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether the output state of the AT1 signal through the external terminal plate 90 is in the ON state. The AT1 signal is a signal output from the slot machine 10 in order to make the hole computer HC recognize whether or not it is a normal AT state. In step S902, it is determined whether the first stop of the current game is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R. If a negative determination is made in step S901 or step S902, the second weight setting process is ended as it is, and if a positive determination is made in both step S901 and step S902, the process proceeds to step S903.

  In step S903, the second special number-of-times lottery process is executed. In the second special number of times lottery process, the third number lottery table stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and the value of the number lottery counter periodically (eg, 1.49 msec) updated in the main RAM 74 is used. It is read out and the data of the number of bonus ATs corresponding to the value of the number of times drawing counter is read out from the third number drawing table. Specifically, the bonus AT number is set once, twice and three times, the probability that one is selected is 7/10, and the probability that two is selected is 2/10. The probability that 3 times is selected is 1/10. That is, when the third number lottery table is referred to, it is easier to select a smaller number of bonus ATs than when the first number lottery table and the second number lottery table are referred to. Then, in step S904, a value corresponding to the result of the number drawing process in step S903 is set in the bonus AT number counter of the main RAM 74.

  Thereafter, in step S905, it is determined whether the value of the bonus AT counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. If an affirmative determination is made in step S905, the present second weight setting processing is ended as it is, and if a negative determination is made in step S905, the process proceeds to step S906.

  In step S906, the wait flag before start of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and in step S907, the value of the start wait time (8 sec) is set in the wait counter of the main RAM 74. Thereafter, in step S 908, the start wait command is set as an output target to the sub control device 80, and the second weight setting process is ended. By receiving the start weight command, the sub MPU 82 performs various controls so that the speaker 65 and the image display device 66 execute the first weight-corresponding effect.

  As described above, when the second special replay role or the third special replay role is won in the CB internal rear state, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state, and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop. It shifts to the bonus AT state on the condition that it is operated. However, if the second special replay role or the third special replay role is won, the first special even if the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Although a winning combination different from the replay winning combination may occur, the type of the winning combination does not matter at the time of transition to the bonus AT state.

<Bonus AT management processing>
Next, the bonus AT management process executed in step S215 of the normal process (FIG. 11) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the bonus AT state is established by determining whether the bonus AT state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". By making a negative determination in step S1001, it is determined in step S1002 whether the value of the bonus AT number counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the bonus AT management process is ended as it is.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, in step S1003, the bonus AT counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "30" which is the number of continuations of one set, and the bonus AT state of the main RAM 74. Set the flag to "1". The bonus AT counter is a counter for specifying the number of continuations of one bonus AT state by the main MPU 72. Thereafter, in step S1004, after the bonus AT start command is set as an output target to the sub control device 80, the present bonus AT management processing is ended. The sub MPU 82 recognizes that the bonus AT state has been started by receiving the bonus AT start command, and sets the contents of the effects in the speaker 65, the image display device 66, etc. as the contents corresponding to the start of the bonus AT state. .

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, the value of the bonus AT counter in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 in step S1005. Then, in step S1006, it is determined whether the value of the bonus AT counter is "0". If not "0", the bonus AT management process is ended as it is, and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step S1007.

  In step S1007, the value of the bonus AT frequency counter in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1, and in the subsequent step S1008, it is determined whether the value of the bonus AT frequency counter is "0". If it is "0", the bonus AT status flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" in step S1009, and the bonus AT end flag provided in the main RAM 74 is "1" in step S1010. Set ". The bonus AT end flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the bonus AT state has ended.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1008, or if the process of step S1010 is executed, the value of the end wait time (5 sec) is set in the weight counter of the main RAM 74 in step S1011. Thereafter, in step S1012, the bonus AT end command is set as an output target to the sub control device 80, and the bonus AT management process is ended. The bonus AT end command is data corresponding to the value of the bonus AT number counter, that is, data indicating whether a new execution cycle of the bonus AT state is started after the execution cycle of the bonus AT state is ended. Is included.

  If the sub MPU 82 receives a bonus AT end command including data indicating that a new execution cycle of the bonus AT state is started, the speaker 65 performs an effect indicating that the bonus AT state continues. And control the image display device 66 and the like. On the other hand, when a bonus AT end command not including data indicating that a new execution cycle of the bonus AT state is started is received, the speaker 65 and the image are performed such that an effect indicating that the bonus AT state is ended is executed. Control the display 66 and the like.

  Here, in the normal process (FIG. 11), when it is determined in step S218 that the end wait time has elapsed, a bonus AT setting process is executed in step S219. In the bonus AT setting process, the processes of steps S1001 to S1004 in the bonus AT management process (FIG. 24) are executed. That is, when the bonus AT status flag is "0" and the value of the bonus AT number counter is 1 or more, "30" is set in the bonus AT counter and "1" is set in the bonus AT status flag. , And further transmit a bonus AT start command to the sub MPU 82. As a result, when the bonus AT state is continuous, the bonus AT state of the new execution time is started from the game immediately after the final game of the bonus AT state of one execution time is finished.

  In addition, since the end wait time intervenes between the bonus AT state of one execution time and the bonus AT state of the new execution time as described above, the consecutive ATs between consecutive bonus AT states at consecutive time A period of time to execute various operations for short time is secured.

<The situation when the first special replay wins or loses>
Next, how the first special replay wins or falls out in the CB internal rear state will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 25 (a) shows the execution period of the bonus AT state, FIG. 25 (b) shows the execution period of the game when the first special replay wins or falls out, and FIG. 25 (c) shows the other games. 25 (d) shows a freeze period, and FIG. 25 (e) shows a wait period.

  At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the game for which the first special replay is won is started, and as shown in FIG. 25 (d), a freeze period (39 sec) occurs. During this freeze period, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not started. After that, as shown in FIG. 25D, the freeze period ends at the timing of t2. In this case, rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. Then, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), when the current game ends, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), the bonus AT state is started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 25C at time t4, a new game is started, and as shown in FIG. 25E, the wait period set at the end of the previous game is started. Be done. During this wait period, the bet setting by the previous replay winning is not performed and the operation of the start lever 41 is not activated. Thereafter, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 25E, the wait period ends. In this case, the bet setting by the previous replay winning is performed, and the operation of the start lever 41 is activated. Then, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 25C, the current game ends.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the game in which the first special replay is won is started again at time t7, which is a situation where the bonus AT state continues. In this case, as shown in FIG. 25 (d), while the freeze period occurs from the timing of t7 to the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 25 (e), from the timing of t9 to the timing of t10. No wait period occurs in the next game to be continued.

  That is, even if the first special replay is won, the wait period occurs if the bonus AT state is not in effect, but the wait period does not occur if the bonus AT state is in effect. As a result, when the first special replay win occurs in a situation that is not in the bonus AT state, the execution period of the effect corresponding to the transition to the bonus AT state is secured while securing the bonus execution state in order to enhance the player's sense of superiority. When the first special replay win occurs in a situation in the AT state, it is possible to enhance the sense of speed of the game in the bonus AT state by omitting the period.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), at the timing of t11 after the end of the bonus AT state, a game in which the lottery result is out is obtained. In this case, as shown in FIG. 25 (d), a freeze period occurs from the timing of t11 to the timing of t12, and as shown in FIG. 25 (e), from the timing of t13 to the timing of t14. , A wait period occurs in this game. At timing t14 when the wait period ends, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the game resulting in the out result ends, and as shown in FIG. 25 (a), the bonus AT state starts. Be done. Then, at time t15, as shown in FIG. 25C, a new game is started under the bonus AT state.

<The situation when the second special replay win or the third special replay win>
Next, the situation when the second special replay win or the third special replay win is made in the CB internal rear state will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  26 (a) shows the execution period of the normal AT state, FIG. 26 (b) shows the execution period of the bonus AT state, and FIG. 26 (c) shows the second special replay win or the third special replay win. The execution period of the game in the case is shown, FIG. 26 (d) shows the execution period of the other games, and FIG. 26 (e) shows the wait period.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (a), at the timing of t1 in the normal AT state, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the game in which the second special replay win or the third special replay win is started is started. . Then, at the timing of t2, when the game ends as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the normal AT state is ended as shown in FIG. 26 (a), and the game is shown in FIG. 26 (b). As such, the bonus AT state is initiated.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (d) at time t3, a new game is started, and as shown in FIG. 26 (e), the wait period set at the end of the previous game is started. Be done. During this wait period, the bet setting by the previous replay winning is not performed and the operation of the start lever 41 is not activated. Thereafter, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 25E, the wait period ends. In this case, the bet setting by the previous replay winning is performed, and the operation of the start lever 41 is activated. Then, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 26 (d), the current game ends.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26C, the game in which the second special replay win or the third special replay win is started, as shown in FIG. And while the said game is complete | finished at the timing of t7, the following game is started from the timing of t8. However, no wait period occurs in the game.

  That is, even if the second special replay win or the third special replay win, the wait period occurs if the bonus AT state is not in effect, but the wait period does not occur if the bonus AT state is in effect. As a result, when the second special replay win or the third special replay win occurs in a situation not in the bonus AT state, an execution period of an effect corresponding to the transition to the bonus AT state in order to suitably enhance the player's sense of superiority. In the situation where it is bonus AT state, when 2nd special replay winning or 3rd special replay winning occurs, it is possible to improve the sense of speed of the game in bonus AT state by omitting that period It becomes.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26C, the game in which the second special replay win or the third special replay win is made, as shown in FIG. It is started. And while the said game is complete | finished at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG.26 (d), the following game is performed at the timing of t11. However, no wait period occurs in the game. Furthermore, even if the game is over, the transition to the bonus AT state does not occur.

  In other words, even if the second special replay win or the third special replay win is made in a situation other than the normal AT state, the transition to the bonus AT state is not triggered. This makes it possible to increase the profit for the player staying in the normal AT state, and to increase the degree of attention to the normal AT state. Also, as described above, since the wait period is not generated under the situation where the transition to the bonus AT state is not triggered, the weight period for effect is generated under the situation where the player does not generate a profit. Is suppressed, which makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Relationship between CB Medium State and Bonus AT State>
Next, the relationship between the CB in-progress state and the bonus AT state will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  27 (a) shows the setting status of the CB winning flag, FIG. 27 (b) shows the execution period of the CB in progress state, and FIG. 27 (c) shows the execution period of the game resulting from the disconnection. 27 shows execution periods of other games, FIG. 27 (e) shows an execution period of the bonus AT state, and FIG. 27 (f) shows timing when the number of games is counted.

  As shown in FIG. 27 (a), at the timing of t1 under the condition that “1” is set to the CB winning flag, the game of the out result is started as shown in FIG. 27 (b) and the timing of t2 And the game is over. In this case, a CB prize occurs at the end of the game. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27 (e), at the timing of t2, the bonus AT state is not only started, but also the CB winning flag is cleared to “0” as shown in FIG. 27 (a). As shown in (b), the CB in progress state is also started. In this case, since the CB state is prioritized as the gaming state, the specified number of bets, the contents of the lottery process, the mode of reel control, and the number of payouts for the small winning combination are set to those in the CB state. . However, the progress of the bonus AT state is not waited, and the number of games executed in the CB state is digested as a game in the bonus AT state.

  After that, under the condition of being in the CB state and being in the bonus AT state, the game is executed at the timing of t3 and the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 27 (d) and FIG. 27 (f). Is counted. Thus, the game digest in the CB state and the game digest in the bonus AT state occur simultaneously. Then, at time t5, the small winning combination is generated 19 times in the CB state, and the CB state is ended as shown in FIG. 27 (b). As a result, only the bonus AT state is obtained. However, as shown in FIG. 27A, since the CB hit flag is in the state of “0” and is in the CB non-internal state, the main MPU 72 executes the processing to advance the bonus AT state, but the sub MPU 82 In this case, notification of the push order for generating the first bell winning and the second bell winning is not executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 27 (d) and 27 (f), the game is executed in the non-CB internal state and in the bonus AT state at timings of t6 and t7, etc., and the number of games is Will be counted. Then, at timing t8, as shown in FIG. 27A, the player is elected to the role of CB and "1" is set in the CB winning flag. Thus, not only the process of advancing the bonus AT state is executed in the main MPU 72, but also notification of the pushing order for generating the first bell winning and the second bell winning is executed in the sub MPU 82.

<Execution control of various notification and various effects in sub side MPU 82>
Next, the processing configuration of the sub MPU 82 for executing various types of notification and various types of effects will be described.

<Periodic processing>
First, periodic processing periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) executed by the sub MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1101, it is determined whether a new command has been received from the main MPU 72. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, the command received this time is stored in the ring buffer provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1102. The ring buffer is a buffer capable of storing a plurality of commands, and the write processing of the command to the area indicated by the write pointer is executed and the write pointer is updated each time the write processing is executed. The read processing of the command from the area indicated by the pointer is performed and the read pointer is updated each time the read processing is performed. Note that the update of the read point is performed when the cycle process of the next process cycle is started when the command read is performed in one process cycle of the cyclic process.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1101 or if the process of step S1102 is performed, it is determined in step S1103 whether or not the internal state of the CB is followed. The sub MPU 82 receives the lottery result command corresponding to the winning of the CB from the main MPU 72 as described later, thereby specifying that the internal state after the CB start is started, and the internal start of the CB by receiving the CB start command. Identify that the post state has ended.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1103, in step S1104, it is determined whether the sub MPU 82 is executing control for AT by checking the flag provided in the sub RAM 84. Determine If the negative determination is made in step S1104, the non-AT processing is executed in step S1105, and if the positive determination is made in step S1104, the AT processing is performed in step S1106. The non-AT processing and the AT processing will be described in detail later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1103, if the process of step S1105 is performed, or if the process of step S1106 is performed, then in step S1107, the setting of the freeze period and the setting of the wait period in the main MPU 72 are performed. A standby effect setting process for executing a corresponding effect or notification is performed, and a CB setting process for executing an effect or notification corresponding to the CB in-progress state in step S1108. Run.

  Thereafter, in step S1109, setting processing of display data for executing presentation or notification is executed by displaying a moving image or a still image on the image display device 66, and in step S1110, the upper lamp 64 and bonus points Executes setting processing of light emission data to execute light emission control of notification unit 67, stock notification unit 68, and victory number notification unit 69, and outputs sound and voice for presentation and notification through speaker 65 in step S1111 Execute setting processing of sound output data to be performed. Thereafter, the periodic process ends.

<Standby effect setting process>
Next, the standby effect setting process of step S1107 in the periodic process (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command corresponding to the first special replay win is received from the main MPU 72. If the lottery result command has been received, then in step S 1202, the CPU sets the first freeze flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 to “1”, and then ends the standby effect setting process. By setting “1” to the first freeze flag, it is possible to display a moving image corresponding to the first freeze time (39 sec) in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). The data table to be read out is read out from the sub ROM 83, and the signal output to the image display device 66 is performed according to the data table. Thus, the display effect corresponding to the first freeze time is performed in the image display device 66. Further, in the process of setting light emission data (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the first freeze time is read, and in the process of setting sound output data in the periodic process (FIG. 28) (step S1111) Sound output data corresponding to the first freeze time is read out, and light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. Thereby, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, a light emission effect and a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect corresponding to the first freeze time in the image display device 66 are performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not a lottery result command corresponding to the out result in the CB internal state is received from the main MPU 72. If the lottery result command has been received, then in step S 1204, the second freeze flag provided in the sub RAM 84 is set to “1”, and then the standby effect setting process is ended. By setting “1” to the second freeze flag, it is possible to display a moving image corresponding to the second freeze time (35 sec) in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). The data table to be read out is read out from the sub ROM 83, and the signal output to the image display device 66 is performed according to the data table. Thus, the display effect corresponding to the second freeze time is performed in the image display device 66. Further, in the process of setting light emission data (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the second freeze time is read, and in the process of setting sound output data in the periodic process (FIG. 28) (step S1111) Sound output data corresponding to the second freeze time is read out, and light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. Thereby, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, a light emission effect and a sound output effect according to the display effect in the image display device 66 are performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined in step S1205 whether a start wait command has been received from the main MPU 72 or not. If the start wait command has been received, then in step S 1206, the start wait flag provided in the sub RAM 84 is set to “1”, and the standby effect setting process is ended. Data for enabling display of a moving image corresponding to the start wait time (8 sec) in the setting process (step S1109) of display data in the periodic process (FIG. 28) by setting “1” to the start wait flag The table is read from the sub ROM 83, and a signal output to the image display device 66 is performed according to the data table. Thereby, the display effect corresponding to the start weight time is performed in the image display device 66. Specifically, a display effect indicating that the transition to the bonus AT state has occurred is performed. Further, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the start wait time is read, and in the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28) Sound output data corresponding to the wait time is read out, and light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. Thereby, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, a light-emitting effect and a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect corresponding to the start weight time in the image display device 66 are performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1207 whether a bonus AT end command has been received from the main MPU 72 or not. If the bonus AT end command has been received, then in step S1208, the bonus AT end flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1" and then the standby effect setting process is ended. By setting “1” to the bonus AT end flag, the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28) enables the display of a moving image corresponding to the end wait time (5 sec). The data table is read from the sub ROM 83, and a signal output to the image display device 66 is performed according to the data table. Thereby, the display effect corresponding to the end wait time is performed in the image display device 66. Specifically, a display effect indicating that one set of bonus AT states has ended is performed. Further, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the ending wait time is read, and in the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28) Sound output data corresponding to the wait time is read out, and light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. Thereby, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, a light emission effect and a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect corresponding to the end wait time in the image display device 66 are performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1207, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not a continuous weight command has been received from the main MPU 72. The continuous wait command is a command transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the output state of the AT1 signal set to the ON state is once set to the OFF state and then set to the ON state again as described later. Then, when the output setting of the AT1 signal is performed, the main MPU 72 sets a continuous waiting time (1 sec).

  If the continuous weight command has not been received, the process for setting the standby effect is ended. On the other hand, when the continuous weight command has been received, in step S1210, the continuous wait weight flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1", and then the standby effect setting process is ended. By setting “1” to the flag for continuous setting weight, in the setting process (step S1109) of display data in the periodic process (FIG. 28), it is possible to display a still image corresponding to continuous setting wait time (1 sec) The data table to be read out is read out from the sub ROM 83, and the signal output to the image display device 66 is performed according to the data table. Thereby, the display effect corresponding to the continuous weight time is performed in the image display device 66.

<CB setup process>
Next, the CB setting process of step S1108 in the periodic process (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not a winning result command corresponding to the winning of the CB combination and the absence of the CB is received from the main MPU 72. If the winning result command has been received, the CB internal flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1" in step S1302. As a result, the sub MPU 82 can recognize that the internal state of the CB is after.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1301 or if the process of step S1302 is performed, it is determined in step S1303 whether a CB start command has been received from the main MPU 72 or not. When the CB start command is received, "1" is set in the CB in-flag flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1304, and the CB internal flag in the sub-side RAM 84 is "in step S1305. 0 "clear. As a result, the sub MPU 82 can recognize that it is in the CB state.

  Further, by setting “1” to the flag during CB, in the process of setting display data (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), a data table capable of displaying a moving image corresponding to the state during CB is obtained. It reads from the sub ROM 83, and outputs a signal to the image display device 66 according to the data table. Thereby, the display effect corresponding to the CB in-progress state is performed in the image display device 66. Further, in the process of setting light emission data (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the state during CB is read out, and in the process of setting sound output data in the periodic process (FIG. 28) (step S1111) Sound output data corresponding to the middle state is read out, and light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. Thereby, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, a light-emitting effect and a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect corresponding to the CB in-state in the image display device 66 are performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1303, or if the process of step S1305 is executed, it is determined in step S1306 whether the "under CB" flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1". If “1” is set in the in-CB flag, the effect content update process is executed in step S1307. In the processing for updating the contents of the rendering, processing for updating the display of the remaining number of small winnings in the CB displayed on the image display device 66 in response to the reception of the winning result command from the main MPU 72 In addition to the execution, processing for notifying information of the winning combination is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1306, or if the process of step S1307 is executed, it is determined in step S1308 whether a CB end command has been received from the main MPU 72 or not. If the CB end command is not received, the present CB setting process is ended as it is. If the CB end command is received, the flag in the CB of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to “0” in step S1309. , This CB setting process ends. As a result, the effect corresponding to the CB state in the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65 and the image display device 66 is ended.

<Process during non-AT in sub side MPU 82>
Next, the contents of processing in the non-AT executed by the sub MPU 82 will be described. Prior to the description of the specific processing contents executed by the sub MPU 82, a transition mode from the non-AT state to the AT state will be described with reference to the explanatory view of FIG.

  In a non-AT state in the CB internal rear state (hereinafter referred to as a normal state ST11), as an aspect transitioning to a state (hereinafter referred to as a normal AT state ST12) in the CB internal rear state and a normal AT state There are three types of aspects.

  In the first transition mode, when the sub-side RAM 84 is initialized, the normal AT state ST12 ends and the normal state ST11 is entered, or the bonus AT state ST17 ends and the normal AT state ST12 is entered. In the case of shifting to the normal state ST11 without transitioning, there is a case where the number of games for the number of ceiling games determined by the lottery in the sub MPU 82 is digested. In this mode, when transitioning to the normal AT state ST12, first, transition to the ceiling game precursor state ST13 is made, and thereafter, the number of ceiling games is digested (ST14) to become the normal AT state ST12. The ceiling game precursor state ST13 is transitioned to when the number of ceiling games is remaining 32 games. In the ceiling game precursor state ST13, as the effect contents of each game in the image display device 66, the effect that the expectation to the transition to the normal AT state ST12 is higher than that in the normal state ST11 and not the ceiling game precursor state ST13 It becomes easy to execute.

  Even in the situation where the number of ceiling games is not the remaining 32 games, a false precursor state is obtained by being won by the false precursor lottery in the sub MPU 82. In the false precursor state, as the presentation contents of each game in the image display device 66, the degree of expectation of the transition to the normal AT state ST12 is more than the normal state ST11 and neither a ceiling game precursor state ST13 nor a false precursor state. Is more likely to be performed.

  The second transition mode is activated in the activation lottery process executed in response to the winning of a predetermined role, and is shifted to the transition chance state ST16, and the replay role is elected in the transition chance state ST16. It is a case where it is a transition winning in the transition lottery process executed with the event of becoming a transition. However, when the termination condition of the transition chance state ST16 is satisfied without being a transition winning, the normal state ST11 is restored without transitioning to the normal AT state ST12. In the transition chance state ST16, the display effect for clearly indicating to the player that the transition chance state ST16 is in effect is executed by the image display device 66.

  When transitioning to transition chance state ST16, first transition is made to transition opportunity precursor state ST15, and transition to transition chance state ST16 is made by the number of aproportions of games being digested in the transition opportunity precursor state ST15. In the transition chance omen state ST15, the presentation content of each game in the image display device 66 is such that the expectation of the transition to the transition chance state ST16 is higher than that in the normal state ST11 and not the transition chance omen state ST15. It becomes easy to execute.

  Even if it is not in the transition chance precursor state ST15, the sub MPU 82 will be in the false precursor state by being elected by the false precursor lottery in the sub-side MPU 82. In the false omen state, as the presentation contents of each game in the image display device 66, the expectation of the transition to the transition chance state ST16 is more than the normal state ST11 and neither the transition chance precursor state ST15 nor the false omen state. Is more likely to be performed.

  The third transition mode is a case where the bonus AT state ST17 is entered, and the transition is made after the bonus AT state ST17 is completed. However, when the bonus AT state ST17 is shifted under a penalty state described later, even if the bonus AT state ST17 ends, the transition to the normal AT state ST12 is not made. A transition from the normal AT state ST12 to the bonus AT state ST17 may also occur.

<Non-AT processing>
Next, the non-AT processing in step S1105 in the periodic processing (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S1401, it is determined whether a lottery result command has been received from the main MPU 72 or not. If the lottery result command has been received, the winning combination data corresponding to the lottery result command is written in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1402.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1401 or if the process of step S1402 is executed, it is determined in step S1403 whether or not a stop instruction command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the stop instruction command has been received, the stop order data is written in the sub-side RAM 84 in order to store the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the current game in step S1404.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1403, or if the process of step S1404 is performed, it is determined in step S1405 whether a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 or not. If the winning result command has not been received, the non-AT in-progress process ends, and if the winning result command is received, the process proceeds to step S1406.

  In step S1406, it is determined whether the current winning result command corresponds to the transition to the bonus AT state. Specifically, when data indicating that the first special replay role has been won in the after state in the CB is specified from the winning result command, or data indicating that the out result is in the after state in the CB is When it is specified from the winning result command, an affirmative determination is made in step S1406. In addition to that, data indicating that the second special replay role or the third special replay role is won in a situation where the internal state of the CB is in the state where the AT1 signal is in the ON state is specified from the prize result command. Also in the case where it is specified by the stop order data stored in the sub-side RAM 84 that the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, an affirmative determination is made in step S1406.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1406, it is determined in step S1407 whether data indicating that the second special replay role or the third special replay role is won is included in the winning result command. Do. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1407, this means that the transition to the bonus AT state has occurred under a penalty situation.

  Specifically, on condition that the first bell winning or the second bell winning has occurred three times as a result of stopping other than the left reel 32L as the first stop although the sub MPU 82 is not in the AT state. As will be described later, when the AT1 signal is turned ON, and the second special replay role or the third special replay role is won under the situation, and the rest except the left reel 32L is stopped as the first stop, the main MPU 72 plays a game. Transition the state to the bonus AT state. However, since this event is a penalty target event, the sub MPU 82 does not set the AT state. Therefore, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1407, "1" is set in the penalty AT flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1408. The said penalty AT flag is a flag for specifying in sub side MPU82 that it is a bonus AT state which generate | occur | produced under the penalty condition.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1407, or if the process of step S1408 is performed, "1" is set in the bonus AT flag provided in sub-side RAM 84 in step S1409, and Set "4" to the provided execution target counter. The bonus AT flag is a flag for specifying in the sub MPU 82 that the gaming state managed in the main MPU 72 is the bonus AT state, and the execution target counter sub-processes the processing content to be executed in the AT state It is a counter for specifying in side MPU82. By setting “4” to the execution target counter, the sub MPU 82 executes processing for advancing the bonus AT state. Thereafter, the non-AT in-progress process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1406, it is determined in step S1410 whether or not a penalty event has occurred. The penalty event is an event in which the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as a first stop in the non-AT state in the internal state after the CB and any winning occurs. If a penalty event occurs, the actual medal awarding rate may be higher than the medal awarding rate in the non-AT state set at the design stage of the slot machine 10. Therefore, when a penalty event occurs, the player is disadvantaged to urge the user to stop the left reel 32L as the first stop during the non-AT state.

  When a penalty event occurs, the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28) sets the image data for the penalty, and the sound output data setting process (step S1111). The sound output data for the penalty is set at. Thus, the player is notified that a penalty event has occurred.

  If a penalty event has occurred, addition processing to a penalty counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is executed in step S1411. In the addition process, “5”, which is a value corresponding to the number of games corresponding to a penalty, is added to the value of the penalty counter. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the transition to the AT state is delayed by the value of the penalty counter. Thereafter, the non-AT in-progress process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1410, a transition chance management process is executed in step S1412, and a ceiling game management process is executed in step S1413. Then, after the winning a prize correspondence processing is executed in step S1414, the present non-AT in-progress processing ends. In the winning response processing, processing for causing an image corresponding to the current winning combination to be displayed on the image display device 66 is performed, and a sound corresponding to the occurrence of winning is output through the speaker 65. Execute the process to

<Transition chance management processing>
Next, the transition chance management process of step S1412 in the non-AT process (FIG. 32) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Since the transition chance management process is activated on the condition that the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72, the transition chance management process is activated at the end of each game in the non-AT state.

  First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the transition chance state is in progress by determining whether the value of the transition chance counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. The transition chance counter is a counter for specifying whether the transition chance state or not and the termination opportunity of the transition chance state with the sub MPU 82. If the transition chance state is not in progress, it is determined in step S1502 whether or not the transition chance precursor state is in progress by determining whether or not the value of the transition standby counter provided in the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more. Determine The transition standby counter is a counter for specifying with the sub MPU 82 whether the transition opportunity precursor state or not and the termination opportunity of the transition opportunity precursor state.

  If the transition opportunity precursor state is not in progress, it is determined in step S1503 whether or not the transition opportunity activation trigger has been won. If the player is elected at any of IV = 7, 9 to 12, 14 to 16 in the internal state lottery table (FIG. 14), it is determined that the transition opportunity activation trigger is elected. However, even in the case where the transition opportunity activation trigger has been won, if the transition to the bonus AT state is triggered, an affirmative determination is not made in step S1503.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, it is determined in step S1504 whether or not the value of the penalty counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the transition opportunity of the transition chance state does not occur by not executing the processing of steps S1505 to S1508. On the other hand, if the value of the penalty counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S1505.

  In step S1505, an activation lottery table corresponding to both the current transition chance activation trigger and the number of digested games after the previous transition to the non-AT state is read out from the sub side ROM 83. Then, in step S1506, the value of the sub-lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) is read in the sub-side RAM 84, and the value of the sub-lottery counter is collated with the activated lottery table.

  Here, zero, one, two and three times are set as the transition chance remaining number in the activated lottery table. Also, in the activated lottery table, the larger the value of the winning IV, the higher the probability that one or more transition chances will be selected and the probability that a larger number of transition chances will be selected. The probability that one or more is selected as the number of remaining transition chances and the probability that the number of remaining transition chances is selected are larger as the number of digested games after the previous transition to the non-AT state increases. It is set to be high.

  In step S1507, it is determined whether one or more transition chance remaining numbers have been selected in the activation lottery process of step S1506. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1507, in step S1508, the number of remaining transition chances selected in the present activation lottery process is added to the remaining transition chance counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84. The transition chance remaining counter is a counter for specifying by the sub MPU 82 whether or not there is a transition opportunity to the transition chance state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1503, a positive determination is made in step S1504, a negative determination is made in step S1507, or if the process of step S1508 is performed, sub-side RAM 84 in step S1509. It is determined whether or not the value of the transition chance remaining counter is 1 or more. If a negative determination is made in step S1509, the present transition opportunity management process is ended as it is, and if a positive determination is made in step S1509, the process proceeds to step S1510.

  In step S1510, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling game counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is equal to or less than the regulation reference number 64. The ceiling remaining game counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining ceiling games in the sub MPU 82. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1510, the present transition opportunity management process is ended without performing the setting to the transition opportunity precursor state. This makes it possible to prevent transition events to the transition chance state or to stay in the transition opportunity state immediately before the transition to the normal AT state occurs due to the number of ceiling games being digested. Multiple transition triggers to the state are prevented from occurring.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1510, "10", which is the number of continued games in the transition chance precursor state, is set in the transition standby counter of the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1511. This is a sign of transition chance. Thereafter, the present transition chance management process is ended. When the value of the transition standby counter is 1 or more, the effect content of the image display device 66 is the content corresponding to the transition chance precursor state.

  If the transition opportunity sign state is reached, the process proceeds to step S1512 by making an affirmative determination in step S1502. In step S1512, it is determined whether the value of the penalty counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. If the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the present transition chance management process is ended. As a result, in the penalty state, the number of continued games in the transition chance precursor state is not digested, and the transition to the transition chance state is delayed.

  If the value of the penalty counter is "0", the value of the transition standby counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is decremented by 1 in step S1513, and the value of the transition standby counter becomes "0" in the subsequent step S1514. It is determined whether the If a negative determination is made in step S1514, the present transition chance management process is ended as it is, and if a positive determination is made in step S1514, the process proceeds to step S1515.

  In step S1515, the value of the transition chance remaining counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is decremented by one. In the subsequent step S1516, "10", which is the number of continued games in the transition chance state, is set in the transition chance counter of the sub-side RAM 84. This is a transition chance state. Thereafter, the present transition chance management process is ended. When the value of the transition chance counter is 1 or more, the display effect for clearly indicating to the player that the state of the transition opportunity is in the image display device 66 is executed.

  If the transition opportunity state has been reached, the process proceeds to step S1517 by making an affirmative determination in step S1501. In step S1517, processing during a transition opportunity is executed. Thereafter, the present transition chance management process is ended.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing processing during a transition opportunity.

  First, in step S1601, it is determined whether the player has won an expectation improvement role. The expectation improvement role is the same as the transition opportunity invocation trigger determined in step S1503 in the transition opportunity management process (FIG. 33). That is, when the player wins on any of IV = 7, 9 to 12, and 14 to 16 in the internal state lottery table (FIG. 14), it is determined that the expectation improvement role has been won. However, even in the case where the expectation degree improvement combination is won, if the transition to the bonus AT state is triggered, the positive determination is not made in step S1601.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, it is determined in step S1602 whether or not the value of the penalty counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the process of steps S1603 to S1606 is not performed, whereby the setting opportunity for improving the expectation does not occur. On the other hand, if the value of the penalty counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S1603.

  In step S1603, a transition probability UP lottery process is executed. In the transition probability UP lottery process, a lottery is performed to determine whether to increase the transition winning probability by one step in the transition lottery process of step S1609 described later. Note that 1/10, 2/10, 3/10, 4/10, and 5/10 are set as the transition winning probability in the transition lottery process of step S1609. Specifically, regarding the processing content of the transition probability UP lottery process, first, the transition probability UP lottery table corresponding to the present degree of expectation improvement combination is read out from the sub side ROM 83. The transition probability UP lottery table is set so that the probability that the transition probability UP will be won is higher as the value of the winning IV is larger. Further, in the transition probability UP lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) is read in the sub-side RAM 84, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is compared with the transition probability UP lottery table. To match.

  In step S1604, it is determined whether the transition probability UP has been won. When the transition probability UP is won, in step S1605, the transition lottery table referred to in step S1609 described later is changed to a table that is one step higher in the probability of being transition winning than the current table. As a result, the probability of winning a transition is increased by one.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1604 or if the process of step S1605 is performed, a value corresponding to the winning combination is set in the delay counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1606. The delay counter is a counter for specifying in the sub MPU 82 whether or not to delay the end opportunity of the transition chance state. In the case where “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “10” are set as the values set in step S1606, and the value of the winning IV is “7”. If "1" is selected and the winning IV is "9" or "10", "3" is selected, if the winning IV is "11" or "12" If “5” is selected and the winning IV is “14” or “15”, “7” is selected, and if the winning IV is “16”. "10" is selected.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1601, a positive determination is made in step S1602, or if the process of step S1606 is performed, it is determined whether the normal replay combination is won in step S1607. If the normal replay role is won, it is determined in step S1608 whether or not the value of the penalty counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the process of step S1609 and step S1610 is not performed, so that the execution opportunity of the transition lottery process does not occur. On the other hand, if the value of the penalty counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S1609.

  In step S1609, a transition lottery process is executed. In the transfer lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter periodically (for example, 2 msec) is read in the sub-side RAM 84, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is compared with the transition lottery table currently read. To match. Then, it is determined in step S1610 whether or not the transition winning has been made.

  If the negative determination is made in step S1607, the positive determination is made in step S1608, or the negative determination is made in step S1610, the value of the delay counter of sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more in step S1611. Determine if there is. If the value of the delay counter is 1 or more, the value of the delay counter is decremented by 1 in step S1612, and then the process during this transition chance is ended. If the value of the delay counter is “0”, the value of the transition opportunity counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is decremented by 1 in step S1613, and the process of this transition opportunity is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1610 that the transition is won, the transition setting process to the normal AT state in steps S1614 to S1617 is executed. Specifically, at step S 1614, “1” is set to the normal AT flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84. The normal AT flag is a flag for specifying that the sub MPU 82 is in the normal AT state.

  In the following step S1615, the number-of-continuous-games lottery process at the start of the normal AT is executed. In the lottery process, first, the continued game number lottery table at the start of the normal AT is read out from the sub side ROM 83. There are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games as the number of continued games in one set of the normal AT state. In the continuation game number lottery table at the start of the normal AT, the probability that 30 games will be selected as the number of continued games per set is 5/10, the probability that 50 games will be selected is 4/10, and 100 games The probability of being selected is 1/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) is read in the sub-side RAM 84, and the value of the sub-lottery counter is stored in the number-of-continuous-games lottery table Match against.

  In the following step S1616, the value of the number of continuing games selected in the lottery process of step S1615 is set in the normal AT game counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84. The normal AT game counter is a counter for specifying the number of continued games in one set of normal AT states by the sub MPU 82.

  In the subsequent step S1617, the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". By setting “0” to the execution target counter, the sub MPU 82 executes processing for advancing the pre-branch AT state in the normal AT state. After that, the processing is ended during this transition chance.

<Ceiling game management processing>
Next, the ceiling game management process of step S1413 in the non-AT process (FIG. 32) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The ceiling game management process is activated on the condition that the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72, and therefore, is activated at the end of each game in the non-AT state.

  First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the ceiling game precursor state is by determining whether or not the value of the ceiling game counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 32 or less. If a negative determination is made in step S1701, it is determined in step S1702 whether or not the value of the penalty counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, the value of the penalty counter is decremented by 1 in step S1703 and the present overhead game management process is ended. That is, when the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the number of ceiling games is not reduced even if the game is digested.

  If the determination in step S1701 is affirmative, or if the determination in step S1702 is negative, the value of the ceiling game counter in the sub RAM 84 is decremented by one in step S1704. Then, in step S1705, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ceiling game counter after the subtraction of one is "0". If it does not become "0", this ceiling game management processing ends, and if it becomes "0", the transition setting processing to the normal AT state in step S1706 to step S1709 is executed. , This ceiling game management process ends. The processing contents of these steps S1706 to S1709 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1614 to S1617 in the processing during the transition chance (FIG. 34). Thereby, transition to the normal AT state is made.

<Process in AT at Sub MPU 82>
Next, processing contents in the AT executed by the sub MPU 82 will be described. Prior to the description of the specific processing content executed by the sub MPU 82, each gaming state included in the AT state will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  As the AT state, as described above, the normal AT state ST21 and the bonus AT state ST22 exist. In any of the normal AT state ST21 and the bonus AT state ST22, when the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won in the lottery process (FIG. 12) in the main MPU 72, those prizes can be made. The control by the sub MPU 82 is executed such that notification of the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is performed. However, while the setting of the start and end of the normal AT state ST21 is performed not by the main MPU 72 but by the sub MPU 82, the bonus AT state ST22 is set to the start and end by the main MPU 82 instead of the sub MPU 82. It is performed by the side MPU 72.

  Of the normal AT state ST21 and the bonus AT state ST22, the bonus AT state ST22 has only one type of state, whereas the normal AT state ST21 has a pre-branch AT state ST31, a branch AT state ST32, and the like. There are four types of states: final chance state ST33 and additional state ST34.

  The pre-branch AT state ST31 is an AT state which continues over the number of continuing games set at the start. In the pre-branch AT state ST31, the display effect for clearly indicating to the player that it is the pre-branch AT state ST31 is executed by the image display device 66. In the pre-branch AT state ST31, the game for the set number of continuing games is consumed, and the process shifts to the branch AT state ST32.

  In the branch AT state ST32, a battle effect using an ally character and an enemy character is performed by the image display device 66. In the battle effect, if the remaining set number of times in the normal AT state ST21 is one or more, or if the AT continuation winning in the AT continuation lottery process, the victory effect of the allied character as a battle effect or the draw of both characters The effect is selected, and in the case other than these, the defeat effect of the ally character is selected.

  If the victory effect or the draw effect is executed, the process returns to the pre-branch AT state ST31, and if the defeat effect is executed, the process proceeds to the final chance state ST33. In the final chance state ST33, the revival lottery process is executed according to the contents of the winning combination of the game in the pre-branch AT state ST31 and the branch AT state ST32 and the contents of the winning combination of the game in the final chance state ST33 If so, it returns to the pre-branch AT state ST31.

  In the pre-branch AT state ST31 and the branch AT state ST32, the state shifts to the additional state ST34 according to the contents of the winning combination of the game in these states. If the transition condition to the additional state ST34 is satisfied in the pre-branch AT state ST31, the transition is made to the additional state ST34 from the game following the game in which the transition condition is satisfied even in the middle of the pre-branch AT state ST31. On the other hand, when the transition condition to the additional state ST33 is satisfied in the middle of the branch AT state ST32, the transition to the additional state ST34 is made after the end of the branch AT state ST32.

  In the additional state ST34, the display effect for clearly indicating to the player that the additional state is ST34 is executed by the image display device 66. In the additional state ST34, the additional lottery process is executed in accordance with the winning combination of the game, and the additional winning is performed, whereby the setting number of the normal AT state ST21 is added. When the end condition is satisfied in the additional state ST34, the process proceeds to the pre-branch AT state ST31.

  In any of the pre-branch AT state ST31, the branch AT state ST32, the final chance state ST33, and the additional state ST34, transition to the bonus AT state ST22 is performed in the main MPU 72, whereby the bonus AT state ST22 is entered. In the bonus AT state ST22, the display effect for clearly indicating to the player that the bonus AT state ST22 is performed is executed by the image display device 66. When transitioning to the bonus AT state ST22 in the pre-branch AT state ST31, the operation returns to the pre-branch AT state ST31 after the end of the bonus AT state ST22, and in the case of transitioning to the bonus AT state ST22 in the branch AT state ST32, the bonus After the AT state ST22 ends, the branch AT state ST32 is restored, and in the additional state ST34, when the bonus AT state ST22 is entered, the bonus AT state ST22 is returned to the additional state ST34 after the end. On the other hand, when transitioning to the bonus AT state ST22 in the final chance state ST33, the transition to the pre-branch AT state ST31 is made after the bonus AT state ST22 ends.

<At processing in AT>
Next, the during-AT process of step S1106 in the periodic process (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1801, it is determined whether a lottery result command has been received from the main MPU 72 or not. If a lottery result command has been received, the winning combination data corresponding to the lottery result command is written in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1802.

  Thereafter, in step S1803, it is determined whether the penalty AT flag of the sub RAM 84 is set to "1". In step S1804, it is determined whether the value of the penalty counter of the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more. In step S1805, it is determined whether the first bell combination or the second bell combination has been won. If the negative determination is made in both step S1803 and step S1804 and the positive determination is made in step S1805, each stop button enabling the occurrence of the first bell winning or the second bell winning in step S1806 The pressing order data of 42 to 44 are read out from the contents of the lottery result command received this time, and are written in the sub side RAM 84.

  That is, in the bonus AT state generated when the second special replay is won or the third special replay is won and the middle reel 32M or 32R is stopped as the first stop in a situation not in the normal AT state, each stop button 42 to 44 is pressed. The order is not reported. In addition, in the normal AT state, which has shifted in a situation where a penalty event has occurred, the pressing order of each stop button 42 to 44 is not notified until the penalty game is finished. Further, since the process during the present AT is not executed in a situation where the internal state of the CB is not in the after state by performing the process of step S1103 in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is also notified I will not. On the other hand, in the AT state which is not the situation of a penalty, the pushing order of each stop button 42 to 44 is informed. Thereby, in the said AT state, the expectation degree of medal provision is higher than the case of the other game states.

  Even if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped in the order notified in the AT state, although the bell prize does not occur, it is not treated as a penalty event. That is, even if each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not stopped in the order notified in the AT state, events such as termination of the AT state, temporary suspension of the AT state, and a decrease in the probability of winning the regular replay combination. Does not occur.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1801, a positive determination is made in step S1803, a positive determination is made in step S1804, a negative determination is made in step S1805, or the processing in step S1806 is performed. In step S1807, it is determined whether a stop instruction command has been received from the main MPU 72 or not. If the stop command command has been received, then in step S1808, the stop order data is written to the sub-side RAM 84 in order to store the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the current game.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1807, or if the process of step S1808 is executed, it is determined in step S1809 whether a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 or not. If a winning result command has been received, then in step S1810, a winning handling process is executed. In the winning response processing, processing for causing an image corresponding to the current winning combination to be displayed on the image display device 66 is performed, and a sound corresponding to the occurrence of winning is output through the speaker 65. Execute the process to

  If a negative determination is made in step S1809, or if the process of step S1810 is executed, the value of the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is grasped in step S1811. As described above, the execution target counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the AT state by the sub MPU 82.

  Pre-branch AT state processing (step S 1812) for performing execution control of the pre-branch AT state as processing executed by sub-side MPU 82 in the AT state, and branch AT state for executing execution control of the branch AT state Processing (step S 1813), processing for additional state for performing execution control of the additional state (step S 1814), processing for final chance for performing execution control of the last chance state (step S 1815), bonus AT state A bonus AT process (step S1816) for performing execution control in the sub MPU 82 is set.

  In such a processing configuration, the execution target counter is a counter for the sub-side MPU 82 to grasp which of the plurality of types of processing should be executed, and during AT provided in the sub-side ROM 83 In the address table, start addresses of programs for executing the plurality of types of processing are set corresponding to numerical information of the execution target counter.

  In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the pre-branch AT state process (step S1812), and the start address SA1 is the start of the program for executing the branch AT state process (step S1813). The start address SA2 is an address of the program for executing the process for additional state (step S1814), and the start address SA3 is a start address of the program for executing the process for final chance (step S1815). The start address SA4 is the start address of a program for executing the bonus AT process (step S1816). Hereinafter, each process of step S 1812 to step S 1816 will be described in detail.

<Process for AT state before branch>
First, the pre-branch AT state process to be executed in step S1812 of the during-AT process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1901, processing for normal replay is executed. The process for normal replay is a process for generating a trigger when the output state of the AT1 signal is changed in the main MPU 72 during the continuous AT state, although the details will be described later.

  In the following step S1902, it is determined whether a bonus AT start command has been received from the main MPU 72 or not. If the bonus AT start command has been received, the bonus AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1" and the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "4" in step S1903. As a result, in the next in-AT processing (FIG. 37), the bonus AT processing of step S1816 is executed.

  In the subsequent step S1904, after adding the bonus reference value "7" to the bonus point counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84, the pre-branch AT state process is ended. The benefit point counter is a counter for specifying the number of times of setting of the normal AT state in the sub MPU 82. The bonus point counter is added when the bonus lottery trigger is won in the normal AT state and the bonus points are won in the bonus point lottery process. Then, when the value of the bonus point counter is 7 × n or more (n is an integer of 1 or more), the number of times of setting of the normal AT state is n, and the normal AT state is completed even if the current normal AT state is ended There will be n consecutive nights.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1902, it is determined in step S1905 whether a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 or not. If a winning result command has been received, it is determined in step S1906 whether or not the value of the penalty counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. If the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the value of the penalty counter is decremented by 1 in step S1907, and the pre-branch AT state process is ended.

  If the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more in the pre-branch AT state, data for AT preparation is set in the display data setting process of step S1109 in the periodic process (FIG. 28). An image indicating that preparation is in progress is displayed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1906, the process advances to step S1908 to execute the first addition processing. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the first additional process.

  In step S2001, it is determined whether a bonus lottery trigger has been won. If the player is elected at any one of IV = 7, 9, 10, 14 to 16 in the internal state lottery table (FIG. 14), it is determined that the bonus lottery trigger has been won.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, a bonus point lottery process is executed in step S2002. In the bonus point lottery process, the bonus point lottery table corresponding to the current bonus lottery trigger is read out from the sub side ROM 83. In the bonus point lottery table, “0”, “1”, “2”, “3” and “4” are set as bonus points, and the larger the value of the winning IV, the bonus points of 1 or more The probability of being selected is set to be high, and the probability that a bonus point having a larger value is selected is set to be higher as the value of the winning IV is larger. Further, in the bonus point lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) is read in the sub-side RAM 84, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is compared with the bonus point lottery table. Do.

  In the subsequent step S2003, it is determined whether or not one or more bonus points have been won. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the bonus points winning this time are two or more. If a negative determination is made in step S2004, that is, if the bonus point winning this time is “1”, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, the value of the benefit point counter immediately before is written in the register of the sub MPU 82, and the value of the benefit point winning this time is added to the benefit point counter.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2001, if a negative determination is made in step S2003, or if the process of step S2005 is performed, the distribution flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is "1" in step S2006. It is determined whether or not is set. The allocation flag is used to specify in the sub MPU 82 that it is necessary to divide the two or more bonus points into a plurality of successive games and to provide them when two or more bonus points are selected in the bonus point lottery process. Is the flag of

  If “1” is set in the distribution flag, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, the value of the immediately preceding bonus point counter is written to the register of the sub MPU 82, and the bonus points allocated to the current game are added to the bonus point counter of the sub RAM 84.

  If the number of bonus points awarded this time is 2 or more, an affirmative determination is made in step S2004, and the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, an allocation lottery process is executed. In the allocation lottery process, the allocation lottery table corresponding to the benefit point of this time is read from the sub-ROM 83, and the sub-RAM 84 further reads the value of the sub-lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec). The value of the lottery counter is collated with the distribution lottery table. For example, if the selected bonus point is “2”, the probability that 2 is added to the bonus point counter in the current game is 1/2, and the bonus point counter in each of the current game and the next game The probability that 1 is added to is 1/2. Further, when the selected bonus points are three or more, addition to the bonus point counter may be distributed over three or more consecutive games including the current game.

  In the following step S2009, it is determined whether the result of the distribution lottery process is a distribution winning result. That is, it is determined whether or not addition to the benefit point counter is distributed to a plurality of successive games. If a negative determination is made in step S2009, the process proceeds to step S2005 described above.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2009, in step S2010, the allocation flag of the sub RAM 84 is set to "1", and the allocation data indicating the allocation mode of the benefit points selected this time is stored in the sub RAM 84. Write. Thereafter, in step S2011, the value of the immediately preceding bonus point counter is written to the register of the sub MPU 82, and the bonus points allocated to the current game are added to the bonus point counter of the sub RAM 84.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2006, or if the process of step S2007 is performed, or if the process of step S2011 is performed, the setting process of the additional state is performed in step S2012, and then this first additional use is made. End the process.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the additional state.

  In step S 2101, calculation processing is performed on the immediately preceding bonus point. Specifically, the value of the benefit point counter immediately before being stored in the register of the sub MPU 82 in step S2005, step S2007 or step S2011 is read out. Then, the read value is divided by the benefit reference value (specifically, "7") in the normal AT state.

  In the following step S2102, calculation processing is executed for the benefit points currently stored in the benefit point counter. Specifically, the value of the bonus point counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out. Then, the read value is divided by the benefit reference value (specifically, "7") in the normal AT state.

  After that, in step S2103, it is determined whether the value of the remainder derived by the calculation process of step S2102 is smaller than the value of the remainder derived by the calculation process of step S2101. In the configuration where the value of benefit points that can be selected in the benefit point lottery process is smaller than the above-mentioned standard value corresponding to the addition, the case where the remainder value after addition to the benefit point counter is smaller than before addition is the benefit point. It means that a bonus point which is a value larger than 7 × (n−1) and smaller than 7 × n by addition of the counter is 7 × n or more (n is an integer of 1 or more). In other words, it means that the addition of the set number of times of the normal AT state has occurred.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the setting process of the full-addition state is ended, and if a positive determination is made in step S2103, the process proceeds to step S2104. In step S 2104, “1” is set in the additional state flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84. In the following step S2105, "2" is set to the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84. By setting “2” in the execution target counter, the process for the additional state in step S 1814 is executed in the next in-AT process (FIG. 37).

  In the subsequent step S2106, a lottery process of the number of compensation replays is executed. In the additional state, the addition of the set number of times of the normal AT state is likely to occur, but the additional state is ended when the number of times the normal replay win is achieved reaches the number of compensation replays. The lottery process of the number of compensation replays is a process for determining the number of compensation replays serving as an end trigger of the added state at the time of transition of the added state by lottery.

  In the lottery process of the number of compensation replays, the compensation replay lottery table at the time of transition to the additional state is read out from the sub side ROM 83, and further the value of the sub side lottery counter updated periodically (for example 2 msec) in the sub side RAM 84 is read The value of the sub lottery counter is collated with the compensation replay lottery table. In the compensation replay lottery table at the time of transition to the additional state, “1”, “2”, and “3” are set as the number of compensation replays, “1” is selected with a probability of 6/10, and a probability of 3/10 "2" is selected by the, and "3" is selected with a probability of 1/10.

  After the lottery process of the compensation replay number is executed in step S2106, the compensation replay number selected in the lottery process is set in the compensation replay number counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S2107. The compensation replay number counter is a counter for specifying the remaining compensation replay number in the sub MPU 82. After that, the setting process of the book loading state is ended.

  Here, as described above, the set number of normal AT states will be added according to the bonus points, but as described above, the front door 12 has points for points that have not been added to the number of sets in bonus points. A benefit point notification unit 67 for giving notification and a stock notification unit 68 for giving notification of the number of times of setting the normal AT state are provided. The light emission control of the benefit point notification unit 67 and the stock notification unit 68 according to the benefit points is executed in the notification control process in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) of the periodic process (FIG. 28).

  FIG. 41 (a) is a flowchart showing the notification control process.

  In the notification control process, first, at step S2201, an arithmetic process is performed on the benefit points currently stored in the benefit point counter. Specifically, the value of the bonus point counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out. Then, the read value is divided by the benefit reference value (specifically, "7") in the normal AT state.

  In the following step S2202, the quotient of the calculation result of step S2201, that is, the group corresponding to the remaining number of times of normal AT state setting is specified by referring to the stock notification table stored in the sub-side ROM 83. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 41 (b), the stock notification table has a correspondence relationship between the display color of the stock notification unit 68 and the numerical range of the remaining number of times of normal AT state setting (quotient of the above calculation result). It is fixed. Specifically, the remaining set number of 0 times corresponds to white, the remaining set number of 1 to 3 corresponds to blue, and the remaining set number of 4 to 6 times corresponds to yellow. The remaining set number of 7 to 9 corresponds to green, the remaining set number of 10 to 11 corresponds to red, and the remaining set number of 12 or more corresponds to rainbow color.

  In step S2202, it is determined to which group the value of the quotient derived in step S2201 belongs in the stock notification table. Then, in step S 2203, display color data corresponding to the identified group is read from the sub ROM 83 and written to the sub RAM 84. As a result, the light emission control of the stock notification unit 68 is performed so that the display color corresponds to the display color data.

  In the following step S2204, the remainder of the calculation result of the above step S2201, that is, the points for which the number of sets has not been increased in the bonus points is specified. Then, the light emission data corresponding to the specified point is written in the sub-side RAM 84, so that the unit point display portions 67a of the number corresponding to the specified points are turned on. Light emission control is performed.

  Thereafter, in step S2205, light emission data corresponding to the value of the victory counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is written to the sub-side RAM 84, whereby the unit victory number display portion 69a having the number corresponding to the value of the corresponding victory counter. The light emission control of the winning number notification unit 69 is performed so as to be in the lighting state. The victory counter is a counter for specifying, with the sub MPU 82, the number of times the battle effect is achieved in the battle effect in the continuous AT state without becoming the non-AT state. Thereafter, the notification control process ends.

  The manner in which bonus points are allocated to a plurality of games and added in the pre-branch AT state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 (A) is a timing chart showing how bonus points are distributed and added, and FIG. 42 (a) shows an execution period of a game in which bonus points are won, and FIG. 42 (b) is another game. 42 (c) shows the state of the benefit point counter, and FIG. 42 (d) shows the execution period of the additional state. Moreover, FIG. 42 (B1)-FIG. 42 (B4) are explanatory drawings for demonstrating the light emission aspect of the privilege point alerting | reporting part 67 and the stock alerting | reporting part 68. FIG.

  At timing t1 in the pre-branch AT state, as shown in FIG. 42A, the game for winning the bonus point is started, and the game is ended at timing t2. In this case, in a situation where the value of the benefit point counter is "4", 3 points are selected as the benefit points to be added, and distribution data to which 1 point is added in 3 consecutive games including the game is set Be done. Therefore, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), the value of the bonus point counter increases by only "1". Thus, as shown in FIG. 42 (B2), as shown in FIG. 42 (B2), the number of unit point display portions 67a in the left side and the right side is four as shown in FIG. 42 (B1). The number of unit point display sections 67a is five.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 42 (b) at the timing of t3 and the timing of t4, when one game is finished, as shown in FIG. The value increases by "1". As a result, as shown in FIG. 42 (B3) and FIG. 42 (B4), in the bonus point notification unit 67, the number of unit point display units 67a that are turned on in each of the left and right sides increases by one. Thus, as the value of the bonus point counter increases, the value of the bonus point counter becomes “7” as shown in FIG. 42C at time t4. As a result, as shown in FIG. 42 (d), the additional state starts from the timing of t5.

  In addition, since the value of the bonus point counter is “7”, the number of remaining settings in the normal AT state is one, and the display color of the stock notification unit 68 is changed as shown in FIG. 42 (B4). Specifically, it becomes blue. Thus, the player confirms that the display color of the stock notification unit 68 is blue, thereby grasping that the number of remaining settings in the normal AT state is one or more and three or less. Become.

  Returning to the explanation of the pre-branch AT state process (FIG. 38), after executing the first addition process in step S1908, the value of the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is "2" in step S1909. It is determined whether or not. If the value of the execution target counter is “2”, it means that the transition to the addition state has occurred as a result of the first addition processing in step S1908. In this case, the pre-branch AT state process is terminated without executing the process of step S 1910 and subsequent steps.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1909, the process proceeds to step S1910. In step S1910, the value of the normal AT game counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is decremented by one. Then, in step S1911, it is determined whether the value of the normal AT game counter after the one subtraction is "0". If the negative determination is made in step S1911, the processing for the pre-branch AT state is ended as it is, and if the positive determination is made in step S1911, the processing for setting the branch AT state is performed in step S1912, End the pre-branch AT state process.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing setting processing of the branch AT state.

  First, in step S2301, it is determined whether the value of the benefit point counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 7 or more. If it is 7 or more, 7 is subtracted from the value of the bonus point counter in step S2302.

  In the following step S2303, battle lottery processing is executed. In the battle lottery process, the battle lottery table is read from the sub side ROM 83, and the sub side RAM 84 further reads the value of the sub side lottery counter periodically (eg, 2 msec), and the value of the sub side lottery counter Match against the battle lottery table. In the battle lottery table, a victory effect and a draw effect are set as a battle effect, and a probability of becoming a victory effect is set to 1/2 and a probability to become a draw effect is set to 1/2. .

  In the following step S2304, a value corresponding to the battle lottery result is set in the branch AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84, and a flag setting process corresponding to the battle lottery result is executed. The branch AT game counter is a counter for specifying the number of continued games in the branch AT state by the sub MPU 82, and is one of 10 to 13 games in the case of a winning effect, and 10 in the case of a draw effect. Or 11 games. In the battle lottery process, not only one of the win effect and the draw effect is selected, but also the number of continued games in case of the win effect and the number of continued games in the case of the draw effect are selected.

  Also, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the data table that enables the display of moving images corresponding to the value set in the branch AT game counter and the type of battle effect is It reads from the ROM 83 and outputs a signal to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, display effects corresponding to the selected battle effect are performed over a plurality of games in the image display device 66. Further, in the setting process (step S1110) of the light emission data in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the selected battle effect is read out, and the setting process (step S1111) of the sound output data in the periodic process (FIG. 28) In the), the sound output data corresponding to the selected battle effect is read out, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. Thereby, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, a light emission effect and a sound output effect according to the display effect in the image display device 66 are performed.

  Then, in step S2305, it is determined whether the result of the battle lottery process in step S2303 is a winning effect or not. If the winning effect has been won, the value of the win counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is incremented by one in step S2306. When the value of the victory counter is incremented by 1 as a result of the notification control process (FIG. 41A) being executed as described above, the unit of winning of the lighting state in the number-of-winnings notification unit 69 is matched accordingly. The number display portion 69a is increased by one.

  In the following step S2307, it is determined whether or not the value of the win counter after the one addition is "12". If "12", the AT continuation probability is set to the highest probability in step S2308.

  The AT continuation probability is the probability that the AT continuation winning will be made in the AT continuation lottery process for determining whether or not the normal AT state is to be continued in a situation where the remaining AT set number of times is “0”. is there. Specifically, 50%, 60%, 70%, 77%, 82%, and 88% are set as the AT continuous winning probability. The AT continuation probability that is initially set when transitioning from the non-AT state to the normal AT state differs depending on the mode that triggered the transition to the normal AT state.

  For example, when transitioning from the transition chance state to the normal AT state, 50% is selected with a probability of 90/100, and 60% is selected with a probability of 8/100, by drawing the AT continuation probability. 70% is selected with a probability of 2/100. In addition, when transitioning to the normal AT state due to the number of ceiling games being digested, 50% is selected with a probability of 80/100 and a probability of 18/100 is selected by performing a lottery of AT continuation probability. 60% is selected and 70% is selected with a probability of 2/100. In addition, 77% is selected when it is elected to the 2nd special replay role or the 3rd special replay role, it moves to bonus AT state, afterwards it moves to normal AT state, it is elected to 1st special replay role, it is bonus 82% is selected when transitioning to AT state and then transitioning to normal AT state, and 88% which is the highest probability when transitioning to bonus AT state after transitioning to bonus AT state as an out result, then transitioning to normal AT state Is selected. That is, in the case of transition to the normal AT state triggered by transition to the bonus AT state, the AT continuation probability initially set is higher than in the case of direct transition to the normal AT state.

  As described above, the AT continuation probability is set at the time of transition to the normal AT state, but in the normal AT state which is continuous without becoming the non-AT state, the winning effect has occurred 12 times which is the predetermined number of times of execution In the case, the AT continuation probability is set to 88% of the highest probability. As a result, when winning is produced in the battle production, not only the continuation of the normal AT state is decided, but also the opportunity to increase the AT continuation probability is given, so the player is awarded the victory production in the battle production. It is possible to play a game while expecting to

  On the other hand, when negative determination is carried out in step S2301, AT continuation lottery processing is executed in step S2309. In the AT continuation lottery process, first, an AT continuation lottery table corresponding to the currently set AT continuation probability is read from the sub side ROM 83, and the sub side lottery counter is updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) in the sub side RAM 84. The value is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is collated with the AT continuation lottery table.

  In the following step S2310, it is determined whether the result of the AT continuation lottery process is AT continuation winning. If the AT continuation winning is achieved, battle lottery processing is executed in step S2311, and in step S2312, a value corresponding to the battle lottery result is set in the branch AT game counter of the sub RAM 84, The flag setting process corresponding to the battle lottery result is executed. The processing contents of these steps S2311 and S2312 are the same as the processing contents of the above steps S2303 and S2304. Further, the contents of the battle effect in the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 are also the same as the contents described in the case of step S2303 and step S2304.

  In the following step S2313, it is determined whether the result of the battle lottery process in step S2311 is a winning effect or not. If the winning effect has been won, the value of the win counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is incremented by one in step S2314. Then, in step S2315, it is determined whether the value of the victory counter is "12". If the value of the victory counter is "12", the AT continuation probability is set to the highest probability in step S2308.

  On the other hand, if the value of the victory counter is not "12", the process proceeds to step S2316. In step S2316, a promotion lottery process of AT continuation probability is executed. In the promotion lottery process, the promotion lottery table is read from the sub side ROM 83, the value of the sub side lottery counter periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) is read in the sub side RAM 84, and the value of the sub side lottery counter is promoted to the above Check against the lottery table. In the promotion lottery table, the probability of winning a promotion is set to 6/10. Then, in step S2317, it is determined whether or not the result of the promotion lottery processing is a promotion winning, and in the case of a promotion winning, in step S2318, the AT continuation probability is set to one step above.

  The promotion lottery process of the AT continuation probability is executed when the win effect is produced by the battle effect as described above, and is not executed when the win effect is obtained. As a result, when winning is produced in the battle production, not only the continuation of the normal AT state is decided, but also the opportunity to increase the AT continuation probability is given, so the player is awarded the victory production in the battle production. It is possible to play a game while expecting to

  In addition, the promotion lottery process of the AT continuation probability is not executed when the normal AT state continues because the value of the benefit point counter is 7 or more, and the AT continuation lottery is achieved in the AT continuation lottery process. To be executed. When the value of the benefit point counter is 7 or more, the continuation of the normal AT state is determined, so that the player can confirm the progress contents of the battle effect with confidence. On the other hand, when the AT continuation lottery process is executed, the normal AT state may end when the AT continuation is lost. Therefore, the player confirms the progress contents of the battle effect while expecting to become the victory effect or the draw effect. It will be done. In this case, by performing the elevation lottery process of the AT continuation probability on condition that the AT continuation win is achieved and the win effect is achieved in the AT continuation lottery process, the excitement to the AT continuation win is further enhanced. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  On the other hand, if the AT continuation lottery is performed in the AT continuation lottery process of step S2309 and a negative determination is made in step S2310, the process proceeds to step S2319. In step S2319, a value corresponding to the defeat effect is set in the branch AT game counter of the sub RAM 84, and "1" is set in the defeat effect flag provided in the sub RAM 84.

  Also, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the data table that enables the display of moving images corresponding to the value set in the branch AT game counter and the type of battle effect is It reads from the ROM 83 and outputs a signal to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, display effects corresponding to the selected battle effect are performed over a plurality of games in the image display device 66. Further, in the setting process (step S1110) of the light emission data in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the selected battle effect is read out, and the setting process (step S1111) of the sound output data in the periodic process (FIG. 28) In the), the sound output data corresponding to the selected battle effect is read out, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. Thereby, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, a light emission effect and a sound output effect according to the display effect in the image display device 66 are performed.

  Here, when the defeat effect is executed, the number of games set in the branch AT game counter is “10”. On the other hand, the number of games set in the case of the winning effect is 10 to 13 games, and the number of games set in the case of the draw effect is 10 or 11 games. The branch AT state continues over the number of games set in the branch AT game counter, and the sub MPU 82 executes AT processing during the branch AT state. Then, the victory effect or the draw effect is not only that the normal AT state continues, but the period in which the process for AT is executed may be longer than in the case of the defeat effect. Thereby, the advantage of becoming a victory effect or a draw effect is further enhanced, and the degree of attention to the battle effect is enhanced.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2305, if a negative determination is made in step S2307, if the process of step S2308 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S2313, if a negative determination is made in step S2317, a step If the process of step S2318 is performed or if the process of step S2319 is performed, "1" is set in the branch AT state flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S2320, and the execution of the sub-side RAM 84 is performed. After setting the value of the target counter to "1", the setting process of the present branch AT state is ended. As a result, in the next in-AT process (FIG. 37), the branch AT state process of step S 1813 is executed.

<Process for branch AT state>
Next, the branch AT state process executed in step S1813 of the during-AT process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2401, a push order avoidance process is performed. Although the details of the push order avoidance process will be described later, the main MPU 72 prevents the occurrence of an opportunity to change the output state of the AT1 signal even though the continuous AT state has not occurred. It is a process.

  In the following step S2402, it is determined whether a bonus AT start command has been received from the main MPU 72 or not. If a bonus AT start command has been received, the bonus AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1" and the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "4" in step S2403. As a result, in the next in-AT processing (FIG. 37), the bonus AT processing of step S1816 is executed.

  In the following step S2404, data of battle effect that has already been set in the current branch AT state is stored and held in the sub-side RAM 84. In the battle effect data stored in this case, the value of the branch AT game counter set in the pre-branch AT state process (step S 1812) when the current branch AT state is started, the battle effect The state of the flag corresponding to the type and control data of the upper lamp 64 from the start game to the end game of the battle effect in the current branch AT state, the speaker 65 and the image display device 66 are included. Thus, when returning to the branch AT state after the end of the bonus AT state, it is possible to resume the battle effect of the branch AT state performed before the start of the bonus AT state from the start time thereof. Thereafter, in step S2405, “7” is added to the benefit point counter of the sub-side RAM 84, and the pre-branch AT state process is ended.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2402, it is determined in step S2406 whether a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 or not. If the winning result command has not been received, the processing for this branch AT state is ended as it is, and if the winning result command has been received, the second addition processing is executed in step S2407. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the second addition process.

  In step S2501, it is determined whether a bonus lottery trigger has been won. If the player is elected at any one of IV = 7, 9, 10, 14 to 16 in the internal state lottery table (FIG. 14), it is determined that the bonus lottery trigger has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S2501, the second additional processing is ended.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, a bonus point lottery process is executed in step S2502. In the bonus point lottery process, the bonus point lottery table corresponding to the current bonus lottery trigger is read out from the sub side ROM 83. In the bonus point lottery table, “0”, “1”, “2”, “3” and “4” are set as bonus points, and the larger the value of the winning IV, the bonus points of 1 or more The probability of being selected is set to be high, and the probability that a bonus point having a larger value is selected is set to be higher as the value of the winning IV is larger. Further, in the bonus point lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) is read in the sub-side RAM 84, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is compared with the bonus point lottery table. Do.

  In the following step S2503, it is determined whether or not one or more bonus points have been won. If a negative determination is made in step S2503, the present second additional processing ends, and if a positive determination is made in step S2503, the process proceeds to step S2504. In step S2504, the value of the immediately preceding benefit point counter is written to the register of the sub MPU 82, and the value of the benefit point that has been won this time is added to the benefit point counter.

  In the following step S2505, calculation processing is executed for the immediately preceding reward point. Specifically, the value of the benefit point counter immediately before being stored in the register of the sub MPU 82 in step S2504 is read out. Then, the read value is divided by the benefit reference value (specifically, "7") in the normal AT state.

  In the subsequent step S2506, calculation processing is executed for the benefit points currently stored in the benefit point counter. Specifically, the value of the bonus point counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out. Then, the read value is divided by the benefit reference value (specifically, "7") in the normal AT state.

  Thereafter, in step S2507, it is determined whether the value of the remainder derived by the calculation process of step S2506 is smaller than the value of the remainder derived by the calculation process of step S2505. In the configuration where the value of benefit points that can be selected in the benefit point lottery process is smaller than the above-mentioned standard value corresponding to the addition, the case where the remainder value after addition to the benefit point counter is smaller than before addition is the benefit point. It means that a bonus point which is a value larger than 7 × (n−1) and smaller than 7 × n by addition of the counter is 7 × n or more (n is an integer of 1 or more). In other words, it means that the addition of the set number of times of the normal AT state has occurred.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2507, the setting process of the regular overlay state is ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2507, in step S2508, the one-bit additional state transition flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1", and then the second additional processing is ended. The addition state transition flag is a flag for specifying in the sub MPU 82 that the transition to the addition state should be made after the end of the branch AT state.

  Referring back to the branch AT state process (FIG. 44), after the second addition process is executed in step S2407, the value of the branch AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is decremented by 1 in step S2408. Incidentally, every time the value of the branch AT game counter is decremented by 1, the display control data table for battle effect currently set in step S1109 to step S1111 in the periodic processing (FIG. 28), the light emission control data The reference range of the table and the sound output control data table is switched to the reference range corresponding to the next game. Thereby, every time one game is consumed, the effect range of the battle effect is switched to the effect range corresponding to the next game.

  Thereafter, in step S2409, it is determined whether or not the value of the branch AT game counter after one subtraction is "0". If the state is not "0", the processing for branch AT state is ended as it is, and if it is "0", the processing for ending the branch AT state is executed in step S2410, and then for the main branch AT state. End the process.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the end processing of the branch AT state.

  First, in step S2601, it is determined whether the battle effect executed this time is a defeat effect or not by determining whether or not "1" is set in the defeat effect flag of the sub-side RAM 84. If "1" is set in the defeat effect flag, it is determined in step S2602 whether the value of the bonus point counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 7 or more. If it is less than 7, in step S2603, the defeat effect flag in the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and the branch AT state flag in the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0". In step S2603, the final chance flag provided in the sub RAM 84 is set to “1”, and the execution target counter of the sub RAM 84 is set to “3”. As a result, in the next in-AT process (FIG. 37), the process for the final chance in step S1815 is performed. Thereafter, the termination process of the branch AT state is ended.

  If it is determined in step S2602 that the value of the bonus point counter is 7 or more, the process proceeds to step S2604. In step S2604, the value of the reward point counter is decremented by seven. In the following step S2605, battle lottery processing is executed. The process content of the battle lottery process is the same as the process content of step S2303 and the process content of step S2311 in the setting process (FIG. 43) of the branch AT state.

  In the following step S2606, a value corresponding to the battle lottery result in step S2605 is set in the branch AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84, and a flag setting process corresponding to the battle lottery result is executed. In this case, "3" is set in the branch AT game counter so that the branch AT state is extended by 3 games when the victory effect is selected, and the branch AT state is one game when the draw effect is selected. The branch AT game counter is set to "1" to be extended.

  That is, when the value of the benefit point counter becomes 7 or more in the middle of the branch AT state in which the defeat effect is selected as the battle effect and the continuous AT state is determined, the number of continued games in the branch AT state is extended. . Then, in the branch AT state, processing for AT is executed. As a result, when the value of the benefit point counter becomes 7 or more in the middle of the branch AT state in which the defeat effect is selected, not only the consecutive ATs in the normal AT state are decided but the number of continued games in the branch AT state is extended. It will be advantageous to the player. Then, since the resurrection effect in which the defeat effect is changed to the victory effect or the draw effect is executed using this extended game, the degree of attention in the effect is also enhanced.

  Further, the number of continued games to be extended in the branch AT state is larger in the case where the victory effect is selected than in the case where the draw effect is selected. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage when the winning effect is selected, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the occurrence of the winning effect.

  In step S2606, the defeat effect flag in the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and the revival flag provided in the sub RAM 84 is set to "1". The revival flag is a flag for specifying in the sub MPU 82 that the revival of the victory effect or the draw effect has occurred in the situation where the defeat effect is selected.

  Thereafter, in step S2607, processing for winning is performed. In the process for the win effect, when the win effect is selected by the battle lottery process in the immediately preceding step S2605, the processes of steps S2306 to S2308 in the setting process of branch AT state (FIG. 43) are executed. Specifically, when the victory effect is selected, the value of the victory counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is incremented by one, and it is determined whether or not the value of the victory counter after the one addition is "12". Then, in the case of “12”, the AT continuation probability is set to the highest probability. Thereafter, the termination process of the branch AT state is ended.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the defeat effect is selected by determining whether or not "1" is set in the revival flag of sub-side RAM 84 in step S2608. It is determined whether or not the revival of the victory effect or the draw effect has occurred. In addition, it is determined in step S2609 whether or not “1” is set in the additional state transition flag of the sub-side RAM 84, thereby providing a benefit during the branch AT state in which the victory effect or the draw effect is selected. It is determined whether the value of the point counter is 7 or more.

  If the negative determination is made in both step S2608 and step S2609, the processing for setting the pre-branch AT state is executed in step S2610, and the termination process for the main branch AT state is ended.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing setting processing of the pre-branch AT state.

  In step S2701, it is determined whether the battle effect finally performed in the current branch AT state is a victory effect. If it is the winning effect, in step S2702, the number-of-continuous-games lottery process at the time of winning effect is executed. In the lottery process, first, the number-of-continuous-games lottery table at the time of winning effect is read out from the sub side ROM 83. As described above, there are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games as the number of continued games in one set of the normal AT state. In the continuation game number lottery table at the time of victory effect, the probability that 30 games are selected as the number of continued games in one set is 1/10, the probability that 50 games are selected is 4/10, and 100 games are selected. Probability is 5/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) is read out in the sub-side RAM 84, and the value of the sub-lottery counter is compared with the number-of-continues game number lottery table at the time of the win effect To match.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2701 that the effect is a draw effect, in step S2703, the number-of-continuous-games lottery process at the time of draw effect is executed. In the lottery process, first, the number-of-continuous-games lottery table at the time of the draw effect is read out from the sub side ROM 83. As described above, there are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games as the number of continued games in one set of the normal AT state. In the continuation game number lottery table at the time of the draw effect, the probability that 30 games are selected as the number of continued games per set is 3/10, the probability that 50 games are selected is 5/10, and 100 games are selected. Probability is 2/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) is read out in the sub-side RAM 84, and the value of the sub-lottery counter is compared with the number-of- continued-game lottery table during the draw effect. To match.

  When the process of step S2702 or step S2703 is executed, a value corresponding to the number of continuing games selected in the lottery process of step S2702 or the lottery process of step S2703 in step S2704 is used as a normal AT game of sub side RAM 84. Set to the counter. Thereafter, at step S2705, the branch AT state flag of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and the execution target counter of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, in the next in-AT process (FIG. 37), the pre-branch AT state process in step S1812 is executed. Thereafter, the setting process of the pre-branch AT state is ended.

  Returning to the explanation of the end processing of the branch AT state (FIG. 46), when an affirmative determination is made in step S2608 or step S2609, the processing of step S2611 to step S2614 is executed. In step S2611, "1" is set to the superimposition state of the sub-side RAM 84, and the branch AT state flag is cleared to "0". In the following step S2612, "2" is set in the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84. By setting “2” in the execution target counter, the process for the additional state in step S 1814 is executed in the next in-AT process (FIG. 37).

  Thereafter, the lottery process of the number of compensation replays is executed in step S2613, and the process of setting the counter of the number of compensation replays is executed in step S2614, and then the termination process of the present branch AT state is ended. The processing contents of these step S2613 and step S2614 are the same as the processing contents of step S2106 and step S2107 in the setting process (FIG. 40) of the additional state.

<Progressive mode of branch AT state>
Next, the progress of the branch AT state will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. FIG. 48 (A) is an explanatory view showing the progress mode of the branch AT state, and FIG. 48 (B1) to FIG. 48 (B6) are views simply showing the contents of the battle effect in the image display device 66.

  When the pre-branch AT state (ST41) ends and the value of the benefit point counter is 7 or more (ST42), a victory effect (ST43) or a draw effect (ST44) is selected in the battle lottery process. In this case, the normal AT state becomes continuous and returns to the pre-branch state (ST45). In addition, before shifting to the pre-branching state (ST45), it may shift to the additional state or the bonus AT state.

  When the pre-branch AT state (ST41) ends and the value of the benefit point counter is less than 7 (ST51), the AT continuation lottery process (ST52) is executed. As a result, in the case of the AT continuation winning, the winning effect (ST53) or the pulling effect (ST54) is selected in the battle lottery process. In this case, the normal AT state becomes continuous and returns to the pre-branch state (ST45). In addition, before shifting to the pre-branching state (ST45), it may shift to the additional state or the bonus AT state. On the other hand, when the continuation of the AT continuation lottery process (ST52) is not continued, a defeat effect (ST55) is selected as a battle effect.

  Here, the contents of the battle effect will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 48 (B1) to (B6).

  In the battle effect, first, as shown in FIG. 48 (B1), the friend character CH1 and the enemy character CH2 are displayed on the image display device 66. In the battle effect, a moving image will be displayed in each game, but when it becomes the display content before switching defined in each game, the display content before switching until the next game is started The display of the still image by is continued.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (B2), only the teammate character CH1 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 48 (B3), only the enemy character CH2 is displayed. After that, the state of the battle by both characters CH1 and CH2 is displayed as a moving image. Then, in the case of the winning effect, as shown in FIG. 48 (B4), a state in which the ally character CH1 has won over the enemy character CH2 is displayed, and in the case of the drawn effect, as shown in FIG. 48 (B5). The state in which the ally character CH1 and the enemy character CH2 are both rising is displayed, and in the case of the defeat effect, as shown in FIG. 48 (B6), a state in which the ally character CH1 is lost to the enemy character CH2 is displayed. Ru.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 48 (A), when the AT continuation lottery process (ST52) is not continued and the defeat effect (ST55) is selected as the battle effect, the value of the benefit point counter is 7 at the end of the defeat effect. It is determined whether the above condition is met. If the value of the bonus point counter is 7 or more (ST61), the resurrection victory effect (ST62) or the resurrection draw effect (ST63) is selected in the battle lottery process. In this case, the normal AT state becomes continuous, and after the addition state is performed, the state returns to the pre-branch state (ST64). On the other hand, if the value of the bonus point counter is less than 7 (ST65), the state shifts to the final chance state (ST66).

  With the above configuration, if the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state is one or more, the continuous AT in the normal AT state is determined, and even if the number of remaining sets is "0", the AT continuation lottery processing is continued and won Normally, the AT condition will be continuous. This makes it possible to increase the chance that the normal AT state is continuous.

  In addition, even if continuous continuation out of the AT continuation lottery process, the value of the bonus point counter becomes 7 or more in the branch AT state, and the number of remaining setting in the normal AT state becomes 1 or more, the normal AT state is It will be connected to one another. As a result, even if the defeat effect occurs in the branch AT state, it is possible to maintain an expectation for continuation of the normal AT state.

  Also, even if the continuation of the AT continuation lottery is once out, if the value of the benefit point counter becomes 7 or more in the branch AT state and the normal AT state is continuous, then the branch AT state starts thereafter. If the value of the benefit point counter is less than 7, the AT continuation lottery process is executed again. As a result, the execution opportunity of the AT continuation lottery process is secured before the end of the normal AT state, and it is possible to suitably enhance the expectation for the normal AT state to continue.

<A state where AT continuity probability is promoted>
Next, how the AT continuation probability in the AT continuation lottery process is promoted will be described with reference to the explanatory view of FIG.

  As described above, six types of AT continuation probability are set: 50%, 60%, 70%, 77%, 82% and 88%. When transitioning to the normal AT state via the bonus AT state, the AT continuation probability at the time of the transition is one of 77%, 82% and 88%. On the other hand, when directly transitioning to the normal AT state without passing through the bonus AT state, the AT continuation probability at the time of the transition is basically 50%.

  In this case, when the AT continuation is won in the AT continuation lottery process, the winning effect is won in the battle lottery process, and the AT continuation probability is increased by one stage when the promotion win is further promoted in the elevation continuation process of the AT continuation probability. . That is, if it is 50%, it will be 60%, if it is 60%, it will be 70%, it will be 77% if it is 70%, it will be 82% if it is 77%, and it will be 88% if it is 82%. As a result, as the normal AT state becomes continuous, the probability that the AT continuation probability is high tends to be high, and the normal AT state becomes easy to continuous. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage that the normal AT state is continuous.

  In addition, when the victory effect occurs 12 times in the normal AT state without intervening the non-AT state, the AT continuation probability is the highest probability regardless of which probability the AT continuation probability at that time is. It will be 88%. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the victory effect to occur in the battle effect, and the interest level of the battle effect is enhanced, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Here, when there are two chances of the remaining set number and the AT continuation lottery process as the chance that the normal AT state is continuous, the normal AT state is triggered by the remaining set number being 1 or more. Even if it continues, the battle lottery process may be executed to generate a victory effect. Then, when the winning effect occurs 12 times, the AT continuation probability of the AT continuation lottery process becomes the highest probability. Thereby, when there are two opportunities of the remaining set number and the AT continuation lottery processing as the opportunity that the normal AT state is continuous, both opportunities regarding whether or not the AT continuation probability is the highest probability are It becomes possible to associate closely.

  In addition, the slot machine 10 is provided with a stock notification unit 68 for notifying of the number of remaining settings in the normal AT state. In the stock notification unit 68, the display color is changed according to the number of remaining settings in the normal AT state, so the player grasps how many times the number of remaining settings is more than by checking the display color. It is possible. Thus, by checking the stock notification section 68 and grasping the remaining number of times of setting, the player's own degree of expectation with which the AT continuation probability becomes the highest probability in relation to the number of executions of the winning effect. Will understand. Therefore, it is possible to suitably enhance the expectation that the AT continuation probability is the highest probability.

  Further, the slot machine 10 is provided with a win number notification unit 69 for reporting the number of win effects. As a result, the player can clearly recognize the number of winning effects by checking the win number notification unit 69.

<Transition timing of addition status>
Next, the transition timing to the addition state in the pre-branch AT state and the branch AT state will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 50 (a) shows the execution period of the pre-branch AT state, FIG. 50 (b) shows the execution period of the branch AT state, FIG. 50 (c) shows the execution period of the additional state, FIG. Indicates the timing when the value of the benefit point counter becomes a multiple of seven.

  As shown in FIG. 50 (a), the pre-branch AT state is started at the timing of t1, and as a result of each game in the pre-branch AT state, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. The value of the counter is 7 × n (n is an integer of 1 or more). As a result, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), the pre-branch AT state is ended, and as shown in FIG. 50 (c), the addition state is started. That is, in the pre-branch AT state, the state shifts to the additional state at the timing when the value of the benefit point counter becomes a multiple of 7 or more.

  Thereafter, at time t3, the addition state ends as shown in FIG. 50 (c), and the state before the branch is restored as shown in FIG. 50 (a). In this case, the pre-branch AT state is restored with the number of continuing games remaining before the transition to the additional state.

  Thereafter, at time t4, as the pre-branch AT state ends as shown in FIG. 50 (a), the branch AT state is started as shown in FIG. 50 (b). And as a result of each game of the said branch AT state, as shown in FIG. 50 (d) at the timing of t5, the value of the bonus point counter becomes 7 × (n + 1) (n is an integer of 1 or more). However, at the timing of the t5, the branch AT state is not ended as shown in FIG. 50 (b).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), at the timing of t6, the branch AT state is ended, and the additional state is started as shown in FIG. 50 (c). That is, in the branch AT state, there is no transition to the overlay state at the timing when the value of the benefit point counter becomes a multiple of 7 or more, and the transition to the overlay state occurs at the end of the branch AT state. This prevents the execution mode of the battle effect from becoming complicated.

  Thereafter, at time t7, the addition state ends as shown in FIG. 50 (c), and the pre-branch AT state is started as shown in FIG. 50 (a).

<Process for additional status>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 51, the process for the additional state executed in step S1814 of the during-AT process (FIG. 37) will be described.

  In step S2801, a push order avoidance process is performed. Although the details of the push order avoidance process will be described later, the main MPU 72 prevents the occurrence of an opportunity to change the output state of the AT1 signal even though the continuous AT state has not occurred. It is a process.

  In the following step S2802, it is determined whether a bonus AT start command has been received from the main MPU 72 or not. If the bonus AT start command has been received, the bonus AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1" and the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "4" in step S2803. As a result, in the next in-AT processing (FIG. 37), the bonus AT processing of step S1816 is executed. Thereafter, in step S2804, “7” is added to the benefit point counter of the sub-side RAM 84, and the processing for this additional state is ended.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2802, it is determined in step S2805 whether a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 or not. If the winning result command has not been received, the processing for the actual game state is ended. If the winning result command is received, the process proceeds to step S2806.

  In step S2806, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery trigger has been won. If the player is elected at any one of IV = 7, 9, 10, 14 to 16 in the internal state lottery table (FIG. 14), it is determined that the bonus lottery trigger has been won.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2806, the additional lottery table corresponding to the current additional mode and the winning combination of the current game is read out from the sub ROM 83 in step S2807. In the additional lottery table, “0”, “1”, “2”, and “3” are set as the number of additions. Further, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 52A, the first additional mode, the second additional mode, and the third additional mode are set as the additional mode, and the mode is set when the mode is shifted to the additional state. In the first addition mode to be performed, the addition probability is the lowest, and even if the addition occurs, a small number of additions is easily selected. In addition, in the second addition mode that can be shifted from the first addition mode, the addition probability is higher than that in the first addition mode, and when addition is generated, the number of additions is selected more frequently than in the first addition mode. It is easy to be done. Also, in the third addition mode that can be shifted from the first addition mode or the second addition mode, the addition probability is higher than that in the second addition mode, and when addition is generated, the number of times is higher than in the second addition mode. It is easy to select the number of tops. Further, in relation to the winning combination, the larger the winning probability is, the higher the probability of winning is set, and the larger the winning IV value, the greater the number of winnings. The probability of being selected is set to be high.

  In the subsequent step S2808, an additional lottery process is executed. In the additional lottery process, the value of the sub-lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) is read in the sub-side RAM 84, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is collated with the above-mentioned additional lottery table.

  In the following step S2809, it is determined whether the result of the additional lottery process is an additional winning. In the case of an additional winning, in step S 2810, 7 × n (n is an integer of 1 or more) is added to the bonus point counter. In this case, n is the number of one or more additions selected in the addition lottery process.

  Here, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 52 (b), the benefit point counter has a data amount of 1 byte. The bonus point counter is a counter to which a value less than the bonus standard value (specifically, “7”) is added when the bonus point is won in the bonus point lottery process in the pre-branch AT state or the branch AT state. It is. In addition, when the bonus AT state is added to the bonus point counter and the remaining set number is added once, the bonus reference numerical value is added, and in the additional state, the added lottery is won in the additional drawing process and the remaining set number is n (n Is an integer greater than or equal to one, the value of benefit reference numerical value x n (where n is an integer greater than or equal to one) is added. That is, the benefit point counter is used not only as a counter for cumulatively adding a value less than the benefit reference value, but also as a counter for adding a value when the remaining set number is added. This makes it possible to reduce the number of counters as compared to a configuration in which a counter for cumulatively adding values less than the benefit reference value and a counter for measuring the remaining number of times are separately provided. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity in the configuration that handles data in units of bytes.

  In addition, a value less than the benefit reference value is accumulated and added to the benefit point counter and a value of benefit reference value × n (n is an integer of 1 or more) is added, and the number of remaining set times is one or more In the situation where the normal AT state consecutive units occur, the benefit reference value is subtracted from the benefit point counter. This makes it possible to centrally handle the numerical value related to the addition of the remaining number of times in the benefit point counter. Therefore, for example, simplification of the processing configuration is possible as compared with a configuration in which the benefit point counter and the counter for the remaining number of times of setting are separately provided and the addition process of the counter for the remaining number of times is performed according to the value of the benefit point counter. It is possible.

  Returning to the explanation of the processing for added state (FIG. 51), if a negative determination is made in step S2809, or if the processing in step S2810 is executed, the mode UP lottery processing is executed in step S2811. In the mode UP lottery process, the mode UP lottery table corresponding to the current additional mode and the winning combination of the current game is read out from the sub side ROM 83. For example, in the mode UP lottery table in the first additional mode, the UP winning result in the second additional mode, the UP winning result in the third additional mode, and the out result are set, and the second additional mode In the mode UP lottery table in, the result of the UP winning in the third additional mode and the result of the outlier are set. Further, in the mode UP lottery table in the third addition mode, as the mode UP winning, the current state maintenance winning result and the current state leaving result as the out result are set. Further, the mode UP lottery table in the first addition mode and the second addition mode is set such that the mode UP probability becomes higher as the value of the winning IV is larger. Further, in the mode UP lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) is read in the sub-side RAM 84, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is compared with the mode UP lottery table. Do.

  In the following step S2812, it is determined whether the result of the mode UP lottery process is mode UP winning. If the mode UP winning is not performed, the processing for the additional load state ends, and if the mode UP winning is performed, the process proceeds to step S2813. In step S2813, processing is performed to change the additional mode to a mode one stage higher or two stages higher. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52A, the mode is changed to the second addition mode or the third addition mode in the first addition mode, and the third addition mode in the second addition mode. In the case of the third addition mode, the third addition mode is maintained.

  Thereafter, in step S2814, a lottery process of the number of compensation replays is executed. As described above, in the additional state, the addition of the set number of times of the normal AT state is likely to occur, but the additional state is ended when the normal replay win occurs for the number of compensation replays. The lottery process of the number of compensation replays is a process for determining the number of compensation replays serving as an end trigger of the additional state by lottery.

  In the lottery process of the number of compensation replays, the compensation replay lottery table corresponding to the current addition mode is read from the sub side ROM 83, and further the value of the sub side lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) in the sub side RAM 84 The value of the sub-lottery counter is collated with the compensation replay lottery table. In the compensation replay lottery table in the first addition mode, “1”, “2”, and “3” are set as the number of compensation replays, “1” is selected with a probability of 6/10, and 3/10 The probability "2" is selected, and the probability 1/10 is selected "3". In the compensation replay lottery table in the second addition mode, "1" is selected with a probability of 3/10, "2" is selected with a probability of 5/10, and "3" is selected with a probability of 2/10. Ru. In the compensation replay lottery table in the third addition mode, "1" is selected with a probability of 1/10, "2" is selected with a probability of 3/10, and "3" is selected with a probability of 6/10. Ru. That is, the second addition mode not only has a higher addition probability than the first addition mode, but also has a large number of times of selection of compensation replay. Further, the third addition mode not only has a higher addition probability than the second addition mode, but also has a large number of times of selection of compensation replay.

  After the lottery process of the number of compensation replays is executed in step S2814, the number of compensation replays selected by the lottery process is added to the compensation replays number counter of the sub-side RAM 84 in step S2815. After that, the setting process of the book loading state is ended.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2806, it is determined in step S2816 whether or not the normal replay combination is won. If the normal replay role has not been won, the processing for the actual game overlay state is ended, and if the normal replay role is won, the process proceeds to step S2817.

  In step S2817, the value of the compensation replay counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is decremented by one, and in the subsequent step S2818, it is determined whether the value of the compensation replay counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0". If the value is not "0", the process for adding a book is ended. If the value is "0", the process proceeds to step S2819.

  In step S2819, it is determined whether or not the current add-on state is shifted in the middle of the pre-branch AT state by determining whether or not the value of the normal AT game counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is "0". Determine If the value of the normal AT game counter is “0”, this means that the current add state is one that has shifted at the end of the branch AT state, so that the pre-branch AT state is newly started. After the setting process of the pre-branch AT state is executed in S2820, the processing for this additional state is ended. The processing content of the setting processing of the pre-branch AT state is the same as the processing content shown in the flowchart of FIG. However, in step S2705, instead of clearing the branch AT status flag to "0", the superimposition status flag is cleared to "0".

  If the value of the normal AT game counter is not "0", a negative determination is made in step S2819, and the process proceeds to step S2821. In step S2821, the superimposition status flag of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and the execution target counter of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and then the processing for superimposition status is ended. As a result, in the next in-AT process (FIG. 37), the pre-branch AT state process in step S1812 is executed.

<Process for final chance>
Next, the final chance process to be executed in step S1815 of the in-AT process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2901, a push order avoidance process is executed. Although the details of the push order avoidance process will be described later, the main MPU 72 prevents the occurrence of an opportunity to change the output state of the AT1 signal even though the continuous AT state has not occurred. It is a process.

  In the following step S2902, it is determined whether a bonus AT start command has been received from the main MPU 72 or not. If a bonus AT start command has been received, the bonus AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1" and the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "4" in step S2903. The final chance flag of the side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, in the next in-AT processing (FIG. 37), the bonus AT processing of step S1816 is executed. Thereafter, “7” is added to the benefit point counter of the sub-side RAM 84 in step S2904, and the process for the final chance is ended.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2902, it is determined in step S2905 whether a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 or not. If the winning result command has not been received, the processing for the actual game state is ended. If the winning result command is received, the process proceeds to step S2906.

  In step S2906, a revival lottery table corresponding to the winning combination of the current game and the current value of the reward point counter is read out from the sub ROM 83. The revival lottery table is set so that the revival winning probability becomes higher as the value of the winning IV becomes larger, and the revival win probability becomes higher as the value of the current benefit point counter becomes larger. It is done.

  In the following step S2907, a resurrection lottery process is executed. In the revival lottery process, the value of the sub-lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) is read in the sub-side RAM 84, and the value of the sub-lottery counter is collated with the revival lottery table.

  In the following step S2908, it is determined whether or not the result of the resurrection lottery process is a resurrection winning. In the case of the resurrection winning, in step S2909, the continuation game number lottery processing at the time of resurrection is executed. In the lottery process, first, the number-of-continuous-games lottery table at the time of recovery is read out from the sub-side ROM 83. As described above, there are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games as the number of continued games in one set of the normal AT state. In the continuation game number lottery table at the time of revival, the probability that 30 games will be selected as the number of continued games per set is 4/10, the probability that 50 games will be selected is 3/10, and 100 games will be selected. Probability is 3/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) is read out in the sub-side RAM 84, and the value of the sub-lottery counter is compared with the number-of-continued-games lottery table Match. Then, in step S2910, a value corresponding to the number of continuing games selected in the lottery process of step S2909 is set in the normal AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84.

  Thereafter, in step S2911, the final chance flag in the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and the execution target counter in the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, in the next in-AT process (FIG. 37), the pre-branch AT state process in step S1812 is executed. Further, in step S2911, the benefit point counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". Thereafter, the processing for the final chance is ended.

  By clearing the reward point counter to “0” when it becomes a revival winning in revival lottery processing, the value of the reward point counter that has contributed to the revival winning is further used in the subsequent normal AT state of the consecutive destinations Is prevented. Therefore, it is possible to limit the generation of benefits by the reward points.

  On the other hand, when a negative judging is carried out at Step S2908, it progresses to Step S2912. In step S2912, it is determined whether or not the extension trigger has been won. If the player is elected at any one of IV = 7, 9, 10, 14 to 16 in the internal state lottery table (FIG. 14), it is determined that the extension trigger is elected. If the extension trigger role has not been won, various clear processing is executed in step S2913. In the various clear processing, the final chance flag of the sub side RAM 84 is cleared to “0”, and the normal AT flag of the sub side RAM 84 is cleared to “0”. By this, the normal AT state is ended. Also, the benefit point counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to “0”. Thereby, while the value of the reward point counter is taken over between sets in the case where the normal AT state is continuous, the number of remaining set times in the normal AT state becomes "0" and the state shifts to the non-AT state. It can not be taken over. Also, the victory counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the value of the victory counter is taken over between sets in the case where the normal AT state is continuous, while the number of remaining set times in the normal AT state becomes “0” and the transition is made to the non-AT state. I can not.

  Thereafter, after the lottery process of the number of ceiling games is performed in step S2914, the process for the final chance is ended. In the lottery process of the number of ceiling games, the ceiling game lottery table is read out from the sub-side ROM 83, and the sub-side RAM 84 further reads the value of the sub-side lottery counter periodically (eg 2 msec), and the sub-side lottery counter The value of is compared against the ceiling game lottery table. Then, the value selected in the lottery process of the number of ceiling games is set in the ceiling game counter of the sub-side RAM 84.

  If it is determined in step S2912 that the extension trigger has been won, the process for the final chance is ended. By this, the final chance state will be continued. That is, even if the player is won in the final chance state despite having won the extended trigger role, the final chance state continues as a benefit of having won the extended trigger role even if the resurrection lottery process does not win. Become. When winning the extension trigger in the final chance state, the resurrection lottery processing is executed in a manner with a high probability of becoming a revival winning, but it did not become revival winning despite being won the extension trigger In this case, the player may be discouraged by that amount. On the other hand, since the final chance state will be extended when winning the extension trigger role, it is possible to suppress the disappointment when the recovery trigger win is not achieved despite having won the extension trigger role. It becomes possible.

<Process for bonus AT>
Next, with reference to a flowchart of FIG. 54, a bonus AT process to be executed in step S1816 of the during-AT process (FIG. 37) will be described.

  In step S3001, a push order avoidance process is performed. Although the details of the push order avoidance process will be described later, the main MPU 72 prevents the occurrence of an opportunity to change the output state of the AT1 signal even though the continuous AT state has not occurred. It is a process.

  In the subsequent step S3002, it is determined whether or not a bonus AT end command indicating that the bonus AT frequency counter in the main RAM 74 is "0" has been received from the main MPU 72. Note that the main MPU 72 transmits a bonus AT end command when one set of bonus AT states has ended even if the bonus AT frequency counter has not reached "0", but in this case step S3002 Do not make a positive decision on

  If a negative determination is made in step S3002, the bonus AT process is ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, the bonus AT flag in the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0".

  In the following step S3004, it is determined whether "1" is set in the superimposition state flag of the sub RAM 84 or not. If “1” is set in the additional state flag, it means that the series of bonus AT states ended this time has shifted in the middle of the additional state, so in step S3005 After setting the value to "2", the processing for the bonus AT is ended. As a result, in the next in-AT process (FIG. 37), the process for the additional state in step S1814 is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3004, it is determined in step S3006 whether the branch AT state flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1". If “1” is set in the branch AT state flag, this means that the series of bonus AT states ended this time has been shifted in the middle of the branch AT state. After the value of the counter is set to "1", the processing for the bonus AT is ended. As a result, in the next in-AT process (FIG. 37), the branch AT state process of step S 1813 is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3006, in step S3008, it is determined whether "1" is set in the normal AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 or not. If “1” is set in the normal AT flag, this means that the series of bonus AT states ended this time has shifted in the middle of the pre-branch AT state, so the execution target in step S3009 After the value of the counter is cleared to "0", the processing for the bonus AT is ended. As a result, in the next in-AT process (FIG. 37), the pre-branch AT state process in step S1812 is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3008, it is determined in step S3010 whether the penalty AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S3010, "1" is set in the normal AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 in step S3011. In the following step S3012, a bonus game number lottery process after the bonus is executed.

  In the lottery process, first, the bonus game number lottery table after the bonus is read out from the sub side ROM 83. As described above, there are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games as the number of continued games in one set of the normal AT state. In the continuation game number lottery table after the bonus, the probability that 30 games are selected as the number of continued games in one set is 1/10, the probability that 50 games are selected is 2/10, and 100 games are selected. Probability is 7/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) is read in the sub-side RAM 84, and the value of the sub-lottery counter is compared with the number-of-continued-games lottery table after the bonus. Match.

  When the process of step S3012 is executed, a value corresponding to the number of continued games selected in the lottery process of step S3012 is set in the normal AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84 in step S3013. Thereafter, in step S3014, the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and then the bonus AT process is ended. As a result, in the next in-AT process (FIG. 37), the pre-branch AT state process in step S1812 is executed.

  On the other hand, if "1" is set in the penalty AT flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S3010, and the bonus AT process is ended. As a result, even if the bonus AT state is transitioned in the state of the penalty, the transition to the normal AT state is not made after the bonus AT state ends.

<External Output from Slot Machine 10 to Hall Computer HC>
Next, the configuration of the external output from the slot machine 10 to the hall computer HC will be described. FIG. 55 (a) is a schematic diagram for explaining the outline of the electrical configuration of the game hall where a large number of slot machines 10 are installed, and FIG. 55 (b) is an external terminal board 90 provided on the slot machine 10. It is a front view of.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a), an island facility S is provided in the game hall, and a large number of slot machines 10 are installed in the island facility S. Further, on the island equipment S, data counters DC are installed in one-to-one correspondence with the slot machines 10 respectively. Each data counter DC is mounted above the corresponding slot machine 10, and a first display section DC1 for displaying the number of times of execution of the game and a second display for displaying the number of times of execution of the predetermined gaming state A unit DC2 and a third display unit DC3 for displaying the number of execution times of a specific gaming state different from the predetermined gaming state are provided.

  A hall computer HC is provided in the game hall as a management control means for managing each slot machine 10 and each data counter DC. The hall computer HC is an electronic arithmetic device having a management program, and the MPU 201 is mounted therein. The MPU 201 temporarily stores various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and a ROM 202 storing fixed value data, and various data and information input from the slot machine 10 when executing the control program stored in the ROM 202. And a RAM 203 which is a memory for storing data.

  The hall computer HC is electrically connected to each slot machine 10 through the electric wiring group EL1, and is electrically connected to each data counter DC through the electric wiring group EL2. Then, a management process is executed based on the information received from each slot machine 10, and a signal corresponding to the result of the management process is transmitted to each data counter DC.

  Here, the configuration for transmitting information to the hole computer HC in the slot machine 10 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 55 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 55 (b), the external terminal board 90 is provided with a plurality of external terminals 90 a to 90 h. A total of eight external terminals 90a to 90h are provided, and the types of information externally output to the hall computer HC are different.

  Specifically, in order to output information indicating the number of medals provided in each game, and an external terminal 90a for an input signal used to output information indicating the number of bets of the game for each game. An external terminal 90b for a grant signal used for the first game, an external terminal 90c for a first gaming state signal used to output information indicating that the first gaming state has been started, and a second gaming state is started An external terminal 90d for a second gaming state signal used to output information indicating that the game has been played, and a third gaming state signal used to output information indicating that a third gaming state has been started The external terminal 90e, and the external terminal 90f for an abnormal signal used to output information indicating that the slot machine 10 has detected an occurrence of a fraud such as an insertion abnormality or a dispensing abnormality, and An external terminal 90g for a setting operation signal used to output information indicating that a further operation is being performed, and an opening signal used to output information indicating that the front door 12 is opening And an external terminal 90h.

  Among these, the pulse signal of the number according to the bet number is outputted from the external terminal 90a for the closing signal. For example, when the specified number of bets is “2”, a pulse signal is output twice so that the ON time and the OFF time are each 50 msec at the start of one game, and the specified number of bets is “2”. In the case of 3 ", at the start of one game, a pulse signal is output three times so that the ON time and the OFF time are each 50 msec. The hall computer HC determines that one game has been started by receiving one group of pulse signals from the external terminal 90a for the closing signal, and displays the number of times the game has been executed on the first display DC1 of the data counter DC. Add one.

  The pulse signal of the number according to the number of payouts is outputted from the external terminal 90b for an assignment signal. For example, in the case where nine medals are awarded, the pulse signal is output nine times so that the ON time and the OFF time are each 50 msec at the end of one game, and four medals are awarded. The pulse signal is output four times so that the ON time and the OFF time become 50 msec each at the end of one game.

  In the slot machine 10, the external terminal 90c for the first gaming state signal is used to allow the hole computer HC to recognize the number of execution times of the normal AT state. Hereinafter, the first gaming state signal is referred to as an AT1 signal, and the external terminal 90c for the first gaming state signal is referred to as an external terminal 90c for the AT1 signal. The hall computer HC determines that the normal AT state is newly started by confirming the rising of the signal from the external terminal 90c for the AT1 signal, and executes the normal AT state in the second display portion DC2 of the data counter DC. Add 1 to the display of the number.

  In the slot machine 10, the external terminal 90d for the second gaming state signal is used to enable the hole computer HC to recognize the number of executions of the bonus AT state. Hereinafter, the second gaming state signal is referred to as the AT2 signal, and the external terminal 90d for the second gaming state signal is referred to as the external terminal 90d for the AT2 signal. The hall computer HC determines that the bonus AT state is newly started by confirming the rising of the signal from the external terminal 90d for the AT2 signal, and executes the bonus AT state in the third display DC3 of the data counter DC. Add 1 to the display of the number.

  In the slot machine 10, the external terminal 90e for the third gaming state signal is used to allow the hole computer HC to recognize the number of executions of the CB state. The ON state is maintained from the external terminal 90f for the abnormal signal, the external terminal 90g for the setting operation signal, and the external terminal 90h for the open signal while the respective target events are occurring.

  Note that the ON signal may be output from the external terminal 90g for the setting operation signal not only during the setting change operation, but also during the confirmation operation of the current setting value. Further, both the abnormal signal and the setting operation signal may be output from one external terminal.

  The main MPU 72 is electrically connected to the external terminals 90a to 90h of the external terminal board 90 in one-to-one correspondence through the electrical wiring group EL3, and the external terminals 90a to 90h have a predetermined voltage according to the processing result. Output a signal.

<Processing for external output executed by main MPU 72>
Next, processing for external output executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. However, in the following description, processing for external output through the external terminal 90c for the AT1 signal and the external terminal 90d for the AT2 signal in the external terminal board 90 will be described.

  First, external output setting processing at the end will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The external output setting process at the end time is executed in step S216 of the normal process (FIG. 11).

  In step S3101, it is determined whether the internal state after CB or the state during CB is in progress. If it is not the internal state after CB or the state during CB, that is, if it is not the internal state of CB, the output state of the AT1 signal is set to OFF in step S3102, and the output state of the AT2 signal is output in step S3103. After setting to the OFF state, the external output setting process at the end of the process ends.

  That is, the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal are not set to the ON state in the non-CB internal state, and can be set to the ON state in the post-CB internal state or the during-CB state. Thus, the hole computer HC can not only check whether it is in the normal AT state or the bonus AT state by confirming that the AT1 signal or the AT2 signal is in the ON state, but also in the CB. It is possible to confirm that the internal rear state or the state during CB is in progress. In this case, as described above, the slot machine 10 is provided with the internal state notification unit 63 for notifying that the CB winning flag is set to "1", and the CB winning flag is set to "1". When “” is set, the internal state notification unit 63 is in the light emitting state without waiting for the end of the game. On the other hand, setting of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal to the ON state is performed after the end of the game in which the CB winning flag is set to "1". Thus, the slot machine 10 notifies the slot machine 10 that the internal state is after the internal state of CB or the state during the internal state before the external state is output to the hall computer HC. Be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event that only the game hall manager can grasp that the state is the internal state after CB or the state during the CB, and the player can not grasp the state.

  If the internal state is after CB or during CB and a positive determination is made in step S3101, the process proceeds to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether the value of the bell winning counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 3 or more. The bell prize counter is a counter for specifying the number of occurrences of the first bell prize or the second bell prize in the main MPU 72 without occurrence of pushout order when the first bell prize or the second bell prize is won. It is.

<Relationship between Bell prize and output state of AT1 signal>
Here, the bell winning determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The bell winning determination process is executed in step S607 in the winning determination process (FIG. 18).

  In the bell winning determination process, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether the AT2 signal is in the ON state. If a negative determination is made in step S3201, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the first bell combination or the second bell combination has been won in the current game. If neither the first bell nor the second bell is won, the bell prize determination processing is ended as it is. If the first bell or the second bell is won, the process proceeds to step S3203. .

  In step S3203, it is determined whether or not it has been confirmed that the first bell winning or the second bell winning has occurred as a result of the logical operation processing of the symbol combination in step S604 in the winning determination processing (FIG. 18). If the first bell winning or the second bell winning is occurring, the bell winning counter value of the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 and the bell out flag provided on the main RAM 74 is set to “0” in step S3204. After being cleared, the bell prize winning determination processing is finished. If both the first bell winning and the second bell winning have not occurred, the bell removal flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" in step S3205, and the bell winning counter of the main RAM 74 is After clearing "0", the bell prize winning determination process is ended. The bell off flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that both the first bell winning and the second bell winning have not occurred in a situation in which the first bell role or the second bell role is won.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3201 that the AT2 signal is in the ON state, the value of the bell winning counter in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" in step S3206. Thereafter, the bell prize winning determination process is ended.

  Returning to the description of the external output setting process at the end (FIG. 56), when it is determined in step S3104 that the value of the bell winning counter in the main RAM 74 is 3 or more, in step S3105 Set the output status to ON status.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3104, or if the process of step S3105 is performed, it is determined in step S3106 whether the bell removal flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". If the bell out flag is set to "1", the output state of the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state in step S3107, and the bell out flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" in step S3108. .

  The manner in which the output state of the AT1 signal is changed in relation to the bell combination will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 58 (a) shows the execution period of the normal AT state, FIG. 58 (b) shows the output state of the AT1 signal, and FIG. 58 (c) shows the execution of the game winning the first bell combination or the second bell combination. A period is shown, FIG. 58 (d) shows the occurrence of the first bell winning or the second bell winning, and FIG. 58 (e) shows the running period of the other games.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (c), the game in which the first bell or the second bell is won is started at the timing of t1 and the timing of t2 which are neither normal AT state nor bonus AT state. . However, since it is not in the AT state, notification control of pushing order for generating a bell winning corresponding to the winning combination is not executed in the sub MPU 82. Therefore, the bell winning does not occur as shown in FIG. 58 (d).

  Thereafter, at time t3, as shown in FIG. 58A, the transition to the normal AT state is performed in the sub MPU 82, whereby the normal AT state is started. Further, at timing t3, as shown in FIG. 58 (e), a new game is started, but since the game is not a game in which the first bell role or the second bell role has been won, either bell There will be no winnings. However, at the timing t3, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the AT1 signal remains in the OFF state.

  After that, at timing t4 and timing t6 in the normal AT state, as shown in FIG. 58C, a game in which the first bell role or the second bell role is won is started. In this case, since it is in the AT state, the sub MPU 82 executes notification control of pushing order for generating a bell winning corresponding to the winning. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58 (d), a bell winning corresponding to the winning combination occurs at each of the timing of t5 and the timing of t7. However, at this timing, since the value of the bell winning counter is “2” and is not 3 or more, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the AT1 signal remains in the OFF state.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (e) at the timing of t8, after the game in which neither the first bell nor the second bell is won is started, at the timing of t9 which is after the end of the game As shown in FIG. 58C, the game in which the first bell or the second bell is won is started. In this case, since it is in the AT state, the sub MPU 82 executes notification control of pushing order for generating a bell winning corresponding to the winning. Therefore, at time t10, as shown in FIG. 58 (d), a bell winning corresponding to the winning combination occurs. As a result, when the value of the bell winning counter becomes 3 or more, the AT1 signal is turned on as shown in FIG. 58 (b) at the timing of t10.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (c), at the timing of t11 and the timing of t12, the game in which the first bell or the second bell is won is started, and the bell winning corresponding to the winning combination is generated. Do. Then, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 58 (e), when the final game in the normal AT state is ended, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the setting of the end of the normal AT state in the sub MPU 82 is To be done. However, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the AT1 signal remains in the ON state.

  After that, the game in which the first bell or the second bell is won is started at the timing of t14, which is a state that is neither the normal AT state nor the bonus AT state. In this case, since it is not in the AT state, the notification control of the pushing order for generating the bell winning corresponding to the winning combination is not executed in the sub MPU 82. Also, in order to generate the first bell prize or the second bell prize, it is necessary to stop the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R as the first stop, while in either the normal AT state or the bonus AT state If the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop in the absence of a situation, a penalty event will be generated. Then, there is a high possibility that the bell winning will not occur in the game started at the timing of t14. Then, in spite of having won the first bell role or the second bell role, the corresponding bell prize is not generated, so that the bell out flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to “1” at the timing of t15, and the AT1 signal Is turned off.

  By setting the transition to the normal AT state and the end setting independently in the sub MPU 82, the processing load on the main MPU 72 can be reduced. Further, by setting the communication between the main MPU 72 and the sub MPU 82 as one-way communication from the main MPU 72 to the sub MPU 82, the opportunity for inputting an unauthorized signal to the main MPU 72 is reduced. Further, by externally outputting the main MPU 72 to the hall computer HC, the main MPU 72 controlling the progress of the game can directly control the external output.

  In this case, the main MPU 72 transitions to the normal AT state when the bell winning occurs a plurality of times (specifically, three times) without putting in a pressing order when the bell is won. Then, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state. With this configuration, when various configurations are adopted as described above, the main MPU 72 indirectly determines the transition to the normal AT state, and outputs an external signal indicating that the normal AT state is established. It is possible to do

  The main MPU 72 determines that the normal AT state has ended, and sets the AT1 signal to the OFF state, when the push-out occurs when the bell is won. With this configuration, when various configurations are adopted as described above, the main MPU 72 indirectly determines the end of the normal AT state, and outputs an external output of a signal indicating that the normal AT state is obtained. It is possible to terminate.

  The timing for setting the AT1 signal to the ON state and the timing for setting the AT1 signal to the OFF state are both points as to whether or not a bell winning has occurred when the bell is won. As a result, the monitoring process for setting the ON state of the AT1 signal and the monitoring process for setting the OFF state of the AT1 signal can be shared, and the processing load can be reduced.

  The number of bell winning occurrences at the time of the bell winning necessary to set the AT1 signal in the ON state is set larger than the number of occurrences of the bell non-winning at the time of the bell winning necessary for setting the AT1 signal in the OFF state. . As a result, regarding setting of the AT1 signal to the ON state, priority is given to setting to the ON state under the actual normal AT state rather than performing the setting processing earlier, with respect to setting the AT1 signal to the OFF state. It is possible to give priority to performing the setting process to the OFF state earlier than setting the OFF state when the normal AT state has actually ended. Therefore, the setting to the OFF state can be performed at an early stage while the AT1 signal is set to the ON state carefully.

  Not only the first bell prize but also the second bell prize are targets to be monitored when setting the AT1 signal to the ON state and setting the AT1 signal to the OFF state. This makes it possible to increase the setting trigger to the ON state and the setting trigger to the OFF state.

  In the bonus AT state, the bell prize counter is not added even if the bell prize occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the AT1 signal from being set to the ON state during the bonus AT state.

  Both the first bell winning and the second bell winning are required to stop the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R as the first stop. This makes it possible to prevent the AT1 signal from being set to the ON state in the non-AT state.

<Relationship between the normal replay role and the output state of the AT1 signal>
Returning to the explanation of the external output setting process (FIG. 56) at the end time, if a negative determination is made in step S3106, or if the process of step S3108 is executed, the main RAM 74 is provided in step S3109. It is determined whether or not the value of the pressing order correct counter is 2 or more. The pushing order correct counter is used by the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times the stop buttons 42 to 44 are stopped in the pushing order determined by the main MPU 72 by lottery when the player is elected as a normal replay player. It is a counter. The push order lottery process in the case of winning the normal replay role is executed at step S405 in the process of acquiring the win data (FIG. 16), as described above.

  Here, the normal replay pressing order determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal replay push order determination process is executed in step S608 in the winning determination process (FIG. 18).

  In the normal replay push order determination process, first, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not a normal replay prize has occurred in the current game. As already described above, when winning the normal replay role, the operation in relation to the stop operation order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 and the rotational positions of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Replay winning usually occurs regardless of the timing.

  If the normal replay winning has not occurred, the normal replay pressing order determination processing is ended as it is, and if the normal replay winning has occurred, the process proceeds to step S3302. In step S3302, the main RAM 74 reads the result of the pushing order lottery process (step S405) executed at the start of the current game. In the following step S3303, the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the current game is read out. Then, in step S3304, it is determined whether the result read out in step S3302 matches the result read out in step S3303. That is, it is determined whether or not each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has been stopped in the order corresponding to the result of the pushing order lottery process.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3304, the value of the pressing order correct counter in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 in step S3305, and then the normal replay pressing order determination process is ended. On the other hand, when the negative determination is made in step S3304, the value of the pressing order correct counter in the main RAM 74 is cleared to “0” in step S3306, and the set flag provided in the main RAM 74 is “0”. After clearing, the normal replay pressing order determination process is ended. The setting completion flag specifies by the main side MPU 72 whether or not the processing corresponding to the value of the push order correct counter being 2 or more is already executed under the condition that the AT1 signal is in the ON state. It is a flag for

  Returning to the description of the external output setting process at the end (FIG. 56), when it is determined in step S3109 that the value of the push order correct counter is 2 or more, the AT1 signal is turned on in step S3110. In step S3111, it is determined whether the value of the setting completion flag provided in the main RAM 74 is "1".

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3110 and a negative determination is made in step S3111, the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state in step S3112. In the following step S3113, the continuous wait time (specifically, 1 sec) is set in the weight counter of the main RAM 74. As a result, a negative determination is made in step S218 of the normal process (FIG. 11), and a wait time corresponding to the consecutive wait time occurs at the end of the current game. In step S3113, "1" is set in the setting completion flag of the main RAM 74. Thereafter, in step S3114, a continuous weight command is set to be sent to the sub MPU 82. As a result, the sub MPU 82 sets "1" for the continuous play weight flag in step S1210 of the standby effect setting process (FIG. 29) as already described, and the stillness corresponding to the continuous play weight time The image is displayed on the image display device 66.

  As described above, when the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state triggered by the value of the push order correct counter becoming 2 or more, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state at the start of the next game. The setting process is executed in the external output setting process at the start in step S210 of the normal process (FIG. 11).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an external output setting process at the start time.

  In step S3401, it is determined whether the internal state after CB or the state during CB is in progress. If it is not in the internal state after CB or in the state during CB, that is, if it is in the non-internal state of CB, the external output setting process at the start of the process is ended.

  If the internal state after CB or the state during CB is in progress, it is determined in step S3402 whether or not the value of the pressing order correct counter in the main RAM 74 is 2 or more. If it is 2 or more, it is determined in step S3403 whether the AT2 signal is in the ON state. If the AT2 signal is not in the ON state, the AT1 signal is set in the ON state in step S3404.

  As described above, when the value of the push order correct counter becomes 2 or more under the condition that the AT1 signal is in the ON state and the AT2 signal is in the OFF state, the AT1 signal at the end of the game becomes 2 or more. Is set to the OFF state and the AT1 signal is set to the ON state again at the start of the next game which is started after the continuous wait time (1 sec) has elapsed. Such a setting process of the AT1 signal is executed to allow the hole computer HC to grasp the number of execution sets of the normal AT state when the normal AT state is continuous. However, since it is impossible to specify whether the normal AT state is continuous or not in the main MPU 72, the OFF / ON setting of the above-mentioned AT1 signal is performed according to the timing when the continuous AT state is generated. As described above, in the sub MPU 82, processing for normal replay and processing for pressing order avoidance are executed. These normal replay processing and push order avoidance processing will be described below.

  FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing processing for normal replay in the sub MPU 82. The normal replay process is executed in step S1901 of the pre-branch AT state process (FIG. 38).

  In the normal replay process, first, in step S3501, it is determined whether a lottery result command has been received from the main MPU 72 or not. If a lottery result command has been received, it is determined in step S3502 whether or not data corresponding to a normal replay player combination is included in the current lottery result command. When the data corresponding to the normal replay role winning is included, in step S3503, by grasping the contents of the pushing order command received together with the current drawing result command, the pushing order drawing on the main side MPU 72 is made The pushing order data corresponding to the result of the process (step S405) is written to the sub-side RAM 84.

  In the following step S3504, it is determined whether "1" is set in the post-run flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 or not. The post-run flag is a flag for specifying in the sub MPU 82 that the normal AT state has been run. The timing at which “1” is set in the after-run flag is that if the victory effect or the draw effect is executed in the branch AT state to return to the pre-branch AT state, the additional state shifted after the end of the branch AT state ends. In the case of returning to the pre-branch AT state, and in the final chance state, it is a case where the resurrection lottery processing (step S2907) is won and the pre-branch AT state is restored.

  If “1” is set in the post-run flag, in step S3505, the pressing order data written in the sub RAM 84 in step S3503 is set as pressing order data to be notified in the image display device 66. Thereby, the pressing order of each stop button 42 to 44 selected in the pressing order lottery process (step S405) of the main MPU 72 is notified. In the AT state, when the pressing order of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44 is notified by the image display device 66, it is general for the player to operate the respective stop buttons 42 to 44 according to the pressing order. The stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the order selected in the pushing order lottery process (step S405) in the main MPU 72. Even if the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped according to the pressing order, the regular replay winning occurs.

  If “1” is not set in the post-run flag, it is determined in step S3506 whether the value of the pressing order correct counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. In the game in which the normal replay player is elected, the pressing order correct counter counts the number of times each stop button 42 to 44 has been operated in the mode selected in the pressing order lottery process (step S405) of the main MPU 72 It is a counter for specifying in.

  If the value of the pressing order correct counter is 1 or more, at step S3507, pressing order data different from the pressing order data written in the sub-side RAM 84 at step S3503 is notified as a pressing order data to notify the image display device 66. Set Thereby, the pressing order different from the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 selected in the pressing order lottery process (step S405) of the main MPU 72 is notified. In the AT state, when the pressing order of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44 is notified by the image display device 66, it is general for the player to operate the respective stop buttons 42 to 44 according to the pressing order. The stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in an order different from the order selected in the pushing order lottery process (step S405) in the main MPU 72. Even if the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped according to the pressing order, the regular replay winning occurs.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3501, a negative determination is made in step S3502, a negative determination is made in step S3506, the processing in step S3505 is performed, or the processing in step S3507 is performed. In step S3508, it is determined whether a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 or not. If the winning result command has not been received, the processing for regular replay is ended, and if the winning result command is received, the process proceeds to step S3509.

  In step S3509, it is determined whether a normal replay win has occurred in the current game. If the normal replay winning has not occurred, the process for the normal replay is ended. If the normal replay winning has occurred, the process proceeds to step S3510. In step S3510, it is determined whether the pushing order data stored in the sub-side RAM 84 matches the actual pushing order in the current game.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3510, the value of the pressing order correct counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is incremented by one in step S3511. In the following step S3512, it is determined whether the value of the push order correct counter is 2 or more. If the value is not 2 or more, the process for normal replay is ended. If the value is 2 or more, the flag for after-run of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to “0” in step S3513. End the replay processing. If a negative determination is made in step S3510, in step S3514, the push order correctness counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to “0”, and the process for the normal replay is ended.

  FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing push order avoidance processing in the sub MPU 82. The push order avoidance process includes step S2401 in the branch AT state process (FIG. 44), step S2801 in the additional state process (FIG. 51), step S2901 in the final chance process (FIG. 53), and bonus AT process (FIG. This is executed in step S3001 of FIG.

  In the push order avoidance process, first, in step S3601, it is determined whether a lottery result command has been received from the main MPU 72 or not. If a lottery result command has been received, it is determined in step S3602 whether or not data corresponding to a normal replay player combination is included in the current lottery result command. When the data corresponding to the normal replay role winning is included, in step S 3603, by grasping the contents of the pushing order command received together with the current drawing result command, the pushing order drawing on the main MPU 72 is made. The pushing order data corresponding to the result of the process (step S405) is written to the sub-side RAM 84.

  In the following step S3604, it is determined whether the value of the pressing order correct counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. If the value of the pressing order correct counter is 1 or more, at step S3605, pressing order data different from the pressing order data written to the sub-side RAM 84 at step S3603 is notified as a pressing order data to notify the image display 66. Set Thereby, the pressing order different from the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 selected in the pressing order lottery process (step S405) of the main MPU 72 is notified. In the AT state, when the pressing order of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44 is notified by the image display device 66, it is general for the player to operate the respective stop buttons 42 to 44 according to the pressing order. The stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in an order different from the order selected in the pushing order lottery process (step S405) in the main MPU 72. Even if the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped according to the pressing order, the regular replay winning occurs.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3601, a negative determination is made in step S3602, a negative determination is made in step S3604, or if the processing in step S3605 is performed, main MPU 72 in step S3606. It is determined whether or not the winning result command has been received from. If the winning result command has not been received, the main-pushing order avoidance process is finished, and if the winning result command is received, the process proceeds to step S3607.

  In step S3607, it is determined whether or not a normal replay win has occurred in the current game. If the normal replay winning has not occurred, the process for the normal replay is ended, and if the normal replay winning has occurred, the process proceeds to step S3608. In step S3608, it is determined whether or not the pushing order data stored in the sub-side RAM 84 matches the actual pushing order in the current game.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3608, the value of the pressing order correct counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is incremented by one in step S3609. Thereafter, the normal replay processing ends. If a negative determination is made in step S3608, in step S3610, the push order correctness counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to “0”, and the process for the normal replay is ended.

  As described above, by executing the normal replay process and the push order avoidance process, the main MPU 72 is determined in the game in which the normal replay role is won in the pre-branch AT state after the continuous AT state. The order of pressing the stop buttons 42 to 44 is notified by the image display device 66. As a result, if the player operates the stop buttons 42 to 44 according to the pressing order notification, the pressing order becomes correct, so that the main MPU 72 temporarily turns the AT1 signal OFF and then sets the ON status again. Be done.

  On the other hand, in the situation where it is not the pre-branch AT state after the continuous AT state, the pushing order different from the pushing order of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44 determined by the main MPU 72 in the game winning the normal replay role is It is notified by the image display device 66. As a result, if the player operates the stop buttons 42 to 44 according to the pressing order notification, the main MPU 72 does not become the pressing order correct answer in the situation that is not the pre-branch AT state after the continuous AT state. The process of setting the signal to the ON state again after turning the signal off is not executed.

  Further, in a configuration in which the main MPU 72 temporarily sets the AT1 signal to the OFF state and then sets the ON state to the ON state again when the pressing order correctness occurs a plurality of times, before the branch after the continuous AT state In the non-AT state, notification control of a pressing order different from the correct pressing order is executed on condition that the pressing order correct answer occurs once or more. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency at which the push order notification is performed when the normal replay role is won, and it is possible to suppress that the push order notification continues to be performed meaninglessly in the AT state. .

  The manner in which the output state of the AT1 signal is changed in relation to the normal replay role will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  Fig. 63 (a) shows the execution period of the pre-branch AT state, Fig. 63 (b) shows the execution period of the branch AT state, Fig. 63 (c) shows the output state of the AT1 signal, Fig. 63 (d) Shows the execution period of the normal replay role winning game, FIG. 63 (e) shows the execution period of the other games, FIG. 63 (f) shows the execution period of the correct pressing order notification, and FIG. FIG. 63 (h) shows the setting status of the pressing order correct counter in the main side RAM 74, and FIG. 63 (i) shows the setting status of the continuous waiting time.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (a), at the timing t1 and the timing t2 of the situation in the pre-branch AT state, as shown in FIG. 63 (d), the game in which the normal replay role is won is started. In this case, since the notification of the correct pressing order is not executed as shown in FIG. 63 (f), the value of the pressing order correct counter is further not shown as shown in FIG. 63 (h). Since it is “0”, as shown in FIG. However, in the game started at the timing of t2, the pressing order of each stop button 42 to 44 is accidentally correct, and as shown in FIG. 63 (h) at the timing of t3, which is the end timing of the game. The value of the pressing order correct counter is “1”. Further, at the timing of t3, the pre-branch AT state is ended as shown in FIG. 63 (a), and the branch AT state is started as shown in FIG. 63 (b).

  Thereafter, at timing t4 in the branch AT state, as shown in FIG. 63 (e), a game different from the normal replay player winning is executed, and at timing t5 thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63 (d). The game that normally won the replay role is started. In this case, since the value of the push order correct counter is 1 or more as shown in FIG. 63 (h), incorrect push order notification is executed at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 63 (g). Be done. As a result, in the game, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the incorrect pressing order, and the pressing order correct counter is "0" as shown in FIG. 63 (h) at the timing of t6 which is the end timing of the game. It is cleared.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t7 in the branch AT state, as shown in FIG. 63 (d), the game in which the normal replay role is won is started. In this case, since the notification of the correct pressing order is not executed as shown in FIG. 63 (f), the value of the pressing order correct counter is further not shown as shown in FIG. 63 (h). Since it is “0”, as shown in FIG. Therefore, in the game started at the timing of t7, the pushing order becomes incorrect.

  Thereafter, at time t8, as shown in FIG. 63 (e), the other games are ended, and as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the branch AT state is ended, and also shown in FIG. 63 (a). As such, the pre-branch AT state is started.

  After that, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 63 (d), the game in which the normal replay role is won is started. In this case, since it is the pre-branch AT state after the continuous AT state, as shown in FIG. 63 (f), the correct touch order notification is executed. Thereby, in the game, the respective stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the correct press order, and the value of the press order correct counter is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 63 (h) at the timing of t10 which is the end timing of the game. Be done.

  Thereafter, after the other game is executed as shown in FIG. 63 (e) at the timing of t11, the game winning the normal replay role as shown in FIG. 63 (d) is started at the timing of t12. . In this case, since it is the pre-branch AT state after the continuous AT state, as shown in FIG. 63 (f), the correct touch order notification is executed. As a result, in the game, the respective stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the correct pressing order, and at the timing of t13, the value of the pressing order correct counter is incremented by one as shown in FIG. As a result, the value of the push order correctness counter becomes "2", so that the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state as shown in FIG. 63 (c), and the continuous waiting time as shown in FIG. 63 (i). Measurement of is started. Then, at the timing of t14, the continuous weight time elapses. Thereafter, at time t15, another game is started as shown in FIG. 63 (e), and at the same time, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state as shown in FIG. 63 (c).

  Thereafter, at time t16, as shown in FIG. 63 (d), the game in which the normal replay role is won is started. In this case, since the notification of the correct pressing order is not executed as shown in FIG. 63 (f), the value of the pressing order correct counter is further not shown as shown in FIG. 63 (h). Since it is "2", as shown in FIG. 63 (g), the incorrect solution push order notification is executed. Thereby, in the game, each stop button 42 to 44 is operated in the incorrect pressing order, and the pressing order correct counter is “0” as shown in FIG. 63 (h) at the timing of t17 which is the end timing of the game. It is cleared.

  As described above, when the normal AT state is continuous, the sub MPU 82 performs execution control of the correct pressing order notification so as to urge the correct pressing order when the normal replay combination is won, and the sub MPU 82 Even if the main MPU 72 does not directly know that the continuous AT setting has been performed, the main MPU 72 normally receives the normal replay condition by generating the correct pressing order at the time of winning the normal replay role a plurality of times. It is possible to indirectly know that the connection has occurred. As a result, the main MPU 72 can temporarily turn the AT1 signal OFF and then ON again in accordance with the continuous AT state.

  In the sub-side MPU 82, when the normal replay role is won in a situation that does not correspond to the continuous AT state, the execution control of the incorrect press-down order notification is performed daringly, and the normal AT state is not a continuous state. Regardless of the fact, the possibility that the pressing order correct answer at the time of the regular replay role winning is generated plural times is reduced. As a result, the control of turning the AT1 signal OFF and then turning it ON again becomes easy to be executed at the time of the continuous AT state.

  When turning on the AT1 signal once after turning off the AT1 signal at the time of normal AT state, setting to the OFF state is performed before measurement of the waiting time, and setting to the ON state is the waiting time After the measurement of In this configuration, when the continuous wait time is set, the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state at the end of one game and the AT1 signal is set to the ON state at the start of the next game. It becomes possible to secure a period in which the hall computer HC recognizes that the AT1 signal is in the OFF state.

  The value of the pressing order correct counter may be cleared to “0” when the value of the pressing order correct counter is 2 or more and the AT1 signal is set to OFF after being set to ON.

<Relationship between bonus AT state and output state of AT1 signal and AT2 signal>
Returning to the explanation of the external output setting process at the end (FIG. 56), if a negative determination is made in step S3109, a negative determination is made in step S3110, a positive determination is made in step S3111, or If the process has been executed, the process proceeds to step S3115. In step S3115, it is determined whether the bonus AT state is being executed by determining whether the bonus AT state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". If "1" is set in the bonus AT state flag, the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state in step S3116.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3115, or if the process of step S3116 is performed, it is determined in step S3117 whether "1" is set in the weight generation flag of the main RAM 74 or not. It is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) is out in the post-CB internal state. If the weight generation flag is set to "1", the AT2 signal is set to the ON state and the weight generation flag is cleared to "0" in step S3118.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3117, or if the process of step S3118 is performed, it is determined in step S3119 whether the value of the bonus AT counter in the main RAM 74 is “0”. Then, it is determined whether it is the timing at which one set of bonus AT states has ended. If the value of the bonus AT counter is not "0", the external output setting process at the end of the process is ended as it is, and if the value of the bonus AT counter is "0", the AT2 is selected in step S3120. After setting the signal to the OFF state, the external output setting process at the end of the process is ended.

  Next, in the external output setting process at the start (FIG. 60), the process contents executed in relation to the bonus AT state and the output state of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal will be described.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3402, an affirmative determination is made in step S3403, or if the process of step S3404 is executed, the bonus AT end flag of the main RAM 74 is "1" in step S3405. By determining whether or not it is set, it is determined whether or not one set of bonus AT states has ended and the number of remaining sets of bonus AT states is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3405, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state in step S3406.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3405, or if the process of step S3406 is executed, it is determined in step S3407 whether the value of the bonus AT frequency counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. Then, it is determined whether a new set of bonus AT states is to be started. If the negative determination is made in step S3407, the external output setting process at the time of the main start is ended, and if the positive determination is made in step S3407, the AT2 signal is set to the ON state in step S3408. The external output setting process at the time of this start is ended.

  Next, the external output setting process before the start will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The external output setting process before the start is executed in step S206 of the normal process (FIG. 11).

  In step S3701, it is determined whether the internal state after CB or the state during CB is in progress. If it is not in the internal state after CB or in the state during CB, that is, if it is in the non-internal state of CB, the external output setting process before the start of the process is ended.

  If the internal state after CB or the state during CB is in progress, it is determined in step S3702 whether or not the pre-start wait flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The situation where the pre-start wait flag is set to "1" is the case where the first special replay role is won in the post-CB internal state, as described above. In addition to that, the second special replay role or the third special replay role is won under the condition that the AT1 signal is in the ON state after the CB internal state, and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is selected as the first stop. It is a case of operation. If a negative determination is made in step S3702, the external output setting process before the start of the process is ended. If a positive determination is made in step S3702, the process proceeds to step S3703.

  In step S3703, the AT2 signal is set to the ON state. Thereafter, in step S3704, the pre-start wait flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0", and the external output setting process prior to this start is ended.

  Next, an output mode of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal in the case of transitioning to the normal AT state triggered by the bonus AT state will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  65 (a) shows the output state of the AT1 signal, FIG. 65 (b) shows the output state of the AT2 signal, FIG. 65 (c) shows the execution period of the normal AT state, and FIG. 65 (d) shows the bonus FIG. 65 (e) shows an execution period of an AT state, FIG. 65 (e) shows an execution period of a game that triggers transition to a bonus AT state, and FIG. 65 (f) shows an execution period of other games. Indicates the setting status of the weight period.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (e), a game serving as a trigger for transition to the bonus AT state is started at the timing t1 which is neither the normal AT state nor the bonus AT state, and the game is started at the timing t2. finish. In this case, as shown in FIG. 65 (d), the bonus AT state is started at the timing of t2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (f), other games are to be started at timing t3 immediately after the bonus AT state is started. The wait period (8 sec) is set as shown in FIG. The wait period elapses at the timing of t4, and the AT2 signal is set to the ON state at the timing of the t4 as shown in FIG. 65 (b).

  Thereafter, at time t5, the final game of the current set in the bonus AT state is started as shown in FIG. 65 (f). Then, at the timing of t6, the wait period (5 sec) is set as shown in FIG. 65 (g), and the bonus AT state is ended as shown in FIG. 65 (d), and further in FIG. 65 (b). As shown, the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state. Then, at the timing of t7, when the wait period elapses as shown in FIG. 65 (g), the current game is ended as shown in FIG. 65 (f).

  Thereafter, at time t8, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 65 (f). In this case, the remaining number of times the bonus AT state is set is 1 or more. Therefore, at the timing of t8, the bonus AT state is set again as shown in FIG. 65 (d), and the AT2 signal is set ON again as shown in FIG. 65 (b).

  After that, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 65 (f), the final game of the current set in the bonus AT state is started. Then, at the timing of t10, the wait period (5 sec) is set as shown in FIG. 65 (g), and the bonus AT state is ended as shown in FIG. 65 (d), and further in FIG. 65 (b). As shown, the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state. Then, at the timing of t11, when the wait period elapses as shown in FIG. 65 (g), the current game ends as shown in FIG. 65 (f). In this case, since the remaining setting number of the bonus AT state is “0”, as shown in FIG. 65 (f), the timing shown in FIG. While the normal AT state is started as shown, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state as shown in FIG. 65 (a).

  As described above, even when the bonus AT state is continuous, the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state each time one set of bonus AT states is ended, and a new set of bonus AT states is started. The AT2 signal is set to the ON state again. In addition, even when the bonus AT state is continuous, a wait period occurs. By setting the wait period in this manner, the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state at the end of one game and the AT2 signal is set to the ON state at the start of the next game. It is possible to secure a period in which the computer HC recognizes that the AT2 signal is in the OFF state. Further, in this weight period, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the bonus AT state being continuous with the image display device 66 or the like.

  When the bonus AT state occurs, the transition to the normal AT state is made after the bonus AT state ends. In this case, when the bonus AT state ends and shifts to the normal AT state, not only the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state, but also the AT1 signal is set to the ON state. As described above, when the transition condition to the normal AT state is satisfied, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state without waiting for three occurrences of the bell winning, whereby the normal AT state is started. It is possible to set the signal to the ON state early.

  Next, referring to the timing chart of FIG. 66, an output mode of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal when transitioning to the bonus AT state in the middle of the normal AT state will be described.

  66 (a) shows the output state of the AT1 signal, FIG. 66 (b) shows the output state of the AT2 signal, FIG. 66 (c) shows the execution period of the normal AT state, and FIG. 66 (d) shows the bonus 66 (e) shows an execution period of the AT state, FIG. 66 (f) shows an execution period of other games, and FIG. 66 (g) shows an execution period of the game as a trigger for transition to the bonus AT state. Shows the setting situation of the weight period, and FIG. 66 (h) shows the occurrence situation of the bell winning.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (e), at the timing of t1 in the condition that the normal AT state as shown in FIG. 66 (c) and the AT1 signal in the ON state as shown in FIG. 66 (a) , A game serving as a trigger for transition to the bonus AT state is started. Then, at time t2 when the game ends, the normal AT state ends as shown in FIG. 66 (c), while the bonus AT state starts as shown in FIG. 66 (d). Further, at the timing of t2, the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state as shown in FIG. 66 (a).

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, another game is started as shown in FIG. 66 (f). In this case, measurement of the wait period (8 sec) is started as shown in FIG. 66 (g) at the timing of t3. Then, when the wait period elapses at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the AT2 signal is set to the ON state.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 66 (f), the final game of the current set in the bonus AT state is started. Then, at the timing of t6, the wait period (5 sec) is set as shown in FIG. 66 (g), and the bonus AT state is ended as shown in FIG. 66 (d), and further in FIG. 66 (b). As shown, the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state. Further, at the timing of t6, the normal AT state is resumed as shown in FIG. 66 (c). However, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the AT1 signal is maintained in the OFF state, and this OFF state is also after timing t7, which is the timing when the wait period has elapsed as shown in FIG. 66 (g). Maintained.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (h) in the normal AT state, a bell winning is generated at each of the timing t8, the timing t9 and the timing t10, as shown in FIG. 66 (a) at the timing t10. The AT1 signal is set to the ON state.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  A bonus point counter is provided in the sub-side RAM 84, and the bonus points selected in the bonus point lottery process and bonus points selected are added to the bonus point counter. Then, when the value of the benefit point counter is equal to or more than the benefit reference value, the normal AT state is continuous. Further, when the transition condition to the bonus AT state is satisfied, the remaining execution number of the normal AT state is added, and the remaining execution of the normal AT state is also performed when the additional winning is achieved in the additional lottery processing in the additional state. The number is added. In this case, when the transition condition to the bonus AT state is satisfied, or when the additional win is achieved in the additional lottery process, the above-mentioned bonus point counter does not store the remaining execution frequency itself, but the bonus reference numerical value Information corresponding to x n (n is an integer of 1 or more) is added. Therefore, as described above, it is possible to commonly use the reward point counter in the configuration in which the continuous AT mode is diversified. This makes it possible to consolidate the storage areas to be referred to when determining whether the normal AT state should be continuous or not, and to reduce the processing load at the time of the determination. Further, in the configuration in which data is handled in units of 1 byte, it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity as compared with the configuration in which the benefit point counter and the counter for the remaining number of executions are provided in byte units.

  If one bonus point is selected by the bonus point lottery process from among a plurality of types of bonus points when the bonus lottery trigger role is won, the bonus points are triggered when the bonus lottery trigger role is won. It is possible to diversify the mode of addition. Further, since all the benefit points selected in this case are smaller than the benefit reference value, the acquisition of the benefit points will result in the occurrence of a continuous AT condition, and the normal AT condition is continuous. It will be possible to gradually increase the degree of expectation to sleep.

  In the case where the normal AT state is continuous, the bonus points for the bonus standard value are subtracted from the bonus point counter. As a result, in the configuration in which the benefit point counter is commonly used, it becomes possible to standardize the treatment of the benefit points in the case of generating the continuous AT state, and the processing load can be reduced.

  In the situation where the bonus points are larger than the bonus standard value × (n-1) and smaller than the bonus standard value × n (n is an integer of 1 or more), the bonus standard value × (n-1) was exceeded Information corresponding to the number of minutes is notified by the benefit point notification unit 67. Thus, the player can play the game while clearly recognizing how much bonus points are required to generate the continuous AT state, which is preferable for the player's expectation It is possible to In this case, the benefit point notification unit 67 reports the remaining value when the benefit point is divided by the benefit reference value. As a result, in the configuration in which the benefit point counter is commonly used, it is possible to derive the numerical value of the benefit points to be notified by the benefit point notification unit 67 with a simple processing configuration.

  In a situation where the bonus points are a bonus reference value × n or more and a value smaller than the benefit reference value × (n + 1) (n is an integer of 1 or more), the information corresponding to n is received by the stock notification unit 68 It is informed. As a result, the player can recognize the remaining execution number of the normal AT state, and the player's sense of superiority can be suitably enhanced. In this case, the stock notification unit 68 reports the numerical value of the quotient when the bonus points are divided by the bonus reference value. Thus, in the configuration in which the benefit point counter is commonly used, it is possible to derive the number of remaining executions of the normal AT state notified by the stock notification unit 68 by a simple processing configuration.

  In the pre-branch AT state or in the branch AT state, the bonus point shifts to the additional state when it becomes equal to or higher than the bonus reference value. Then, in the additional state, a situation may occur in which the value of the benefit reference value × n (n is an integer of 1 or more) is added to the benefit point counter. This allows these states to be closely related.

  In the configuration in which the normal AT state is continuous when the benefit point is equal to or more than the benefit reference value when the pre-branch AT state or the branched AT state ends, the other points are other than the benefit reference value When the normal AT state is continuous due to the continuation condition, the reward points less than the benefit reference value are maintained even in the normal AT state of the consecutive destination. As a result, there are many opportunities for bonus points to be greater than or equal to the bonus standard value, and it is possible to generate many opportunities having an expectation as to whether or not the bonus points can be greater than or equal to the bonus standard value. Further, according to the present configuration, it is possible to receive benefits from even the benefit points acquired immediately before the end of the pre-branch AT state or the branch AT state. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect the establishment of the bonus point acquisition condition at any timing of the pre-branch AT state and the branch AT state. Furthermore, according to the present configuration, it is possible to increase the profit when the normal AT state is continuous, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the normal AT state to be continuous.

  Not only is the normal AT state continuous when the AT continuous winning is achieved in the AT continuous lottery process, the normal AT state also continues when the bonus points become equal to or greater than the benefit reference value. As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode in the case where the normal AT state is continuous, and it is possible to suitably enhance the expectation of the player who is expecting the continuous AT state to be continuous.

  When the normal AT state is continuous, a victory effect or a draw effect is executed as a battle effect in the branch AT state. As a result, the player can play the game while expecting the winning effect or the pulling effect to be executed, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, when the number of times the winning effect is executed is a predetermined number (12), the probability that the AT continuation winning will be achieved is the highest probability regardless of the probability of the AT continuing winning at that time. This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of expectation that the winning effect will be performed.

  In addition, since the victory effect is also executed when the normal AT state is continuous due to the remaining execution frequency being one or more, the number of execution times of the victory effect is predetermined as the number of remaining execution frequency is increased. Expectations for the number of executions can be increased. Therefore, when a large number of times is set as the remaining execution number, not only the benefit that the number of consecutive stations in the normal AT state increases, but also the benefit that the probability of becoming an AT continuation winning becomes high increases. As a result, the advantage of setting a large number of times as the number of remaining executions is enhanced.

  The number of times the winning effect is performed is notified by the winning number notification unit 69. As a result, it is possible to suitably enhance the expectation that the number of executions of the winning effect will be the predetermined number of executions.

  Since the stock notification unit 68 notifies the stock execution unit 68 of the remaining execution count of the normal AT state, it is possible for the player to recognize how long the normal AT state is continuous at least through the stock notification unit 68. It is possible to enhance the sense of superiority. In addition, it is possible for the player to recognize the degree of expectation that the number of executions of the winning effect becomes the predetermined number of executions in relation to the number of remaining executions grasped by the stock notification unit 68. As a result, it becomes possible to closely associate the continuous AT state consecutive villas related to the remaining execution frequency and the probability that AT continuous winning will be made in the AT continuous lottery process, and the effect of setting the two consecutive villa modes Can be synergistic.

  When the remaining execution number of the normal AT state is one or more, the digestion of the remaining execution number is prioritized, and the AT continuation lottery process is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the normal AT state from being continued more than necessary, as compared with the configuration in which the remaining execution frequency is digested when the AT continuation lottery process is continuously out.

  When the normal AT state is continuous, the probability of becoming AT continuous winning in the AT continuous lottery process may be high. As a result, when the normal AT state is continuous, the continuous state is more likely to occur, and the advantage of the normal AT state being continuous is enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of excitement when the normal AT state is continuous, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  When the AT continuation win is achieved in the AT continuation lottery process, the promotion lottery process of the AT continuation probability is executed, and the promotion win is achieved, which increases the probability of becoming an AT continuation win. As a result, the player's attention to the point as to whether or not the AT continuation winning will be made in the AT continuation lottery process is enhanced. Further, by executing the promotion lottery process of the AT continuation probability in this manner, it becomes possible to set the probability of becoming a promotion winning in the promotion lottery process independently of the probability of becoming an AT continuation win. This increases the freedom of probability setting.

  In the branch AT state, a battle effect corresponding to whether or not continuous AT in normal state is generated is executed, so it is possible to provide the player with a notification as to whether or not the normal AT state is continuous or not. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, when a winning effect is executed as a battle effect, there is a high possibility that the probability of becoming an AT continuous winning in the AT continuous lottery process is high. As a result, the player can play the game while expecting the winning effect to occur, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the AT continuation lottery process, the winning effect or the draw effect is executed as a battle effect by becoming the AT continuing winning, and when the winning effect is executed as the battle effect, a promotion lottery process of the AT continuity probability is executed, and the promotion The probability of becoming an AT continuation winning becomes high by becoming a promotion winning in the lottery process. In this case, when a winning effect or a draw effect is executed as a battle effect, the player usually plays a game while expecting the winning effect or the draw effect to be executed since the continuous AT state is determined. It becomes. In addition, since there is a possibility that the probability of winning the AT continuation win is high when the win effect is executed among the win effect and the draw effect, the player further expects the win effect to be executed. I will play a game. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be multi-tiered, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  When the normal AT state is continuous because the remaining execution number of the normal AT state is 1 or more, the elevation lottery process of the AT continuation probability is not executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the probability of becoming a promotion winning being set to be high in the promotion lottery processing being increased more than necessary.

  Even if the AT continuation lottery process is out of AT continuation, the normal AT state continues when the bonus points become equal to or more than the bonus reference value in the situation where the defeat effect is executed in the subsequent branch AT state . As a result, even if the bonus points can not become equal to or greater than the bonus reference value before the end of the pre-branch AT state, the regular AT state is more likely to occur when the bonus points have larger values. , The degree of attention to the fact that bonus points are acquired is enhanced.

  In the configuration in which the normal AT state is continuous due to the establishment of another continuation condition even if the AT continuation lottery process results in the AT continuation lottery process, the AT continuation lottery process is executed again after the series. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing at which the continuous AT in the normal state ends, and it is possible to preferably maintain the expectation of the player in the normal AT state.

  If the AT continuation lottery process is executed by executing the AT continuation lottery process because another continuation condition is satisfied when the AT continuation is lost in the AT continuation lottery process, the AT continuation lottery process on the rear side There is a high probability that will be AT continuous winning. This makes it possible to increase the probability that the normal AT state will be continuous even if an event that causes the AT continuation is lost in the AT continuation lottery process, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The probability that the AT continuation win will be won in the AT continuation lottery process is increased by the continual win in the AT continuation lottery process, and the number of times of execution of the victory effect is predetermined even if it is not continued win in the AT continuation lottery process. It becomes high by becoming the number of times of execution (12 times). As a result, there is a high probability that the AT continuation winning will be achieved in both cases where the AT continuation winning is achieved in the AT continuation lottery processing and the normal AT state is continuous and the normal AT state continues as the AT continuing out. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of opportunities for the AT condition to be continuous and to improve the interest of the game.

  Even if the bonus points are not the bonus standard value or more and the AT continuation lottery processing is further out of the AT continuation, the normal AT state is continuous by being revived and won in the return lottery processing in the final chance state. This makes it possible to diversify the mode in the case where the normal AT state is continuous, and to provide many opportunities for the normal AT state to be continuous. In this case, the probability of becoming a resurrection winning in the resurrection lottery process differs depending on the benefit points. As a result, even if the bonus points are less than the bonus standard value, the probability that the bonus points will be revived and won in the return lottery process is affected, and it is possible to increase the attention to the bonus points. In particular, the larger the bonus points are, the higher the probability that the resurrection winning will be performed. Therefore, even if the bonus points can not be equal to or greater than the bonus standard value, it is possible to increase attention to bonus point acquisition.

  If the normal AT state is continuous due to AT continuous winning in the AT continuous lottery process, and if the normal AT state is continuous because the bonus points become equal to or greater than the benefit reference value, While the remaining benefit points are taken over to the normal AT state of the consecutive destination, when the resurrection winning selection is made in the resurrection lottery process, the benefit point counter is cleared to “0”. This makes it possible to limit the benefits of acquiring bonus points to some extent. Also, depending on the type of event that triggered the continuous AT state, there will be cases where benefit points are taken over and cases where they will not be taken over, and the takeover aspect of the benefit points will be diversified. . Therefore, the progressing mode of the game is diversified in relation to the reward points, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The probability of being revived and won in the resurrection lottery process fluctuates according to the winning combination in the corresponding game as well as the reward points. As a result, the points to be noted in performing the revival lottery process are diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the final chance state, if the player is elected as an extension trigger, the final chance state is extended. This makes it possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage of the player when the player is not won in the resurrection lottery process despite the winning of the extension trigger role.

  A transition to the normal AT state may occur based on the winning of the normal replay role in the transition chance state. As a result, it is possible to play the game while expecting to be normally elected as the replay player in the transition chance state, and the interest of the game can be improved. In this case, when the player is elected to the expectation improvement player in the transition opportunity state, the expectation for occurrence of the transition to the normal AT state in the transition opportunity state is high. As a result, in the transition chance state, it is expected to win not only the replay role but also the expectation improvement role, and diversification of roles expected to be won can be achieved. Thus, the interest of the game can be improved.

  If the player is elected to improve the expectation, the transition chance status is extended. As a result, when the player is elected as the expectation improvement role, the expectation for occurrence of transition to the normal AT state in the transition opportunity state is high. Further, the probability of improving the winning probability in the transition lottery process is increased by being elected as the expectation improvement role and becoming the transition probability UP in the transition probability UP lottery process. As a result, when the player is elected as the expectation improvement role, the expectation for occurrence of transition to the normal AT state in the transition opportunity state is high.

  Usually, the probability of winning the replay role is higher than the probability of winning the expectation improvement role. This makes it possible to increase the frequency with which the player is elected as the normal replay player in the transition chance state, and to provide many opportunities for expecting the transition to the normal AT state. In addition, it is general that a situation advantageous to the player can occur when the player wins a winning probability with a low winning probability, but when winning an expectation improvement role winning probability is lower than that of the normal replay role. Usually, since the degree of expectation for transition to the AT state is high, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when winning the expectation degree improvement role.

  The normal replay role is a transition opportunity role to the normal AT state in the transition chance state, but does not become the transition opportunity role to the normal AT state in other gaming states. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the regular replay player being won in the transition chance state. Further, the expectation improvement role does not become a transition opportunity to the normal AT state in the transition chance state, but becomes a transition opportunity to the normal AT state in the other gaming states. As a result, it is possible to give the player a recognition that the expectation improvement role is an advantageous role, and it is possible to increase the attention to winning the expectation improvement role.

  If the player wins the first to third special replay roles, or if the lottery process results in an out result, the start wait time is set at the end of the game, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate in the next game. I will wait. When the start wait time is set, the bonus AT state is started. In this case, it is possible to emphasize that the bonus AT state is started through the setting of the start wait time. As a result, the player feels surprising that the start wait time has been set, and the sense of excitement for the start of the bonus AT state is enhanced. On the other hand, in the bonus AT state, since the player's awareness turns to the end of the game, if the start wait time is set on the way, there is a possibility that the player may think that it is annoying. On the other hand, in such a situation, since the start wait time is not set, it is possible to prevent such a problem from occurring.

  In addition, even if the second special replay role or the third special replay role is won, if it corresponds to the occurrence of the penalty event, it does not shift to the bonus AT state. In such a situation, if the start wait time is set, the player may feel uncomfortable, but in such a situation, the start wait time is not set, so that such a problem should not occur. Is possible.

  When the first special replay role is won, or when the lottery process results in an out result, the freeze time is set at the start of the game. When these lottery results are obtained, the start of the bonus AT state or the increase of the remaining number of times of setting of the bonus AT state surely occurs. This makes it possible for the player to feel surprise by setting the freeze time and to be able to enhance the mood, and to perform the stop operation of the game while recognizing that it is the above lottery result. It becomes. In addition, since the function of such freeze time may occur regardless of whether or not the bonus AT state is in progress, the function may be suitably generated by setting the freeze time even in the bonus AT state. It becomes possible.

  The main MPU 72 selects the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, 32R should be stopped when the normal replay role is won regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The side MPU 82 executes control for notifying the selected stop order when the normal AT state is linked. Then, on the basis of the fact that the selected stopping order and the actual stopping order coincide, the main MPU 72 performs output setting corresponding to the normal AT state continuous output with respect to the external output of the AT1 signal. As a result, even if the sub MPU 82 is independently configured to manage the progress of the normal AT state, it does not require transmission of information from the sub MPU 82 to the main MPU 72, and supports the normal AT state. The external output setting can be performed by the main MPU 72.

  The main MPU 72 always executes a pushing order lottery process for selecting the stopping order when the player is elected as a normal replay player. As a result, there is no need to switch between the state in which the push order lottery process is performed and the state in which the push order lottery process is not performed, so that the processing configuration can be simplified.

  The normal replay role is the role with the highest probability of winning in the normal AT state. Then, by using the normal replay role in order to grasp the continuous AT in the normal AT state, when the continuous AT in the normal AT state occurs, it becomes possible for the main MPU 72 to grasp this at an early stage. .

  The main MPU 72 copes with the normal AT state continuous output of the external output of the AT1 signal when an event occurs in which the stop order selected when the normal replay player is elected matches the actual stop order occurs a plurality of times. Set the output you have set. This reduces the possibility that the output setting will be performed if the coincident event happens by chance. In particular, the main MPU 72 sets the above output setting when there is a plurality of occurrences of the same event without occurrence of an event in which the stop order selected and the actual stop order do not match when the normal replay role is won. Since it does, the possibility that the output setting will be performed when the coincident event happens by chance is greatly reduced.

  The normal replay role is a role in which winning occurs regardless of the stop sequence of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 in relation to the rotational position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. . As a result, the profit of the player does not change depending on whether or not the notification of the stop order has been made, so that the restriction on notifying the stop order is unlikely to occur.

  The stop order selected when the normal replay role is won does not include the stop order for stopping the left reel 32L first. In the situation where the notification of the stop order is not performed, the player generally stops the left reel 32L first, and thus the normal replay role is won by selecting the stop order as described above. It is possible to reduce the possibility that an event in which the selected stopping order and the actual stopping order coincide may occur by accident.

  The sub MPU 82 can notify the stopping order different from the stopping order selected by the main MPU 72 when the normal replay role is won in a situation where the continuous AT state is not occurring. As a result, it becomes possible to positively prevent accidental occurrence of an event in which the stop order selected when the normal replay player wins a prize and the actual stop order coincide with each other, and the main side MPU 72 It is possible to improve the accuracy.

  When an event occurs in which the stop order selected and the actual stop order coincide with each other when the normal replay role is won occurs multiple times, the main MPU 72 causes the external output of the AT1 signal to be connected to the normal AT state. In the configuration in which the corresponding output setting is performed, when the coincident event occurs once, the sub MPU 82 notifies the stop order different from the selected stop order. This makes it possible to suppress the frequency at which notification of the stop order is performed.

  In each of the bonus AT state and the normal AT state, the execution control of the push order notification for generating the bell winning is performed by the sub MPU 82, whereby the processing load of the main MPU 72 can be reduced. In this case, the determination of the termination trigger of the bonus AT state and the normal AT state is not performed by the sub MPU 82, but the determination of the termination trigger of the bonus AT state is performed by the main MPU 72. As a result, in the bonus AT state among the bonus AT state and the normal AT state, the main MPU 72 can set the end wait time for enhancing the rendering effect, thereby reducing the processing load of the main MPU 72. However, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  For the bonus AT state, only transition occurs triggered by the lottery process result of the part, whereas for the normal AT state, not only transition triggered by the lottery process result of the part in the transition chance state A transition also occurs triggered by digestion. Thus, with respect to the bonus AT state in which the main MPU 72 performs transition control, while limiting the transition pattern to reduce the processing load of the main MPU 72, plural types of transition patterns of the normal AT state are set. This makes it possible to diversify the game.

  In the normal AT state, more patterns of establishment of the continuation condition are set than in the bonus AT state. Thus, with respect to the bonus AT state in which the main MPU 72 performs continuation control, the processing load of the main MPU 72 is reduced by restricting the establishment pattern of the continuation condition, while the establishment pattern of the continuation condition of the normal AT state is It is possible to diversify the game by setting a plurality of types.

  When the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the winning combination when winning the first bell combination or the second bell combination, the bell winning combination occurs in the configuration in which the bell prize is generated. The AT1 signal is set to the ON state based on the main MPU 72 specifying that the bell winning has occurred when the two-bell combination is won. As a result, even if the sub MPU 82 is independently configured to manage the progress of the normal AT state, output setting of the AT 1 signal to the ON state can be performed without requiring transmission of information from the sub MPU 82 to the main MPU 72. It is possible to do

  The main MPU 72 sets the output of the AT1 signal to the ON state when the bell winning occurs a plurality of times. As a result, the possibility that the output setting to the ON state is performed is reduced if the bell winning occurs by chance. In particular, since the main MPU 72 performs the above-mentioned output setting when the bell winning occurs a plurality of times without the occurrence of the event that the bell winning does not occur despite the winning of the first bell role or the second bell role. The possibility that the output setting will be performed when the bell winning happens by chance is greatly reduced.

  The stop order that enables the bell winning when the first bell role or the second bell role is won does not include the stop order for stopping the left reel 32L first. In the situation where the notification of the stop order is not performed, the player generally stops the left reel 32L first, and thus the possibility of the occurrence of the bell winning by chance may be generated by selecting the stop order as described above. It becomes possible to reduce.

  When the bell winning combination does not occur despite winning the first or second bell combination, the main MPU 72 sets the AT1 signal to the OFF state. Thus, the main MPU 72 may monitor whether or not a bell winning has occurred in any case of setting the AT1 signal in the ON state and in the case of setting the AT1 signal in the OFF state. As a result, the types of events to be monitored can be suppressed and the processing load can be reduced.

  The number of occurrences of the bell winning as a trigger for setting the AT1 signal to the ON state is larger than the number of occurrences of pushouts when the bell combination is won as the timing for setting the AT1 signal to the OFF state. Thus, the setting of the AT1 signal to the ON state can be performed accurately while enabling the setting of the AT1 signal to the OFF state to be performed early when the normal AT state ends.

  The winning combinations to be monitored when setting the AT 1 signal to the ON state and the setting to the OFF state are of two types, the first bell role and the second bell role. As a result, it is possible to generate many triggers for setting each output while increasing the degree of freedom in setting the winning probability of each combination.

  The transition to the normal AT state occurs when the winning state of the CB role is maintained. This makes it possible to limit the period in which the transition to the normal AT state is possible in relation to the winning combination, and the player pays attention to the winning of the CB combination and the maintenance of the winning combination of the CB combination. It becomes. Thus, novel game contents can be provided.

  In the CB state, the medals (or virtual medals) possessed by the player do not increase. In this case, when the winning combination of the CB is achieved, the transition to the non-favorable CB middle state occurs when the winning is generated, while the transition to the normal AT state can occur by not causing the winning. There is sex. As a result, it is possible to make the player's profit largely different depending on whether or not to generate the CB prize, and it is possible to increase the attention to the game in the winning state of the CB combination.

  In the CB state, although the medals (or virtual medals) possessed by the player do not increase, they do not decrease either. This makes it possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage of the player who unintentionally caused the CB winning.

  An internal state notification unit 63, which is turned on when the role of CB is won, is provided. This makes it possible to urge the player not to generate a winning when the winning combination of CB is achieved.

  In the configuration in which the AT1 signal is set to ON in the main MPU 72 and the AT2 signal is set to ON in the main MPU 72 in the bonus AT state in the normal AT state, the CB role is achieved. The internal state notification unit 63 is turned on before the ON state of the AT1 signal and the ON state of the AT2 signal are set. As a result, it is possible to notify the player before notifying the outside of the slot machine 10 that the CB combination has been won.

  When the role of CB is won, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned on before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the CB role has been won before the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is started in the game, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the CB prize.

  When the transition condition to the bonus AT state is satisfied or when the CB winning is generated in the bonus AT state, the game content in the CB state is prioritized, and the game executed in the CB state continues the bonus AT state Treated as a digest of the game count. As a result, the player plays a game such that the CB winning is not generated when the condition for transition to the bonus AT state is established or in the bonus AT state. Therefore, the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is performed carefully, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, as compared with the configuration in which the bonus AT state is simply invalidated, the bonus AT state and the CB in-state can be associated with each other, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Even when the CB in-progress state ends, the bonus AT state is not immediately returned, but the winning combination state of the CB combination is returned to return to the bonus AT state. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not the player is to win the role of CB after the end of the CB state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the amount of the game required until the winning combination of the CB role is treated is treated as a share of the number of continued games in the bonus AT state. As a result, after the end of the CB state, it is possible to play the game while expecting to win the role of the CB by the completion of the game for the number of continued games in the bonus AT state, thereby improving the interest of the game .

Second Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the setting mode of the AT1 signal when transitioning to the bonus AT state is performed in a state where the AT1 signal is in the ON state is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing a setting process of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal executed by the main MPU 72. The setting process is executed instead of the external output setting process (step S216) at the end of the normal process (FIG. 11).

  First, in step S3801, it is determined whether the condition for transition to the bonus AT state is satisfied. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3801, it is determined in step S3802 whether the output state of the AT1 signal is in the ON state. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3802, in step S3803, the halfway shift flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The midway transition flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that transition to the bonus AT state is made in a state where the AT1 signal is in the ON state. Thereafter, in step S3804, the output state of the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state. If a negative determination is made in step S3802, or if the process of step S3804 is executed, the output state of the AT2 signal is set to the ON state in step S3805.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3801, it is determined in step S3806 whether or not the bonus AT state has ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3806, the output state of the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state in step S3807. In the following step S3808, it is determined whether "1" is set in the midway transition flag of the main RAM 74 or not. If "1" is set, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state in step S3809.

  If the process of step S3805 is executed, if the negative determination is made in step S3806, if the negative determination is made in step S3808, or if the process of step S3809 is performed, other processes are performed in step S3810. Run. In the other processes, the processes of steps S3101 to S3114 and steps S3401 to S3404 in the first embodiment are performed. Thereafter, this setting process is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when transitioning to the bonus AT state when the AT1 signal is in the ON state, the AT1 signal set to the OFF state at the time of transition to the bonus AT state ends the bonus AT state. It will be set to ON again. When transitioning to the bonus AT state in the middle of the normal AT state, the remaining continuation game of the normal AT state at that time is held, and when the bonus AT state ends, the normal AT state is resumed from the remaining continuation game state. Ru. In this case, when the configuration in which the AT1 signal is set to the ON state is applied on the condition that the bell winning occurs a plurality of times as in the case of transitioning from the non-AT state to the normal AT state, the bell winning occurs plural times. There is a possibility that the normal AT state may end without the AT1 signal being set to the ON state. On the other hand, under the situation where the bonus AT state ends and returns to the normal AT state as described above, when the bonus AT state ends, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state to return the normal AT after the return. It is possible to set the AT1 signal to the ON state before the state ends.

Third Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the aspect of the final chance state is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing setting processing of the final chance state executed by the sub MPU 82. The setting process is executed when shifting to the final chance state.

  First, in step S3901, the value of the reward point counter is grasped. In the following step S3902, the value of the benefit point counter thus determined is set in the continuation game counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84. The continuation game counter is a counter for specifying in the sub MPU 82 the number of remaining continuation games in the final chance state.

  After that, in step S3903, the revival lottery table corresponding to the value of the benefit point counter grasped in step S3901 is read out from the sub ROM 83. The revival lottery table is set such that the larger the value of the benefit point counter, the higher the probability that the revival lottery processing will be a revival winning. Thereafter, the setting process of the final chance state is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, not only the probability of becoming a resurrection winning in the resurrection lottery process becomes high according to the value of the bonus point counter, but the number of continued games corresponding to the value of the bonus point counter is set. As a result, the importance of the value of the benefit point counter is increased, and the expectation for winning the bonus lottery trigger role during the normal AT state is enhanced.

  The value of the benefit point counter may be set as it is in the continuation game counter, and the number of continued games corresponding to the value of the benefit point counter may be set in the continuation game counter. For example, a plurality of stages may be set according to the range of the value of the bonus point counter, and the number of continuing games corresponding to the stages may be set in the continuing game counter. Further, the number of continued games corresponding to twice the value of the bonus point counter, the number of continued games corresponding to the value multiplied by the benefit point counter, or the number of continued games corresponding to a predetermined integral multiple of four or more It is also good.

Fourth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing content when the normal AT state ends is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the termination processing of the normal AT state executed by the sub MPU 82. The end process is executed when the final chance state is ended without becoming a revival winning.

  First, in step S4001, a holding lottery process of benefit points is executed. In the holding lottery process, the holding lottery table is read from the sub side ROM 83, and the sub side RAM 84 further reads the value of the sub side lottery counter periodically (eg, 2 msec), and the value of the sub side lottery counter Check against the holding lottery table. The holding lottery table is set, for example, to hold and win with a probability of 1/2.

  In the following step S4002, it is determined whether or not the result of the holding lottery process in step S4001 is the holding win. If it is not the holding winning, the termination process of the normal AT state is ended after clearing the benefit point counter to "0" in step S4003, and if it is the holding winning, the value of the benefit point counter is maintained as it is. The termination process of the normal AT state is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the normal AT state ends in a situation where the remaining setting number is “0”, the value of the benefit point counter may be taken over to the next normal AT state. As a result, when the normal AT state ends with the value of the bonus point counter remaining to some extent, the next normal AT state has a high expectation of the continuous play. In this case, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to continue the game.

  Note that the probability of being held and held in the holding lottery process may be varied according to the value of the benefit point counter. For example, as the value of the reward point counter is larger, the probability of holding and winning may be higher.

Other Embodiments
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different embodiments may be applied individually to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

  (1) In the bonus point lottery process (step S2002, step S2502), when bonus points are won, a value smaller than the bonus standard value is selected, but a value greater than the bonus standard value may be selected It may be In this case, it is possible to specify that the sub MPU 82 is configured to shift to the added state or that the shift condition to the added state is satisfied at the timing when the value equal to or higher than the benefit reference value is selected in the bonus point lottery process. By setting data to be set, both the bonus points for winning in the bonus point lottery process and the bonus points for winning in the additional lottery process (step S2808) are added to the bonus point counter. With this configuration, it is possible to accurately determine the transition condition to the additional state.

  (2) The sub-side RAM 84 is provided with the remaining set number counter of the normal AT state, and the value of the remaining set number counter is incremented by 1 at the timing when the value of the benefit point counter becomes equal to or greater than the benefit reference value. It is good also as composition which subtracts a privilege standard value. In addition, when it becomes winning winning in the additional lottery process (step S2808), as the configuration to add the remaining set number of times added to the remaining setting number counter without performing the addition of the bonus points to the bonus point counter It is also good. In this case, the sub MPU 82 can grasp the remaining number of times of setting separately from the benefit points. For example, when the emission control of the benefit point notification unit 67 is performed, the benefit point counter is referenced and the light emission of the stock notification unit 68 is performed. In the case of performing control, it is possible to adopt a processing configuration of referring to the remaining set number counter.

  (3) The benefit reference value is not limited to "7" and is optional. However, the minimum points selected in the bonus point lottery process so that an event which is equal to or greater than the bonus reference value occurs when an event of bonus point winning occurs multiple times in the bonus point lottery process (step S2002, step S2502) It is preferable to set the value to twice or more of the bonus points of

  (4) Reward point lottery process (step S2002, step S2502) is executed instead of the configuration to be executed when it is elected to the bonus lottery trigger role, bonus point lottery process when winning is generated by winning the bonus lottery trigger role (Step S2002, step S2502) may be executed. In this case, a prize is not generated according to the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R or the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R as the bonus lottery trigger. May be included or may not be included.

  (5) The reward point counter may be configured to have a data capacity larger than 1 byte. Even in this case, in the configuration in which each counter is handled in byte units, the necessary storage capacity can be reduced by commonly using the reward point counter. For example, in the case where the benefit point and the remaining set number of normal AT are managed by different counters, 3 bytes are required when the benefit point counter has 2 bytes and the remaining set number counter has 1 byte. However, it becomes possible to reduce by 1 byte by making it common as a reward point counter of 2 byte configuration.

  (6) The bonus point lottery process is executed when the bonus lottery trigger role is won instead of the configuration in which the bonus point lottery process (step S2002, step S2502) is executed when the bonus lottery trigger role is won. Alternatively, the bonus points corresponding to the bonus lottery trigger that has been won may be added to the bonus point counter. In this case, the processing load is reduced because the bonus point lottery process is not executed, and the relationship between the bonus lottery trigger role and the bonus points becomes clear, and the degree of attention to the stop results of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in each game Is enhanced.

  (7) A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to add bonus points if the bonus lottery trigger is won, and if the win is made in the lottery, the bonus points corresponding to the bonus lottery trigger are bonus points It may be configured to be added to the counter. In this case, the relationship between the bonus lottery trigger role and the bonus points becomes clear, and the degree of attention to the stopping result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in each game is enhanced.

  (8) Instead of a configuration in which the value of the benefit point counter commonly used is divided and set for the benefit point notification unit 67 and the stock notification unit 68, the value of the benefit point counter is not changed by the predetermined notification unit. It may be configured to be notified. In this case, by making it possible for the player to recognize the bonus points corresponding to the occurrence of one remaining setting number, it becomes possible to recognize the remaining setting number from the value of the bonus point counter, and the remaining set. It is possible to recognize the reward points necessary for the number of times to be newly added once.

  (9) When the normal AT state is continuous without passing through the final chance state, even if the value of the reward point counter is less than the privilege reference value, the configuration is such that the normal AT state of the continuous destination is surely taken over It may be configured to be handed over when the hand-over condition is satisfied. For example, it may be configured to be taken over even if the value of the benefit point counter is less than the benefit reference value in the case where the takeover win is made in the takeover lottery process executed in the normal AT state. Alternatively, for example, when the value of the benefit point counter is equal to or greater than the handover reference value, the value may be taken over even if the value is less than the benefit reference value.

  (10) Even if reversion to the normal AT state occurs in the final chance state, benefit points less than the benefit reference value may be taken over to the normal AT state of the consecutive destination. In this case, it is possible to further increase the chances that the bonus points become equal to or higher than the bonus standard value.

  (11) The value of the benefit point counter when the normal AT state ends may be always taken over to the normal AT state where the transition condition is newly established and the transition is made. In this case, it is possible to further increase the chances that the bonus points become equal to or higher than the bonus standard value.

  (12) The AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) causes the AT to go out and the value of the benefit point counter becomes equal to or more than the benefit reference value during the period when the defeat effect is being executed as a battle effect. In the final chance state, or when consecutive ATs are generated, a promotion lottery process at the time of resurrection is executed with respect to the probability that the AT continuation win will be made in the AT continuation lottery process. In the case where the promotion lottery is won in the promotion lottery process, the probability that the AT continuation winning will be made may be increased. In this case, it is also configured that the probability of being promoted is higher than the probability of becoming promoted winning in the elevation lottery process of the AT continuation probability (step S2316) that occurs when the AT continuation winning is made and the winning effect is executed. Good. Also, the configuration may be such that the probability that the AT continuous winning will be made is likely to be higher if the resurrection winning in the final chance state. In these cases, when the establishment of the continuous AT condition is established under the condition set as the rear order, the normal AT condition is more likely to occur, so the player's sense of expectation is felt. Can usually be maintained high until the end of the AT state.

  (13) A process of setting the AT continuation probability to the highest probability in relation to the victory counter so that the normal AT state becomes easier to be connected when the normal AT state is continuous (step S2308) In addition to or instead of the configuration for executing the promotion lottery process (step S2316), a configuration that facilitates acquisition of benefit points, a configuration where the value of acquired benefit points is increased, a configuration that facilitates acquisition of large benefit points, and By adopting at least one of the configuration in which the probability that the number of times of setting is added is high and the configuration in which the large number of remaining times of setting is easily selected, the normal AT state is continuous in relation to the benefit points. It may be configured to be easy.

  (14) If the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) is out of AT continuation, but the normal AT state is continuous, the probability of AT continuation winning in the AT continuation lottery process executed thereafter is low. It may be configured to be smaller or smaller. In this case, it is possible to suppress the probability that the normal AT state is continuous while securing the opportunity that the normal AT state is continuous.

  (15) The probability of winning the AT continuation winning in the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) is not limited to six types and is arbitrary, and may be 2, 3, 4, or 5 types. It may be seven or more types. However, in order to cause an opportunity to be set to the highest probability regardless of the probability that the AT continuous winning will be made, it is preferable that there are three or more types of the probability that the AT continuous winning will be made.

  (16) The AT continuation probability promotion lottery process is performed instead of the configuration in which the probability that the AT continuation election is won in the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) becomes the highest probability when the number of executions of the victory effect becomes a predetermined execution frequency. The number of stages in which the probability is higher may be greater than that in the case where the player is promoted to be promoted in (step S2316). For example, in a configuration in which the probability of becoming AT continuous winning becomes one step higher when the winning is promoted in the elevation lottery process of AT continuation probability (step S2316), the number of times of execution of the victory effect becomes a predetermined number of executions There is a conceivable configuration in which the probability of winning the AT continuation is increased by two or more stages.

  (17) The number of executions of the victory effect necessary for setting the probability that the AT continuous winning will be high is not limited to 12 times, and may be 1 time or 2 times. It may be three times, four times, 13 times or more. However, in order to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the winning effect, it is preferable that the number is two or more.

  (18) Instead of the configuration in which the number of executions of the victory effect is not inherited to the normal AT state transitioned with the next transition condition being established, the configuration may be configured to be surely inherited or be able to be inherited. As a configuration that can be taken over, a takeover lottery process in which a takeover is won may be executed with a predetermined probability, and a configuration in which the value of the benefit point counter is less than the benefit reference value but taken over is more than the takeover reference value. It may be

  (19) In order to execute the promotion lottery process (step S2316) of the AT continuation probability, the AT continuation prize is won in the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309), and the victory effect is further issued in the battle lottery process (step S2311). It is necessary to be selected, but instead, it may be configured that the promotion lottery process (step S2316) is surely executed when the AT continuation prize is won, and whether or not the AT continuation prize is won If the winning effect is executed regardless of the relationship, the promotion lottery process (step S2316) may be executed with certainty. Further, when the normal AT state is continuous, the promotion lottery process (step S2316) may be executed surely.

  (20) The victory effect in the battle effect may be a victory which can be selected only when the value of the benefit point counter is equal to or more than the benefit reference value, and the AT continuation winning in the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) The configuration may be selected only when the In this case, it is necessary to generate many target conditions among the above conditions in order to set the probability of winning the AT continuation winning highly in relation to the number of executions of the winning effect, and the probability of winning the AT continuation winning Can be set high.

  (21) The probability that the winning effect is selected in the battle lottery process (steps S2303, S2311, and S2605) may be varied. For example, the probability that the winning effect is selected may increase or decrease as the number of times of executing the winning effect increases. In this case, depending on the number of times the winning effect is executed, the winning effect may be more easily selected, or the winning effect may be less likely to be selected. In addition, the probability that the winning effect is selected may increase or decrease as the value of the benefit point counter increases. In this case, it is possible to closely associate the reward points with the victory effects. In addition, the probability that the winning effect is selected may increase or decrease as the remaining number of times of the normal AT state setting increases. In this case, it is possible to closely associate the remaining set number with the win effect.

  (22) The AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) when the number of times the normal AT state has been linked has reached a predetermined number of executions (for example, 20 times) because the remaining set number of the normal AT state is 1 or more. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of winning the AT continuation is high (for example, the highest probability). In this case, the remaining set number of times in the normal AT state and the probability of becoming AT continuous winning in the AT continuation lottery process are more closely related.

  (23) The probability that the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) will be won according to the number of times the winning effect is executed, or the number of times the normal AT state is consecutive due to the remaining set number being one or more. May be increased stepwise. For example, when the number of times reaches the first reference number of times (for example, three times), the probability of winning the AT continuation win increases by one step, and when the number of times reaches the second reference number of times (for example, five times) The probability of being set in relation to the reference number may be different so that the probability of winning will be further increased by two steps.

  (24) Although the stock notification unit 68 is configured to perform notification according to the range of the number of remaining setting times of the normal AT state, instead of this, a notification having a one-to-one correspondence with the remaining setting number of the normal AT state Alternatively, the remaining set number may be notified as it is.

  (25) Even if the number of remaining sets is 1 or more, or even if the AT continuation lottery is won in the AT continuation lottery process, if one execution cycle of the normal AT state ends, the non-AT state is temporarily set. After transition, a new execution cycle of the normal AT state may be generated again.

  (26) The bonus points may not be referred to when the resurrection lottery process is executed in the final chance state. In this case, in the resurrection lottery process, the lottery corresponding to the lottery process result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) of the game is performed. In the above configuration, when the player wins in the final chance state, as in the above embodiment, the bonus points may not be taken over to the normal AT state of the consecutive destination, or may be taken over.

  (27) In addition to or in place of the configuration in which bonus points less than the bonus standard value are referred to in the final chance lottery state lottery process (step S2907), AT continuous lottery process (step S2309) is less than the bonus standard value The bonus points may be referred to, and the larger the bonus points, the higher the probability that the AT will be continuously won. In this case, the benefit point counter may be cleared to “0” when the AT is continuously won in the AT continuation lottery process, and the “0” is cleared and the normal AT state of the consecutive destination is taken over. It is good also as composition.

  (28) The final chance state is replaced with a configuration in which the probability of becoming a resurrection winning in the resurrection lottery processing (step S2907) fluctuates according to the result of the lottery processing (FIG. 12) of the game. It is good also as composition which the probability of becoming fluctuates. In this case, winning is performed according to the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R or the rotational position of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R as a role to change the probability of winning the revival winning. It may be a configuration that includes a role that does not occur, or a configuration that is not included.

  (29) The final chance state is configured to continue over a plurality of games (for example, 10 games), and in the final chance state, the number of times or the number of winnings of a predetermined role such as a first watermelon role or a second watermelon role. Accordingly, the probability of becoming a resurrection winning in the resurrection lottery process (step S2907) may be varied. For example, when the predetermined winning combination is won once or twice, the first winning probability is set, and when the winning combination is elected three to four times, the second winning probability is set higher than the first winning probability. Is considered. In this case, the player pays attention to the number of times of winning the predetermined combination in the final chance state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (30) The final chance state continues over a plurality of games (for example, 10 games), and points are added according to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) in the final chance state or the winning result. The normal AT state may be continued according to the accumulated points. In this case, the bonus points may be added even in the final chance state, and the normal AT state may be continued when the bonus points become equal to or greater than the bonus reference value in the final chance state.

  (31) The final chance state continues over a plurality of games (for example, 10 games), and the normal AT state continues according to the number of winnings of the predetermined combination or the number of winnings of the predetermined combination in the final chance state. It may be configured to In this case, as the number of executions of the monitoring event among the number of winnings of the predetermined combination and the number of winnings of the predetermined combination increases, the probability that the normal AT state will be continuous may be high. In the case of the number of times or the maximum number of times, the normal AT state may be connected. Note that, as the predetermined role, in order to allow the player to clearly recognize whether or not a monitoring event has occurred, it is preferable that so-called dropouts do not occur, and, for example, a normal replay role may be mentioned. .

  (32) In the transition chance state, the transition lottery process (step S1609) is executed when the normal replay role is won, but the transition lottery process (step S1609) is executed when the other role is elected. The configuration may be For example, depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the transition lottery process (step S1609) may be executed when the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won, which is a combination that does not generate a prize. Depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the transition lottery process is performed when the first watermelon combination or the second watermelon combination is won, which is a combination that does not occur. ) May be implemented. Further, even if any combination is won, the transition lottery process (step S1609) may be executed. In this case, the transition winning probability may vary depending on the combination. Good.

  (33) In the transition chance state, the transition lottery processing (step S1609) is executed when the normal replay winning occurs, instead of the configuration in which the transition lottery processing (step S1609) is executed when the normal replay player is won. The configuration may be

  (34) In the transition chance state, the transition probability UP lottery process (step S1603) is executed when the expectation degree improvement role is won, and the transition probability UP is won, whereby the transition lottery process (step S1609) is transitioned. Although the probability is high, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of becoming a transition winning is set to be high in the transition lottery process (step S1609) when the player is elected to improve the degree of expectation. It may be configured to be generated reliably.

  (35) In the transition chance state, when the player is elected as the expectation improvement role, the number of continued games in the transition chance state is surely extended, but instead, when the expectation improvement role is elected, The configuration may be such that the number of continued games is extended when winning is made in the executed lottery process. Further, the number of continuing games may be set to a plurality of types, and the number of continuing games to be extended may be selected from them.

  (36) In the case where the player is elected as the expectation improvement player in the transition chance state, the bonus point addition process to the bonus point counter may be executed. In this case, the benefit point may be taken over to the normal AT state on condition that the transition to the normal AT state occurs in the transition opportunity state, and the transition to the normal AT state occurs in the transition chance state. The benefit point may be taken over to the next normal AT state regardless of whether or not it has been made.

  (37) In the above embodiment, the bell prize is generated three times and the AT1 signal is turned on in spite of the occurrence of the penalty event and not being the non-AT state, and the second special replay role or the second When the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time in the game in which the special replay role is won, the start wait time is set in the game. In this case, instead of the image display device 66 displaying an image indicating that the bonus AT state is started in the start wait time, the transition condition to the bonus AT state in the penalty state is satisfied. An image may be displayed on the image display device 66 to make it possible for the player to recognize that the player is to be penalized and no benefit is given. In addition, a warning image for a penalty operation may be displayed.

  (38) In the bonus AT state, in place of the configuration in which the start weight time is not set, when the first to third special replay roles are won in the lottery process (FIG. 12) in the bonus AT state or the result is out The start weight time may be set shorter than the case where the first to third special replay roles are won in the lottery process (FIG. 12) without the situation or the case of the out-of-order result.

  (39) When the first special replay player is won or lost in the lottery process (FIG. 12) in the bonus AT state, not only the start wait time is set but also the freeze time is not set It may be This makes it possible to increase the speed at which the game is consumed during the bonus AT state.

  (40) The bonus AT state is replaced with a configuration in which the number of remaining sets of the bonus AT state is added when the first to third special replay players are won or out in the bonus AT state. The number of continuing games may be extended.

  (41) In the overtaking state, the pressing order selected by the main MPU 72 is not notified when the normal replay is won, but instead, the pressing order may be notified even in the overtaking state. As a result, even when the normal AT state shifts to the additional state in the pre-branch AT state immediately after the continuous state, there is an opportunity to perform the OFF setting and the ON setting of the AT1 signal.

  (42) In the case where the normal AT state is continuous, the main MPU 72 selects the pressing order to perform the OFF setting and the ON setting of the AT1 signal. It may be a role. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of roles, including the normal replay role, are targeted. However, the combination to be selected as the push order selection needs to be a combination different from the combination in which the frequency of occurrence of winnings is improved by notifying the stop order in the normal AT state and the bonus AT state. Further, it is preferable that the combination to be selected as the selection order of the pressing is a combination in which a winning is generated regardless of the pressing order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R when winning, and rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R It is preferable that the winning combination occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the position.

  (43) In the push order lottery process (step S405) in the case where the normal replay role is won, the first stopped reel and the second stopped reel are selected from the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, only the first stopped reel may be selected. Even in this case, the configuration in which the left reel 32L is not selected as the first stop makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the pressing order correct answer will occur by chance.

  (44) The notification of the push order selected by the main MPU 72 when the normal replay role is won is shifted to the normal AT state in addition to or in place of the configuration performed when the normal AT state is continuous. It may be configured to be performed in the case of In this case, the main MPU 72 sets the AT1 signal to the ON state when the normal replay role is won in the situation where the AT1 signal is in the OFF state, thereby setting the AT1 signal according to the occurrence of the bell winning. There is no need to set the signal to the ON state. Also, in the situation where the AT1 signal is in the OFF state, the total number of times when the normal replay role is won when the order is correct and the number of occurrences of the bell winning has become the reference number for the ON state setting. In this case, the AT1 signal may be set to the ON state. In this case, when transitioning to the normal AT state, the timing of setting the AT1 signal to the ON state can be advanced.

  (45) Even if it is not necessary to set the OFF / ON state of the AT1 signal, the main MPU 72 is selected until the value of the pressing order correct counter provided in the sub RAM 84 becomes 1 or more. Instead of the configuration in which the notification of the pressing order different from the pressing order is not performed, the notification of the different pressing order may be always performed in a situation where it is not necessary to set the OFF / ON state of the AT1 signal. In this case, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the setting of the OFF / ON state happens by chance.

  (46) Although the output state of the AT1 signal is changed from the ON state to the OFF state when transitioning to the bonus AT state in the normal AT state, instead of this, the output state of the AT1 signal is in the ON state It may be configured to be maintained. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the hole computer HC of the game hall recognize the number of times of setting of the normal AT state.

  (47) The configuration in which the AT2 signal is temporarily set to the OFF state when one execution cycle of the bonus AT state is completed even if the remaining number of times of setting the bonus AT state is one or more as in the above embodiment. There is a setting difference in the remaining number of sets selected when the condition for transition to the bonus AT state is satisfied and the number of remaining sets selected when the upper condition of the remaining set is satisfied during the bonus AT state. The configuration may be In this case, the player can predict the set value of the slot machine 10 by checking the third display unit DC3 of the data counter DC.

  (48) When the condition for transition to the bonus AT state or the remaining setting number of the bonus AT state is satisfied, one execution of the bonus AT state is ended within the range of the remaining setting number selected at one time ( Even if the 30 games are over), the setting of the AT2 signal to the OFF state may not be performed. In this case, on the third display unit DC3 of the data counter DC, the total number of times of satisfaction of the transition condition to the bonus AT state and the remaining setting number of the bonus AT state is displayed. In the configuration, a setting difference may exist in the transition condition and the additional condition. In this case, the player can predict the set value of the slot machine 10 by checking the third display unit DC3 of the data counter DC.

  (49) The AT1 signal may be set to the OFF state when the number of events for which the bell winning combination does not occur at the time of winning the first bell combination or the second bell combination has occurred as a plurality of OFF side times. . In this case, the number of occurrences of bell winning (number of times on the ON side) required to set the AT1 signal to the ON state may be larger than the number of times on the above-mentioned OFF side. The number of times may be the same, or the number of times on the OFF side may be greater than the number of times on the ON side.

  (50) As the internal state notification unit 63 can display a plurality of light emission colors, various internal states may be notified using the internal state notification unit 63. For example, the bonus AT state generated under the penalty state may be notified separately from the CB internal rear state. In addition, in the case of winning status, as a role that the winning status is maintained until a winning occurs, if there is a role of BB (big bonus) and RB (regular bonus) other than the role of CB. Each of the CB internal rear state, the BB internal rear state, and the RB internal rear state may be notified by the light emission color in the internal state notification unit 63.

  (51) The internal state notification unit 63 may be integrated with the credit display unit 61 instead of the internal condition notification unit 63 integrated with the acquired sheet number display unit 62. Further, the internal state notification unit 63 may be provided separately from the acquired number display unit 62.

  (52) The timing at which the lighting of the internal state notification unit 63 is started when the CB internal rear state is reached is not limited to before the rotation of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started, and the respective reels The lighting may be started after the start of the rotation of 32L, 32M, 32R and until the stop operation of each stop button 42 to 44 is activated. The reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be stopped at the end. The lighting may be started before the stop operation of the reels can be performed.

  (53) When transitioning to the bonus AT state, the transition to the bonus AT state may be invalidated when the CB prize is generated.

  (54) When transitioning to the bonus AT state, or when the CB prize is generated when the bonus AT state is executed, the number of games digested in the CB state is the number of continued games in the bonus AT state Although it is subtracted, it may be configured not to be subtracted from the number of continuing games after the end of the CB middle state and until the CB internal rear state is reached.

  (55) When the first to third special replay roles are won and the wait time is set, the wait time is set at the start of the next game of the winning game, but instead, the wait time is changed. It may be set at the end of the winning game.

  (56) The setting of the AT1 signal to the ON state and the setting of the AT2 signal to the ON state may be performed at the start of the next game of the game in which the setting condition to the ON state is satisfied in any case. . Further, the setting of the AT1 signal to the OFF state and the setting of the AT2 signal to the OFF state may be performed at the end of the game in which the setting condition to the OFF state is satisfied in any case.

  (57) The probability of becoming an AT continuation winning may be notified in the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309), or an effect may be executed to make it possible to predict the probability.

  (58) In the above embodiment, although the bonus for paying out the medal is awarded when the small winning combination is established, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and some bonus is given to the player. I hope there is. For example, a prize other than the medal may be paid out when the small winning combination is established. In addition, in a slot machine that does not have actual medal insertion or medal payout functions and manages the medals owned by the player as credits, the increase of credited medals corresponds to the provision of a privilege.

  (59) The present invention may be applied to a so-called A type slot machine, and also B type, C type, composite type of A type and C type, composite type of B type and C type, and further RT game or CT. The present invention may be applied to any slot machine, such as a type equipped with a game.

  (60) The symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, characters, etc., and may be geometrical lines, figures, etc. Further, it is also possible to configure the symbol by light, color or the like, or the symbol may be configured by a three-dimensional shape or the like, or the symbol may be configured by combining these symbols. That is, the design should just have a function as information having distinctiveness.

  (61) In each of the above embodiments, the slot machine 10 has been described as an example, but it may be applied to a pachinko machine, or may be applied to a game machine in which the slot machine and the pachinko machine are integrated. It is also good.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configuration illustrated in the parentheses or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. When the first benefit numerical condition is satisfied (it becomes a bonus point winning in the bonus point lottery process), the privilege numerical information (benefit point) corresponding to a value smaller than the privilege standard value is stored in the benefit storage means (sub side RAM 84 First storage execution means (function to execute the processing of step S2005, step S2007, step S2011 and step S2504 in the sub side MPU 82) stored in the privilege point counter);
In the case where the bonus numerical information stored in the bonus storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the bonus standard value, a predetermined bonus giving means (a sub-side MPU 82 is provided to give the player a predetermined benefit which is advantageous) A function of performing an affirmative determination in step S2301 and executing subsequent processing, and a function of performing an affirmative determination in step S2609 of the sub MPU 82 and performing subsequent processing);
Information corresponding to the benefit reference value × n (where n is an integer of 1 or more) when the second benefit numerical condition is satisfied (the bonus AT state is started, and the additional winning is achieved in the additional lottery process) Second storage executing means (function to execute the processing of step S1904, step S2405, step S2804, step S2810 and step S2904 in the sub MPU 82) to be stored in the benefit storage means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A1, with regard to the grant of the predetermined benefit, the predetermined benefit is granted based on the fact that the benefit numerical information stored along with the establishment of the first benefit numeric condition is accumulated and becomes information equal to or greater than the benefit reference value. There are cases and cases where a predetermined benefit is awarded based on the establishment of the second benefit numerical condition. As a result, the manner of giving predetermined benefits is diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this case, instead of storing the number of times of provision of the predetermined benefit when the second benefit value condition is established, information corresponding to the benefit reference value × n is stored in the benefit storage means. As a result, in the configuration in which the provision mode of the predetermined benefit is diversified as described above, the benefit storage means can be commonly used. Therefore, storage means to be referred to can be consolidated when determining whether or not a predetermined privilege should be given, and the processing load at the time of the determination can be reduced. In addition, the required storage capacity can be reduced. As mentioned above, it becomes possible to aim at the interest improvement of a game suitably.

  Feature A2. It is characterized by having a privilege numerical value lottery means (function to execute the process of step S2002 in the sub side MPU 82) for determining the privilege numerical value information to be stored by the first storage executing means by the privilege numerical value lottery process. The gaming machine according to feature A1.

  According to the feature A2, it is possible to diversify the benefit numeric information stored in the benefit storage means when the first benefit numeric condition is established, and the first benefit numeric condition is established and the benefit numeric information is accumulated. Can be diversified when the predetermined benefits are given.

  In addition, as a more specific configuration of the feature A2, “a plurality of types of the benefit numerical information selected in the benefit numerical lottery process exist, and the benefit numerical information has an information value smaller than the benefit reference value. “Is a configuration.”

  Feature A3. Granting time updating means for updating the bonus storage means so that the bonus reference numerical value is subtracted when the predetermined bonus is awarded by the predetermined bonus awarding means (processing of steps S2302 and S2604 in the sub MPU 82 A game machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized in that the game machine has a function of performing

  According to the feature A3, in the configuration in which the benefit storage means is commonly used regardless of whether the first benefit numeric condition is established or the second benefit numeric condition is established, the benefit when the predetermined benefit is given It becomes possible to unify the handling of numerical information. This reduces the processing load.

  Feature A4. The numerical value corresponding to the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means is a numerical value larger than the privilege standard numerical value × (n−1) and smaller than the privilege standard numerical value × n (n is an integer of 1 or more) Benefit value notification means for notifying information corresponding to the value exceeding the benefit reference value × (n-1) in the situation (function to execute the processing of step S2204 in the benefit point notification unit 67 and the sub MPU 82) A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that it comprises:

  According to the feature A4, it is possible for the player to recognize an amount that does not satisfy the provision of the predetermined benefit as the benefit numerical information, and in the situation where the first benefit numerical condition can be established, how much the benefit numerical information is necessary It becomes possible to play the game while clearly recognizing the This makes it possible to suitably increase the player's sense of expectation.

Feature A5. A division execution unit (function to execute the processing of step S2201 in the sub MPU 82) that divides a numerical value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage unit by the privilege reference numerical value,
The gaming machine according to feature A4, wherein the bonus numerical value notifying means notifies information corresponding to the numerical value of the remainder of the division result by the division executing means.

  According to the feature A5, in the configuration in which the benefit storage means is commonly used regardless of whether the first benefit numerical condition is satisfied or the second benefit numerical condition is satisfied, the predetermined benefit is given as the benefit numerical information. It is possible to derive a numerical value of less than with the simple processing configuration.

  Feature A6. Situation where the numerical value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means is a numerical value equal to or more than the privilege standard numerical value × n and smaller than the privilege standard numerical value × (n + 1) (n is an integer of 1 or more) And any one of the features A1 to A5 characterized in that the privilege frequency notification means (the stock notification unit 68 and the function of executing the process of step S2203 in the sub MPU 82) for notifying information corresponding to the n is provided. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature A6, it is possible for the player to recognize the number of times of provision of the predetermined benefit, and it is possible to suitably enhance the player's sense of superiority.

Feature A7. A division execution unit (function to execute the processing of step S2201 in the sub MPU 82) that divides a numerical value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage unit by the privilege reference numerical value,
The gaming machine according to the feature A6, wherein the benefit frequency notification unit reports information corresponding to the numerical value of the quotient of the division result by the division execution unit.

  According to the feature A7, in the configuration in which the benefit storage means is commonly used regardless of whether the first benefit numerical condition is satisfied or the second benefit numerical condition is satisfied, the number of times of applying the predetermined benefit is simple. It becomes possible to derive by the processing configuration.

Feature A8. The first benefit numerical condition is established in the gaming state for the first benefit (normal AT state),
As a result of the storage process of the bonus numerical information to the bonus storage means being executed by the first storage execution means in the gaming state corresponding to the first benefit, the bonus numerical information stored in the benefit storage means is the bonus When the information becomes equal to or more than the reference value, the processing of steps S2104 to S2107 in the sub MPU 82 is executed to shift to the gaming state (superimposed state) corresponding to the second benefit where the second benefit numerical condition can be established. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A7, comprising a function and a function of executing the processing of step S2611 to step S2614 in the sub MPU 82.

  According to the feature A8, there is a gaming state in which the first bonus numerical value condition can be established and a gaming state in which the second bonus numerical value condition can be established, and diversification of the gaming state can be achieved. In addition, since the bonus numerical value information becomes information of the bonus standard numeric value or more in the gaming state corresponding to the first benefit, the gaming state is shifted to the second benefit corresponding state, so both gaming states can be closely related.

Feature A9. Pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop variable display of the pattern;
Variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
At least one of the first benefit numerical condition and the second benefit numerical condition is a result of a lottery process executed when the start operation means is operated, or a prize after the variable display of the pattern is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A8, characterized by being established according to a result.

  In the gaming machine like the feature A9, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Feature A10. The pattern display means comprises a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts variable display of patterns on the plurality of variable display portions based on the start operation means being operated, and the stop operation means based on the stop operation means being operated Controlling the pattern display means so as to stop variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to
The game machine is
Combination lottery execution unit (function of executing lottery processing in main side MPU 72) that executes combination lottery processing when the start operation unit is operated;
Winning correspondence giving means (winning determination in the main side MPU 72) which grants a prize corresponding privilege to the player based on the fact that the stopping symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery processing is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped Function to execute processing),
Equipped with
As combinations to be selected by the combination lottery process, there exist order corresponding combinations (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enable the occurrence of a prize when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order Yes,
The predetermined privilege is to enable execution of a game in a gaming state (normal AT state) in which the predetermined order is notified when becoming the order correspondence role, as described in the feature A9. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature A10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  Note that for the configuration of the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, the features I1 to One or more configurations among I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Storage execution means (sub unit for storing benefit value information (benefit points) in benefit storage means (benefit point counter of sub-side RAM 84) when benefit value conditions are satisfied (benefit points won be won in benefit point lottery process) Function in step S2005, step S2007, step S2011 and step S2504 in the side MPU 82),
Benefit criterion determination means for determining whether or not the benefit numerical information stored in the benefit storage means corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the benefit reference value when it becomes a determination trigger (step S2301 in the sub MPU 82) And a function of executing the process of step S2609),
A predetermined privilege giving means (a step in the sub MPU 82) for providing the player with a predetermined privilege which is advantageous when it is determined that the information corresponding to a value equal to or more than the privilege standard value is determined by the privilege standard determining means. A function of executing an affirmative determination in step S2301 and executing subsequent processing, and a function of performing an affirmative determination in step S2609 of the sub MPU 82 and executing subsequent processing);
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the benefit numerical information of the benefit storage means corresponding to a value less than the benefit standard value can be taken over even after the determination trigger.

  According to the feature B1, since the predetermined benefit is provided by the benefit numerical information stored by the establishment of the benefit numerical condition becoming information corresponding to the value equal to or greater than the benefit reference numerical value, the player is given the benefit numerical condition A game is played while expecting to be established, and a game is played while expecting that the benefit numerical information becomes information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the benefit reference value. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this case, benefit numerical value information corresponding to a value less than the benefit standard value can be taken over even after the determination trigger. As a result, the opportunity for the benefit numerical information to become information corresponding to the value higher than the privilege standard value increases, and the opportunity to have an expectation as to whether the benefit numerical information can be information corresponding to the value higher than the privilege standard value It is possible to generate many. As mentioned above, it becomes possible to aim at the interest improvement of a game suitably.

  It should be noted that, as the benefit numerical condition, “In the configuration provided with the benefit numerical lottery means for executing the privilege numerical lottery process (the function for executing the bonus point lottery process in the sub side RAM 84), the award numerical lottery process is won The condition of "thing" is mentioned. In addition, "benefit numerical value information determined by the special benefit numerical value lottery process may be stored in the special effect storage means".

  Feature B2. The storage execution means is configured to store, in the benefit storage means, benefit numeric information corresponding to a value smaller than the benefit reference value when the benefit numeric condition is satisfied. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature B2, by accumulating the privilege numerical information acquired when the privilege numerical condition is satisfied, it can be the privilege numerical information corresponding to the privilege standard numerical value or more. As a result, in order to obtain bonus value information corresponding to the bonus reference value or more, the bonus value condition needs to be established a plurality of times, and it is possible to gradually increase the player's sense of expectation.

Feature B3. The benefit numerical condition is a configuration that is established in a bonus enabled gaming state (normal AT state),
The configuration is such that one execution number of the gaming state corresponding to the benefit is ended after the determination trigger is triggered,
Feature B1 or B2 characterized in that the bonus numerical information stored in the bonus storage means in the bonus enabled gaming state of the predetermined execution frequency can be taken over to the bonus enabled gaming state in the next execution frequency. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature B3, the benefit numeric information acquired in one execution cycle of the bonus enabled gaming state can be taken over to the bonus enabled gaming mode in the next execution cycle, so it is acquired just before the end of the bonus enabled gaming mode. It is possible to receive the benefits from even the benefit numerical information. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect the establishment of the benefit numerical condition at any timing of the bonus enabled gaming state.

Feature B4. When the continuation condition is satisfied, after one execution cycle of the bonus enabled gaming state is finished, a new execution cycle of the bonus enabled gaming mode is started,
When the continuation condition is satisfied and the gaming state corresponding to the benefit is continued, the benefit numerical information stored in the benefit storage means is inherited to the gaming state corresponding to the benefit after the continuation The gaming machine described in B3.

  According to the feature B4, when the gaming state corresponding to the bonus is continuous, the bonus numerical information is taken over to the gaming state corresponding to the bonus after the continuation, so that the profit is enhanced when the gaming state corresponding to the bonus is continuous As a result, it becomes possible to increase the sense of expectation that the gaming state corresponding to the benefit will be continuous.

Feature B5. The gaming state corresponding to the benefit is a gaming state in which the expected degree of provision of gaming media is higher than the predetermined gaming state,
When it is determined that the predetermined benefit granting means is information corresponding to a value equal to or more than the benefit reference numerical value by the benefit reference judging means, it is determined that the continuation condition is satisfied, one execution time of the gaming state corresponding to the benefit A game machine according to feature B4, characterized in that a new execution cycle of the gaming state corresponding to the benefit is started after the end of the game.

  According to the feature B5, since the bonus numerical information becomes information corresponding to the privilege standard numerical value or more, the gaming state corresponding to the bonus will be continuous, so the game is performed while expecting that the bonus numerical condition is established. It will be.

  Feature B6. A condition different from the condition in the case where it is determined that the information corresponding to the value more than the benefit reference value is determined by the benefit criterion determination unit as the continuation condition is the feature B5 described in the feature B5 Gaming machine.

  According to the feature B6, even if the bonus numerical information is not the information corresponding to the privilege standard numerical value or more, the gaming state corresponding to the privilege can be continuous if another continuation condition is satisfied, so the gaming state corresponding to the privilege It is possible to give many opportunities for In addition, even when the other continuation condition is satisfied and the gaming state corresponding to the benefit is continuous, since the benefit numerical information is taken over to the gaming state corresponding to the benefit after the continuation, the gaming state corresponding to the benefit is It will be possible to give many opportunities to run continuously.

  Feature B7. Even if the continuation condition is not established, the bonus numerical information stored in the bonus storage unit can be taken over to the gaming state corresponding to the bonus generated by a new start trigger. The gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B6.

  According to the feature B7, it is possible to give many opportunities for the benefit numerical value information to be taken over.

  Feature B8. If the continuation condition is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage unit is to be stored and held by the takeover lottery process (step S4001 in the sub MPU 82). A game machine according to feature B7, characterized in that the game machine has a function to be executed.

  According to the feature B8, it is possible to diversify the mode in the case where the benefit numerical value information is taken over.

  Feature B9. In the case where the benefit numeric information stored in the benefit storage means is information corresponding to a large value, the probability of being taken over after the determination trigger is higher than in the case where the information corresponds to a smaller value. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B8.

  According to the feature B9, even if the bonus numerical information corresponding to less than the bonus standard value becomes the determination trigger, the probability that the numerical value of the bonus numerical information at that time is larger is larger than the case where the value is smaller is smaller. Because it becomes higher, it is more advantageous to keep the numerical value of the benefit numerical information as large as possible. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not the privilege numerical condition is established.

Feature B10. Pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop variable display of the pattern;
Variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
The feature B1 is characterized in that the bonus numerical value condition is satisfied as a result of a lottery process executed when the start operation means is operated, or a winning result after the variable display of the pattern is stopped. To the gaming machine according to any one of B9.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature B10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Feature B11. The pattern display means comprises a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts variable display of patterns on the plurality of variable display portions based on the start operation means being operated, and the stop operation means based on the stop operation means being operated Controlling the pattern display means so as to stop variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to
The game machine is
Combination lottery execution unit (function of executing lottery processing in main side MPU 72) that executes combination lottery processing when the start operation unit is operated;
Winning correspondence giving means (winning determination in the main side MPU 72) which grants a prize corresponding privilege to the player based on the fact that the stopping symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery processing is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped Function to execute processing),
Equipped with
As combinations to be selected by the combination lottery process, there exist order corresponding combinations (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enable the occurrence of a prize when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order Yes,
The gaming machine according to feature B10, wherein the predetermined privilege is to enable execution of a game in a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order correspondence role is achieved.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature B11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  Note that for the configuration of the features B1 to B11, the features A1 to A10, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, the features I1 to One or more configurations among I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. An advantage transition means (step S1614 to step S1617 in the sub side MPU 82 and step S1706 to step in which the gaming state is shifted to the advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's degree of advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state (non-AT state) Function to execute the processing of S1709),
Continuation lottery execution which performs continuation lottery processing of whether or not a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state is started after completion of one execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state when the continuous lottery opportunity is triggered A unit (function of executing the process of step S2309 in the sub MPU 82);
Predetermined transition means (a function of executing the process of step S2913 in the sub MPU 82) to shift to the predetermined gaming state after the period after the continuation of the continuation has elapsed if the continuation lottery process causes the continuation of the continuation lottery process;
Advantage continuation means (function to execute setting processing of pre-branch AT state in sub-side MPU 82) that starts a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state when the continuation condition is established in the post-consecutive period,
Equipped with
The continuous lottery execution means executes the continuous lottery process again when the continuation condition is satisfied and a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state is started in the middle of the period after the continuation of the continuation. A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature C1, not only the advantageous gaming state is continued when continuous win is achieved in the continuous lottery process, but also advantageous when the continuous condition is established in the period after the continuous out when the continuous is out. The gaming state is continuous. This makes it possible to diversify the mode in which the advantageous gaming state is continuous, and it is possible to suitably enhance the expectation of the player who is expecting the advantageous gaming state to be continuous.

  In addition, even if the continuation lottery process is once lost, if the continuation condition is satisfied in the subsequent continuation period and the advantageous gaming state is continued, the opportunity to execute the continuation lottery process is set again. Granted. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing at which the consecutive gaming in the advantageous gaming state ends, and it is possible to preferably maintain the expectation of the player in the advantageous gaming state. As mentioned above, it becomes possible to aim at the interest improvement of a game suitably.

  It should be noted that one execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state may be terminated when the termination condition is satisfied, and the termination condition is one game in which variable display of the symbol in the symbol display means is started and terminated. In this case, the game may be digested a predetermined number of times, or the end lottery process may be selected as the end winning.

  Further, the period after the continuous removal may be a period during which a plurality of predetermined games are executed when it is assumed that the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means is started and ended, and after the continuous removal during this period An effect indicating that it is a period may be executed by the effect executing means.

Feature C2. The probability improvement means (function to execute the processing of step S2308 and step S2316 in the sub-side MPU 82) which makes the probability of being continuously elected higher in the continuous lottery processing than before.
When the continuation condition is satisfied in the middle of the continuation-off period and the new execution round of the advantageous gaming state is started, the probability improvement means is performed until the continuation lottery process is executed again thereafter. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the probability of being continuously winning may be increased.

  According to the feature C2, when the continuation condition is satisfied in the continuation period and the advantageous gaming state is continued, not only the opportunity to execute the continuation lottery process is given again, but also the continuation lottery to be executed again In the process, the probability of continuing winning may be high. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's profit when the continuation condition is satisfied in the continuation period.

  Feature C3. The probability improvement means sets the probability that the continuous winning will be made to the highest probability when the execution time of the advantageous gaming state is repeated and the highest probability setting condition is satisfied. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature C3, as the advantageous gaming state is continuous, it becomes more advantageous for the player. As a result, the benefit that the execution opportunity of the continuous lottery process is again given is enhanced, and it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation even in the non-continuous period.

  Note that the probability of winning continuously may be three or more.

Feature C4. The probability improvement means is
First probability improving means (function to execute the process of step S2316 in the sub side MPU 82) capable of increasing the probability of becoming the continual winning when the continual lottery processing results in continual winning;
A second probability improving means for increasing the probability of becoming a continual winning, at least one condition that a continuation of a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state occurs, even if the continual lottery process is out of continuance (Function to execute the processing of step S2308 in the sub MPU 82),
A game machine according to feature C2 or C3 characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C4, in any of the cases where the continuous game is continuously won and the advantageous gaming state is continuous, and the continuous condition of the continuous out of which the continuous gaming condition is satisfied, the advantageous gaming state is continuous. The probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process may be high. This makes it possible to increase the opportunity for the advantageous gaming state to be continuous.

  Feature C5. The gaming machine according to feature C4, wherein the second probability improving means has a larger increase in the probability of being continuously winning than the first probability improving means.

  According to the feature C5, it is possible to increase the profit when the continuation condition is satisfied and the advantageous gaming state is continued even though the continuation period is reached.

Feature C6. It has a specific storage means (a bonus point counter of the sub side RAM 84) for storing information capable of specifying the remaining number of times of execution of the advantageous gaming state.
When the information stored in the specific storage unit is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times, a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state is started without the continuous lottery process being executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, which is characterized in that

  According to the feature C6, when the number of remaining executions is one or more, the digestion is prioritized over the continuous lottery process when the continuous game in the advantageous gaming state is performed. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous gaming state from being continued more than necessary, as compared with the configuration in which the remaining execution frequency is digested when the continuous lottery processing causes continuous disconnection.

  Feature C7. The gaming machine according to Feature C6, wherein the continuation condition is that the information stored in the specific storage unit is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times.

  According to the feature C7, it is possible to cause an event of continuous shooting occurrence of the advantageous gaming state after the start of the period after continuous disconnection while using the information indicating the number of remaining executions.

Feature C8. Storage executing means (step S2005 in the sub-side MPU 82, step S2007 for storing the special value information (special point) in the specific storage means when the special numerical value condition is satisfied (the special point will be won in the special point lottery process) , A function of executing the processing of step S2011 and step S2504),
Privilege criterion determination means for determining whether or not the benefit numerical information stored in the specific storage means corresponds to a value greater than or equal to the benefit reference value when it becomes a determination trigger (step S2301 in the sub MPU 82) And a function of executing the process of step S2609),
Equipped with
When it is determined that the information corresponding to the value above the benefit standard value is determined by the benefit standard determination unit, a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state is started without the continuous lottery process being executed. And
The gaming machine according to Feature C7, wherein the continuation condition is that the benefit numerical value information stored in the specific storage unit is information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the benefit reference numerical value.

  According to the feature C8, even if the benefit numerical information does not correspond to the value greater than the benefit standard value before the determination trigger, the benefit numerical information has a value greater than or equal to the benefit standard value in the post-continuation period. The advantageous game state will be continuous by becoming corresponding information. As a result, it is advantageous for the player to set the value corresponding to the bonus numerical information to a larger value before the judgment trigger occurs, so that the bonus numerical information having a larger value before the judgment trigger occurs. The game is played while expecting the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Feature C9. In any one of the features C1 to C8, a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state is started after the lapse of the after-succeeding period, when the continuous lottery processing results in continuous winning. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature C9, it is possible to teach the player that the continuous winning has been achieved.

  In addition, when the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means is started and ended is regarded as one game, the predetermined period may be a period during which a plurality of predetermined games are executed. An effect indicating that it is a period may be executed by the effect executing means.

Feature C10. Pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop variable display of the pattern;
Variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
The continuation condition is satisfied according to the result of the lottery process executed when the start operation means is operated or the winning result after the variable display of the pattern is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of C9.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature C10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Feature C11. The pattern display means comprises a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts variable display of patterns on the plurality of variable display portions based on the start operation means being operated, and the stop operation means based on the stop operation means being operated Controlling the pattern display means so as to stop variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to
The game machine is
Combination lottery execution unit (function of executing lottery processing in main side MPU 72) that executes combination lottery processing when the start operation unit is operated;
Winning correspondence giving means (winning determination in the main side MPU 72) which grants a prize corresponding privilege to the player based on the fact that the stopping symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery processing is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped Function to execute processing),
Equipped with
As combinations to be selected by the combination lottery process, there exist order corresponding combinations (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enable the occurrence of a prize when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order Yes,
The gaming machine according to feature C10, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order correspondence role is achieved.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature C11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C11, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, the features I1 to One or more configurations among I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. An advantage transition means (step S1614 to step S1617 in the sub side MPU 82 and step S1706 to step in which the gaming state is shifted to the advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's degree of advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state (non-AT state) Function to execute the processing of S1709),
Continuation lottery execution which performs continuation lottery processing of whether or not a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state is started after completion of one execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state when the continuous lottery opportunity is triggered A unit (function of executing the process of step S2309 in the sub MPU 82);
Probability improvement means to increase the probability that the continual winning will be at least one condition that the continuation of the new execution time of the advantageous gaming state occurs (function to execute the processing of step S2308 and step S2316 in the sub side MPU 82 )When,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, since the advantageous gaming state is continuous when the continuous lottery processing results in the continuous winning, the player plays the game while expecting the continuous winning in the continuous lottery processing, The interest of the game is improved.

  In this case, in the case where the advantageous gaming state is continuous, the probability of being continuously won in the continuous lottery process can be improved. As a result, when the advantageous game state is continuous, the continuous state is more easily generated, and the advantage of the continuous advantageous state is increased. As a result, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of excitement when the advantageous gaming state is continuous. As mentioned above, it becomes possible to aim at the interest improvement of a game suitably.

  Feature D2. The gaming machine according to the feature D1, wherein the probability improvement means is configured to increase the probability of being continuously winning, with at least one condition being a continued winning in the continuous lottery process.

  According to the feature D2, by being continuously elected in the continuous lottery process, the probability of being continuously elected is increased. As a result, the player's attention to the point of whether or not the continuous lottery process is to be continued winning is enhanced.

Feature D3. The probability improvement means is
Probability lottery execution means (function of executing the processing of step S2316 in the sub side MPU 82) that executes the continuation probability lottery processing with at least one condition being the continuation winning in the continuation lottery processing;
Probability setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2318 in the sub MPU 82) that increases the probability of the continuous winning according to the result of the probability lottery process;
The gaming machine according to feature D2, comprising:

  According to the feature D3, in order to set the probability of being continuously elected to be high in the continuation lottery process, the probability of being continuously elected in the continuation lottery process and further continuing to be elected in the continuation probability lottery process is set high. It is necessary for the result to be As a result, the degree of freedom in setting the probability that the probability of winning the winning will be set high can be enhanced.

Feature D4. The advantageous gaming state includes a first advantageous period (pre-branch AT state) and a subsequent second advantageous period (branch AT state),
The continuous lottery execution unit executes the continuous lottery process when the first advantageous period ends.
In the game machine, an advantageous period effect (battle effect) corresponding to whether or not a new execution cycle of the advantageous game state is continuously performed in the second advantageous period is performed by the effect executing means (image display device 66) Effect control means (function to execute the process of step S1109 in the sub side MPU 82) to be executed,
When the specific effect (winning effect) is executed as the advantageous period effect, the probability improving means may increase the probability of the continuous winning or the possibility of the continuous winning may be increased. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D3, characterized in that it is higher than when rendering is performed.

  According to the feature D4, since the advantageous period effect corresponding to whether or not the new execution cycle of the advantageous game state is continued is executed in the second advantageous period of the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is continuous. It becomes possible to provide the player with notification of whether or not to be an effect, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, when the specific effect is executed as the advantageous period effect, the probability of being in continuous winning is high or high. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the specific effect to occur, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature D5. The effect control means is
An effect lottery execution unit (function of executing the process of step S2311 in the sub MPU 82) that executes the effect content lottery process when the continuous lottery process is continuously elected;
Specific effect setting means (function of executing the processing of step S2312 in the sub MPU 82) for setting the specific effect as the effect to be executed in the second advantageous period according to the result of the effect content lottery process;
Predetermined effect setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2312 in the sub MPU 82) for setting a predetermined effect (draw effect) as the effect to be executed in the second advantageous period according to the result of the effect content lottery process;
Equipped with
The probability improvement means is
Probability lottery execution means (function of executing the process of step S2316 in the sub MPU 82) that executes the continuation probability lottery process when the specific effect is set as the effect to be executed in the second advantageous period;
Probability setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2318 in the sub MPU 82) for improving the probability of being in continuous winning according to the result of the probability lottery process;
The gaming machine according to feature D4, comprising:

  According to the feature D5, when the specific effect or the predetermined effect is executed as the advantageous period effect, the consecutive game of the advantageous gaming state is determined, so the player is expecting the specific effect or the predetermined effect to be executed. I will play a game. Further, when the specific effect is executed among the specific effect and the predetermined effect, there is a possibility that the probability of being continuously elected in the continuous lottery process may be high, so the player is further subjected to the specific effect It will be played while expecting things. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be multi-tiered, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Feature D6. In the feature D4 or D5, the probability improvement means is configured to set the probability of being in continuous winning to the highest probability when the number of times the specific effect is performed becomes a predetermined number of executions. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature D6, when the number of times of execution of the specific effect becomes the predetermined number of executions, the probability that the continuous lottery process will be continued winning becomes the highest probability, so the player's sense of expectation for the specific effect to be executed It is possible to raise

  Note that the probability of winning continuously may be three or more.

Feature D7. It has a specific storage means (a bonus point counter of the sub side RAM 84) for storing information capable of specifying the remaining number of times of execution of the advantageous gaming state.
When the information stored in the specific storage unit is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times, a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state is started without the continuous lottery process being executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, which is characterized in that

  According to the feature D7, when the number of remaining executions is one or more, the digestion is prioritized over the continuous lottery process when the consecutive game in the advantageous gaming state is performed. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous gaming state from being continued more than necessary, as compared with the configuration in which the remaining execution frequency is digested when the continuous lottery processing causes continuous disconnection.

  Feature D8. The probability improvement means is configured to select the continuation winning when the new execution number of the advantageous gaming state is started by the information stored in the specific storage portion being information corresponding to one or more remaining execution numbers. The gaming machine according to Feature D7, wherein the setting for increasing the probability of becoming is not performed.

  According to the feature D8, it is possible to suppress the possibility of being set to be a high continual winning in the continuous lottery process being increased more than necessary.

Feature D9. Storage executing means (step S2005 in the sub-side MPU 82, step S2007 for storing the special value information (special point) in the specific storage means when the special numerical value condition is satisfied (the special point will be won in the special point lottery process) , A function of executing the processing of step S2011 and step S2504),
Privilege criterion determination means for determining whether or not the benefit numerical information stored in the specific storage means corresponds to a value greater than or equal to the benefit reference value when it becomes a determination trigger (step S2301 in the sub MPU 82) And a function of executing the process of step S2609),
Equipped with
When it is determined that the information corresponding to the value above the benefit standard value is determined by the benefit standard determination unit, a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state is started without the continuous lottery process being executed. And
Even when the continuous lottery process results in continuous loss, information in which benefit numerical value information stored in the specific storage means corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the benefit standard numerical value in the subsequent period after the continuous deduction When it becomes, feature D7 or D8 is characterized by including advantageous continuation means (function to execute setting process of AT state before branching in sub side MPU 82) for starting a new execution cycle of the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature D9, even if the benefit numerical information does not correspond to the value greater than the benefit standard value before the determination trigger, the benefit numerical information has a value greater than the benefit standard value in the post-continuation period. The advantageous game state will be continuous by becoming corresponding information. As a result, it is advantageous for the player to set the value corresponding to the bonus numerical information to a larger value before the judgment trigger occurs, so that the bonus numerical information having a larger value before the judgment trigger occurs. The game is played while expecting the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature D10. Pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop variable display of the pattern;
Variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
In the advantageous game state, a game in which the variable display of the pattern is stopped after the variable display of the pattern is started is executed a plurality of times, the game according to any one of the features D1 to D9 Machine.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature D10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Feature D11. The pattern display means comprises a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts variable display of patterns on the plurality of variable display portions based on the start operation means being operated, and the stop operation means based on the stop operation means being operated Controlling the pattern display means so as to stop variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to
The game machine is
Combination lottery execution unit (function of executing lottery processing in main side MPU 72) that executes combination lottery processing when the start operation unit is operated;
Winning correspondence giving means (winning determination in the main side MPU 72) which grants a prize corresponding privilege to the player based on the fact that the stopping symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery processing is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped Function to execute processing),
Equipped with
As combinations to be selected by the combination lottery process, there exist order corresponding combinations (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enable the occurrence of a prize when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order Yes,
The gaming machine according to feature D10, wherein the advantageous game state is a game state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order correspondence role is achieved.

  In the gaming machine like the feature D11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  Note that with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D11, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, the features I1 to One or more configurations among I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. An advantage transition means (step S1614 to step S1617 in the sub side MPU 82 and step S1706 to step in which the gaming state is shifted to the advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's degree of advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state (non-AT state) Function to execute the processing of S1709),
Continuation lottery execution which performs continuation lottery processing of whether or not a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state is started after completion of one execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state when the continuous lottery opportunity is triggered A unit (function of executing the process of step S2309 in the sub MPU 82);
Specific storage means (reward point counter of sub side RAM 84) for storing information capable of specifying the remaining number of times of execution of the advantageous gaming state;
In the case where the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times, or in the case of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process, a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state is started Advantageous continuation means (function to execute setting processing of pre-branch AT state in sub-side MPU 82)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, in addition to the advantageous gaming state being continuous when the continuous lottery processing is a continual winning, the information stored in the specific storage means corresponds to the number of remaining executions being one or more. The advantageous game state is continuous even when the information is the same. This makes it possible to diversify the mode in which the advantageous gaming state is continuous, and it is possible to suitably enhance the expectation of the player who is expecting the advantageous gaming state to be continuous. As mentioned above, it becomes possible to aim at the interest improvement of a game suitably.

  Feature E2. Probability improvement means to increase the probability of continued winning in the continuation lottery process when the execution times of the advantageous gaming state are repeated and probability improvement conditions are satisfied (execution of step S2308 and step S2316 in the sub MPU 82) The game machine according to feature E1, characterized in that

  According to the feature E2, it is possible to improve the probability of being continuously won in the continuous lottery process by the continuous advantageous game state. That is, as the number of remaining executions is set to be larger and the advantageous gaming state is continued, the probability of being continuously won in the continuous lottery process becomes higher. As a result, when the advantageous game state is continuous, the continuous state is more easily generated, and the advantage of the continuous advantageous state is increased. As a result, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of excitement when the advantageous gaming state is continuous. In addition, it becomes possible to closely associate the continuous game probability of the continuous lottery process with the consecutive game of the advantageous gaming state related to the remaining execution frequency, and the effect of setting the double continuous room pattern is synergistical It is possible to

Feature E3. The advantageous gaming state includes a first advantageous period (pre-branch AT state) and a subsequent second advantageous period (branch AT state),
The advantageous continuation means determines whether the information stored in the specific storage means corresponds to one or more remaining execution times, or the continuous lottery process, when the first advantageous period ends. To determine whether or not they have been continuously elected.
In the game machine, an advantageous period effect (battle effect) corresponding to whether or not a new execution cycle of the advantageous game state is continuously performed in the second advantageous period is performed by the effect executing means (image display device 66) Effect control means (function to execute the process of step S1109 in the sub side MPU 82) to be executed,
The effect control means is
An effect lottery execution unit (function of executing the process of step S2311 in the sub MPU 82) that executes an effect content lottery process when a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state is continuously performed;
Specific effect setting means (function of executing the process of step S2312 in the sub side MPU 82) for setting a specific effect (win effect) as the effect to be executed in the second advantageous period according to the result of the effect content lottery process;
Predetermined effect setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2312 in the sub MPU 82) for setting a predetermined effect (draw effect) as the effect to be executed in the second advantageous period according to the result of the effect content lottery process;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is a probability improvement means (step S2308 in the sub MPU 82) to increase the probability of continuing to be won in the continuous lottery process when the number of times the specific effect is performed becomes a predetermined number of times A game machine according to feature E1 or E2, characterized in that it comprises a function to be executed.

  According to the feature E3, since the advantageous period effect corresponding to whether or not the new execution cycle of the advantageous game state is continued is executed in the second advantageous period of the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is continuous. It becomes possible to provide the player with notification of whether or not to be an effect, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, when a specific effect or a predetermined effect is executed as the advantageous period effect, the consecutive game of the advantageous gaming state is determined, so the player plays the game while expecting the specific effect or the predetermined effect to be executed. It becomes. In addition, since the probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process becomes high when the number of times the specific effect is executed becomes the predetermined number of times, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation that the specific effect is executed. Become.

  In addition, since the specific effect is executed even when the advantageous gaming state continues because the remaining execution frequency is one or more, the number of execution times of the specific effect is predetermined execution as the number of remaining execution frequencies is increased. Expectations for the number of times can be increased. Therefore, when a large number of times is set as the remaining number of times of execution, not only the benefit that the number of consecutive games in the advantageous gaming state increases, but also the benefit that the possibility of improving the probability of continuing winning increases will be provided. The advantage of setting a large number of times as the number of remaining executions is enhanced.

  Feature E4. The game according to the feature E3, characterized in that it comprises execution number notification means (the number-of-wins notification unit 69, function to execute the processing of step S2205 in the sub MPU 82) notifying the number of times the specific effect has been performed. Machine.

  According to the feature E4, it is possible to suitably enhance an expectation that the number of times of execution of the specific effect becomes a predetermined number of times of execution.

  Feature E5. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E2 to E4, wherein the probability improving means sets the probability of the continuous winning to the highest probability.

  According to the feature E5, the advantage of continuous playing of the advantageous game state is enhanced.

  Feature E6. Any one of the features E1 to E5 characterized by having remaining number corresponding notification means (a function for executing the processing of step S2203 in the stock MPU 68 and the sub MPU 82) for notifying information corresponding to the remaining number of executions. The gaming machine according to 1 or 2.

  According to the feature E6, it is possible to recognize how much the advantageous gaming state is continuous at least through the remaining number corresponding notification means, and it is possible to enhance the player's sense of superiority.

  In particular, in the case of having the configuration of the feature E3, the player himself has an expectation of the number of executions of the specific effect being the predetermined number of executions in relation to the number of remaining executions grasped by the remaining number corresponding notification means. It becomes possible to recognize. In this way, it is possible to closely associate the consecutive game of the advantageous gaming state related to the remaining execution frequency with the continued winning probability of the continuous lottery process, and the effect of setting the two consecutive house pattern is synergistic It becomes possible to

  Feature E7. When the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times, the advantageous continuation means newly executes the advantageous gaming state without the continuous lottery process being performed. The game machine according to any one of the features E1 to E6, characterized in that

  According to the feature E7, when the number of remaining executions is one or more, the digestion is prioritized over the continuous lottery process when the consecutive game in the advantageous gaming state is performed. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous gaming state from being continued more than necessary, as compared with the configuration in which the remaining execution frequency is digested when the continuous lottery processing causes continuous disconnection.

Feature E8. Storage executing means (step S2005 in the sub-side MPU 82, step S2007 for storing the special value information (special point) in the specific storage means when the special numerical value condition is satisfied (the special point will be won in the special point lottery process) , A function of executing the processing of step S2011 and step S2504),
Privilege criterion determination means for determining whether or not the benefit numerical information stored in the specific storage means corresponds to a value greater than or equal to the benefit reference value when it becomes a determination trigger (step S2301 in the sub MPU 82) And a function of executing the process of step S2609),
Equipped with
When it is determined that the advantage continuing determination means is information corresponding to a value equal to or more than the benefit criterion numerical value by the benefit criterion determining means, the continuation execution of the advantageous gaming state is not performed without the continuation lottery process being performed. Even if it is a case where the round is started and the continuous lottery process is out of continuous, the bonus numerical value information stored in the specific storage means in the subsequent period after the continuous out. A game machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, characterized in that, when the information becomes information corresponding to the value above the bonus standard value, a new execution cycle of the advantageous game state is started. .

  According to the feature E8, even if the benefit numerical information does not correspond to the value more than the benefit standard value before the determination trigger time, the benefit numerical information becomes the value more than the benefit standard value in the period after the continuous loss The advantageous game state will be continuous by becoming corresponding information. As a result, it is advantageous for the player to set the value corresponding to the bonus numerical information to a larger value before the judgment trigger occurs, so that the bonus numerical information having a larger value before the judgment trigger occurs. The game is played while expecting the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature E9. Pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop variable display of the pattern;
Variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
The game according to any one of features E1 to E8, wherein in the advantageous game state, a game in which the variable display of the pattern is stopped after the variable display of the pattern is started is executed a plurality of times. Machine.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature E9, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Feature E10. The pattern display means comprises a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts variable display of patterns on the plurality of variable display portions based on the start operation means being operated, and the stop operation means based on the stop operation means being operated Controlling the pattern display means so as to stop variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to
The game machine is
Combination lottery execution unit (function of executing lottery processing in main side MPU 72) that executes combination lottery processing when the start operation unit is operated;
Winning correspondence giving means (winning determination in the main side MPU 72) which grants a prize corresponding privilege to the player based on the fact that the stopping symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery processing is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped Function to execute processing),
Equipped with
As combinations to be selected by the combination lottery process, there exist order corresponding combinations (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enable the occurrence of a prize when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order Yes,
The gaming machine according to Feature E9, wherein the advantageous game state is a game state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order correspondence role is achieved.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature E10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  Note that for the configuration of the features E1 to E10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, the features I1 to One or more configurations among I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Storage execution means (sub unit for storing benefit value information (benefit points) in benefit storage means (benefit point counter of sub-side RAM 84) when benefit value conditions are satisfied (benefit points won be won in benefit point lottery process) Function in step S2005, step S2007, step S2011 and step S2504 in the side MPU 82),
Benefit criterion determination means for determining whether or not the benefit numerical information stored in the benefit storage means corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the benefit reference value when it becomes a determination trigger (step S2301 in the sub MPU 82) And a function of executing the process of step S2609),
A predetermined privilege giving means (a step in the sub MPU 82) for providing the player with a predetermined privilege which is advantageous when it is determined that the information corresponding to a value equal to or more than the privilege standard value is determined by the privilege standard determining means. A function of executing an affirmative determination in step S2301 and executing subsequent processing, and a function of performing an affirmative determination in step S2609 of the sub MPU 82 and executing subsequent processing);
Granting lottery execution unit (sub side that executes the granting lottery process of whether or not to give the predetermined privilege when it is not determined that the information corresponds to the value above the privilege standard numerical value by the privilege standard determining unit A function of executing the process of step S2907 in the MPU 82),
Equipped with
The awarding lottery execution means is configured to execute the awarding lottery process so that the probability of being awarded in the awarding lottery process varies according to the benefit numerical information of the benefit storing means. Machine.

  According to the feature F1, since the predetermined benefit is provided by the benefit numerical information stored by the establishment of the benefit numerical condition becoming information corresponding to the value equal to or greater than the benefit reference numerical value, the player is given the benefit numerical condition A game is played while expecting to be established, and a game is played while expecting that the benefit numerical information becomes information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the benefit reference value. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, even if the information does not correspond to the value equal to or more than the benefit reference value, the predetermined benefit is awarded by being awarded by the awarding lottery process. As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode in the case where the predetermined benefit is given, and it is possible to give many opportunities for the predetermined benefit to be given.

  Furthermore, the assignment lottery process is executed so that the probability of being awarded will be different according to the value corresponding to the privilege numerical information. As a result, even if the benefit numeric information is information corresponding to a value less than the benefit reference value, it affects the probability that the benefit numeric information will be awarded in the assignment lottery process, and the degree of attention to the privilege numeric information It is possible to raise

  As mentioned above, it becomes possible to aim at the interest improvement of a game suitably.

  Feature F2. The awarding lottery process is performed so that the probability that the awarding process will be won is higher in the awarding process than in the case where the value corresponding to the award numerical information in the award storage means is large. The gaming machine according to feature F1, which is characterized in that:

  According to the feature F2, even if the benefit numeric information is information corresponding to a value less than the benefit reference value, the probability that the value of the benefit numeric information having a large value will be awarded in the assignment lottery process is high. As a result, even when the benefit numeric information is not information corresponding to the value equal to or greater than the benefit reference value, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the benefit numeric information.

  Feature F3. An eraser (function of executing the process of step S2911 in the sub MPU 82) that erases the benefit numerical information stored in the benefit storage unit when the award is won in the assignment lottery process and the predetermined benefit is awarded; The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, characterized in that it comprises.

  According to the feature F3, it is possible to limit to a certain extent the profit attributed to the benefit numerical value information.

Feature F4. The benefit numerical condition is a configuration that is established in a bonus enabled gaming state (normal AT state),
The configuration is such that one execution number of the gaming state corresponding to the benefit is ended after the determination trigger is triggered,
The gaming machine according to the feature F3 characterized in that, when the awarding lottery process is not executed or when the awarding lottery process does not result in awarding, the award numerical value information of the award storing means can be taken over.

  According to the feature F4, if the awarding lottery process is not executed or if the awarding lottery process does not win the awarding, the benefit numerical value information can be taken over, so that the benefit numerical value information is The handover mode is diversified. As a result, the progressing mode of the game is diversified in relation to the benefit value information, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature F5. The benefit numerical condition is a configuration that is established in an advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined gaming state (non-AT state),
The predetermined benefit is that the advantageous gaming state continues,
Features F1 to F4 having means (function to execute the process of step S2913 in the sub MPU 82) for ending the advantageous gaming state when the awarding process fails to win the award. The gaming machine according to any one.

  According to the feature F5, the giving lottery process exists as a final trigger for generating the consecutive game in the advantageous gaming state, and the degree of attention to the giving lottery process is enhanced. In addition, even if it is the privilege numerical value information acquired just before the end of the advantageous gaming state by referring to the privilege numerical information in the giving lottery processing which exists as a final trigger for generating the continuous game of the advantageous gaming state It is possible to benefit from it. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect the establishment of the benefit numerical condition at any timing of the advantageous gaming state.

Feature F6. Continuation lottery execution which performs continuation lottery processing of whether or not a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state is started after completion of one execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state when the continuous lottery opportunity is triggered Means (function to execute the processing of step S2309 in the sub MPU 82),
When it is determined that the information corresponding to the value equal to or more than the benefit reference numerical value is determined by the benefit reference determination unit, a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state is started without the continuous lottery process being executed. Yes,
The gaming machine according to the feature F5, wherein the giving lottery execution means is configured to execute the giving lottery process after the continuous lottery process is continuously out.

  According to the feature F6, it is possible to diversify the continuation mode of the advantageous game state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Feature F7. Even when the continuous lottery process results in continuous loss, information in which benefit numerical value information stored in the specific storage means corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the benefit standard numerical value in the subsequent period after the continuous deduction A game machine according to Feature F6, characterized in that when it becomes, a new execution cycle of the advantageous game state is started.

  According to the feature F7, even if the benefit numerical information does not correspond to the value more than the benefit standard value before the determination trigger time, the benefit numerical information becomes the value more than the benefit standard value in the post-continuation period The advantageous game state will be continuous by becoming corresponding information. As a result, it is advantageous for the player to set the value corresponding to the bonus numerical information to a larger value before the judgment trigger occurs, so that the bonus numerical information having a larger value before the judgment trigger occurs. The game is played while expecting the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature F8. Pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Combination lottery execution unit (function of executing lottery processing in main side MPU 72) that executes combination lottery processing when the start operation unit is operated;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop variable display of the pattern;
The variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means as one game. Variable display control means (function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the pattern display means in each game;
Winning correspondence giving means (winning determination in the main side MPU 72) which grants a prize corresponding privilege to the player based on the fact that the stopping symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery processing is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped Function to execute processing),
Equipped with
The awarding lottery execution means gives the award so that the probability of winning the award winning varies according to not only the value corresponding to the bonus numerical information of the bonus storage unit but also the result of the lottery process or the winning result in the corresponding game. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F7, which executes lottery processing.

  According to the feature F8, not only the value corresponding to the bonus numerical value information but also the winning combination or the winning result in the corresponding game affects the probability of being awarded in the awarding lottery process. As a result, the points to be noted in the execution of the assignment lottery process are diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Feature F9. The awarding lottery process is executed when the result of the winning combination lottery process in the corresponding game is a winning combination or when the winning combination is not won in the awarding lottery process. A gaming machine according to Feature F8, characterized by comprising means for increasing the number of continued games in the state (a function for making a positive determination in step S2912 in the sub MPU 82).

  According to the feature F9, the number of continued games in the state where the awarding lottery process is executed may increase even if the awarding lottery process does not win even though the winning combination or winning of the winning combination takes place. . As a result, it is possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage of the player in the case where the specific winning combination or the specific combination winning results in spite of the winning combination not being awarded in the awarding lottery process.

Feature F10. Pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop variable display of the pattern;
Variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
The bonus numerical value condition is satisfied according to the result of the lottery process executed when the start operation means is operated, or according to the winning result after the variable display of the pattern is stopped. To the gaming machine according to any one of F9.

  In the gaming machine like the feature F10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Feature F11. The pattern display means comprises a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts variable display of patterns on the plurality of variable display portions based on the start operation means being operated, and the stop operation means based on the stop operation means being operated Controlling the pattern display means so as to stop variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to
The game machine is
Combination lottery execution unit (function of executing lottery processing in main side MPU 72) that executes combination lottery processing when the start operation unit is operated;
Winning correspondence giving means (winning determination in the main side MPU 72) which grants a prize corresponding privilege to the player based on the fact that the stopping symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery processing is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped Function to execute processing),
Equipped with
As combinations to be selected by the combination lottery process, there exist order corresponding combinations (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enable the occurrence of a prize when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order Yes,
The gaming machine according to feature F10, wherein the predetermined privilege is to enable execution of a game in a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order correspondence role is achieved.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature F11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  Note that with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F11, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, the features I1 to One or more configurations among I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Role lottery execution means (function to execute lottery process in main side MPU 72) which executes the role lottery process;
A winning correspondence giving unit (a function for executing a winning determination process in the main side MPU 72) for giving a winning correspondence bonus corresponding to a winning combination in the part drawing process;
The player's advantage is greater than the predetermined gaming state (non-AT state), with at least one condition that the predetermined part (ordinary replay part) is won in the part drawing process in the transition expectation state (transition chance state). Advantage transition means (function to execute the processing of step S1614 to step S1617 and step S1706 to step S1709 in the sub MPU 82) to shift the gaming state to the high advantage gaming state (normal AT state),
Expecting to increase the degree of expectation that the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs in the transition expected state, with at least one condition being winning another part (expected degree improvement role) winning in the role lottery process in the transition expected state Degree improvement means (function of executing the processing of step S1605 and step S1606 in the sub MPU 82);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature G1, the transition to the advantageous gaming state may occur by the predetermined combination winning in the transition expected state. In this way, it is possible to play the game while expecting to win the predetermined combination in the transition expected state, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, when another player is elected in the transition expectation state, the expectation for transition to the advantageous gaming state in the transition expectation state is increased, so that the player may be elected not only for the predetermined role but also for the other in the transition expectation state. It is expected to diversify the roles expected to be won. As mentioned above, it becomes possible to aim at the interest improvement of a game suitably.

  Feature G2. The game according to the feature G1, characterized in that the expectation improvement means extends the duration of the transition expectation state, with at least one condition that the separate winning combination has been won in the part drawing process. Machine.

  According to the feature G2, since the duration of the transition expected state can be extended when the alternate winning combination is achieved, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs.

Feature G3. A transition lottery execution unit (function of executing the processing of step S1609 in the sub MPU 82) that executes the transition lottery process when the predetermined combination is won in the role lottery process in the transition expectation state,
The advantageous shift means shifts the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state when the transition win is made in the transition lottery process,
The expectation degree improving means is characterized in that the probability of becoming a transition winning in the transition lottery processing is increased, with at least one condition that the second winning combination has been won in the role drawing processing. Or the gaming machine described in G2.

  According to the feature G3, since the probability of becoming a transition winning in the transition lottery processing may be high when the winning combination is won, it is possible to increase the expectation that the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs.

  Feature G4. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G3, characterized in that the probability of winning the predetermined part at least in the transition expectation state is higher than the probability of winning the other part.

  According to the feature G4, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the predetermined winning combination is won in the transition expected state, and it is possible to provide many opportunities for expecting the transition to the advantageous gaming state. In addition, although it is general that a situation advantageous to the player may occur when the player is elected to the part with a low winning probability, it has a configuration of the feature G1 and has a winning probability lower than that of the predetermined part. When the player wins the game, the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous gaming state is high, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the alternate winning is won.

  Feature G5. The predetermined role is a trigger for giving the advantageous gaming state in the expected transition state, but is not a trigger for giving the bonus state in another gaming state, according to any one of the features G1 to G4. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature G5, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the predetermined combination winning in the transition expected state.

  Feature G6. The separate role does not serve as a trigger for giving the advantageous gaming state in the expected transition state, but in another gaming state, it plays the role for giving the gaming according to any one of features G1 to G5. Machine.

  According to the feature G6, it is possible to give the player the recognition that the alternate winning combination is an advantageous winning combination, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the alternate winning combination.

  Feature G7. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G6, wherein, when the predetermined combination is won in the combination lottery process, the winning correspondence provision means provides a predetermined selection correspondence bonus.

  According to the feature G7, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage in the case of becoming the predetermined combination, and to increase the degree of attention to the winning of the predetermined combination.

Feature G8. Pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop variable display of the pattern;
Variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
The combination lottery execution unit executes the combination lottery process when the start operation unit is operated,
When the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the part drawing process is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped, the winning correspondence giving unit is to give the winning correspondence privilege as a winning. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G7.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature G8, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  Feature G9. The feature G8 is characterized in that, when the predetermined combination is won in the combination lottery process, a prize is generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means in relation to the variable display position of the pattern. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature G9, when the predetermined combination is won, since the corresponding winning occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means, it is made clear to the player that the transition opportunity to the advantageous gaming state has occurred. It becomes possible to make it recognize.

Feature G10. The pattern display means comprises a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts variable display of patterns on the plurality of variable display portions based on the start operation means being operated, and the stop operation means based on the stop operation means being operated Controlling the pattern display means so as to stop variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to
The order corresponding combination (the first bell combination and the second bell that enables the occurrence of winnings when the variable display of the symbols on the plurality of variable display portions is stopped in a predetermined order as the combination selected by the combination lottery process Role exists,
The gaming machine according to feature G8 or G9, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order correspondence role is won.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature G10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  Note that for the configuration of the features G1 to G10, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features H1 to H7, features I1 to One or more configurations among I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. Pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Combination lottery execution unit (function of executing lottery processing in main side MPU 72) that executes combination lottery processing when the start operation unit is operated;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop variable display of the pattern;
The variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means as one game. Variable display control means (function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the pattern display means in each game;
Winning correspondence giving means (winning determination in the main side MPU 72) which grants a prize corresponding privilege to the player based on the fact that the stopping symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery processing is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped Function to execute processing),
A special standby period (start wait time) for waiting for the progress of the game when a special event occurs in which the role lottery process is a special lottery result or the stop result of the pattern is a special stop result. Special standby period setting means (a function for executing the processing of step S805 to step S806, step S812 to step S813, and step S906 to step S907 in the main MPU 72) for setting
If the special event occurs in a standby avoidance situation (a penalty situation when the value of the bonus AT counter is 1 or more), setting of the special standby period is not performed by the special standby period setting means, or A standby avoidance means for setting a standby period shorter than the special standby period (A function to make a positive determination at step S804 in the main MPU 72, a function to make a positive determination at step S811, a negative determination at step S901 A function to perform a negative determination at step S902, and a function to make a positive determination at step S905),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature H1, the special waiting period is set when a special event occurs, which is either a special winning or a special winning, thereby emphasizing that the special event has occurred through the setting of the special waiting period. It is possible to As a result, the player feels surprising that the special waiting period has been set, and the sense of excitement for the occurrence of the special event is enhanced. On the other hand, when the special waiting period is set, the progress of the game is waited, and there may be a situation where the player is reminded of being bothersome. On the other hand, in such a situation, the special waiting period can be generated in a preferable situation by not setting the special waiting period or shortening the waiting period. As mentioned above, it becomes possible to aim at the interest improvement of a game suitably.

Feature H2. The special standby period setting means causes measurement of the special standby period to be started after the variable display of the pattern is stopped,
The gaming machine according to the feature H1, wherein the variable display control means waits for the start of variable display of the pattern during the special standby period.

  According to the feature H2, when the special waiting period is set, the start of the variable display of the pattern is waited, so that it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the special waiting period is set. . On the other hand, when the special standby period is set in an unfavorable situation, the variable display of the pattern is not started although the game is about to be started, and it may be considered annoying. On the other hand, in such a situation, it is possible to prevent such a disadvantage by not setting the special waiting period or shortening the waiting period.

  Feature H3. It has a feature control means (function which performs processing of step S1109 in sub side MPU82, and step S1206) which makes special event corresponding production be performed by production execution means during the above-mentioned special waiting period. The gaming machine according to the feature H1 or H2.

  According to the feature H3, the special event response presentation is performed in the special waiting period, so that it is possible to enhance the excitement of the occurrence of the special event. On the other hand, if a special waiting period is set in a non-preferred situation and the special event response presentation is executed, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable, but in such a situation, the special waiting period is not set. The special event response presentation is also not performed by shortening the standby period.

Feature H4. An advantage transition means (mainly transitioning the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (bonus AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state when the special event occurs in the predetermined gaming state (non-AT state) A function of executing the processing of steps S802 to S803, steps S809 to S810, and steps S903 to S904 in the side MPU 72,
If the special event occurs in the advantageous gaming state, the number of executions of the advantageous gaming state may increase or the number of continuing games of the advantageous gaming state may increase.
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the standby avoidance situation is a situation in which the advantageous gaming state is established.

  According to the feature H4, the special standby period is set for the occurrence of the special event that triggers the transition to the advantageous gaming state, thereby emphasizing the transition to the advantageous gaming state and the special standby period as a break of the gaming state Is present, which can enhance the player's sense of excitement. On the other hand, in the advantageous gaming state, since the player's awareness turns to the end of the game, if the special waiting period is set for the occurrence of the special event on the way, it may make the player think that it is bothersome There is sex. On the other hand, in such a situation, it is possible to prevent such a disadvantage by not setting the special waiting period or shortening the waiting period.

Feature H5. An advantage transition means (mainly transitioning the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (bonus AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state when the special event occurs in the predetermined gaming state (non-AT state) A function of executing the processing of step S802 to step S803, step S809 to step S810 and step S903 to step S904 in the side MPU 72),
Transition restriction means for restricting the occurrence of transition of the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state by the advantageous transition means when the special event occurs in a penalty situation (function to make a negative determination in step S901 of the main side MPU 72) , And a function that makes a negative determination in step S902),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H4, wherein the standby avoidance situation is the penalty situation.

  According to the feature H5, the special standby period is set for the occurrence of the special event that triggers the transition to the advantageous gaming state, thereby emphasizing the transition to the advantageous gaming state and the special standby period as a break of the gaming state Is present, which can enhance the player's sense of excitement. On the other hand, the transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur even if the special event occurs in the penalty situation, so if the special standby period is set in such a situation, the player may be uncomfortable. . On the other hand, in such a situation, it is possible to prevent such a disadvantage by not setting the special waiting period or shortening the waiting period.

Feature H6. As combinations to be selected by the combination lottery process, there exist order corresponding combinations (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enable the occurrence of a prize when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order Yes,
The gaming machine according to the feature H4 or H5, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order correspondence role is achieved.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature H6, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Feature H7. A standby period setting unit (in the main MPU 72) for causing the variable display of the pattern to stand by until the standby period before the start (first freeze time, second freeze time) in the game elapses when the special lottery result is obtained. Function to execute the processing of step S310 and step S408),
The pre-start standby period setting means sets the pre-start standby period when the special lottery result is obtained even in the standby avoidance state. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature H7, when the special lottery result is obtained, by setting the standby period before the start in the game, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the special lottery result is obtained. As a result, the player can feel surprise by setting the standby period before the start, and can feel uplifting while performing the stop operation of the game while recognizing that it is the special lottery result. Is possible. Moreover, since the function of such a pre-start standby period can occur regardless of whether or not it is a standby avoidance state, even if it is a standby avoidance state, the function is suitably generated by setting the pre-start standby period. It is possible to

  Note that for the configuration of the features H1 to H7, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features I1 to One or more configurations among I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  Each invention of the feature A, the feature B, the feature C, the feature D, the feature E, the feature F, the feature G, and the feature H can solve the following problems. It is.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is provided to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is general that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  Specifically, with respect to the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means by operating the start lever in the situation where the medals are betted. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. Pattern display means (reel unit 31) comprising a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Combination lottery execution unit (function of executing lottery processing in main side MPU 72) that executes combination lottery processing when the start operation unit is operated;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display portion and operated to stop variable display of a pattern on the corresponding variable display portion;
The variable display of the symbols on the plurality of variable display portions is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display portion corresponding to the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means Variable display control means (function to execute the reel control process in the main side MPU 72) for controlling the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern in the above is stopped;
Winning correspondence giving means (winning determination in the main side MPU 72) which grants a prize corresponding privilege to the player based on the fact that the stopping symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery processing is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped Function to execute processing),
In a gaming machine provided with
When a winning combination is made as the combination to be selected by the combination lottery process, a defined combination (normal replay combination) in which a prescribed combination occurs regardless of the stop order of the variable display of the symbols on each of the variable display portions ) Exists,
A first control unit (main MPU 72) having the variable display control unit, and a second control unit (sub MPU 82) that executes predetermined control based on transmission information transmitted by the first control unit. ,
The first control means is
Order selection means for selecting the order in which the variable display on the variable display portions should be stopped when the regular role is won in the lottery process (function to execute the process of step S405 in the main MPU 72) When,
Order specifying means for specifying the occurrence of the correct order event in which the variable display of the symbols on the variable display portions is stopped in the order selected by the order selecting means Function),
Equipped with
The second control means is
Order notification control means (function of executing processing of step S1109 and step S3505 in sub side MPU 82) for notifying selection order information corresponding to the order selected by the order selection means;
Notification determining means (function to execute the process of step S3504 in the sub MPU 82) for determining whether or not to notify the selection order information by the order notification control means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature I1, since not only the first control means but also the second control means is provided as the control means, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced.

  In this case, the first control means intentionally selects the order in which the variable display of the pattern should be stopped when the regular winning combination is won regardless of the stop order of the variable display of the pattern, and the second control In the means, control for performing notification of the selection order information is performed as necessary. Then, in the first control means, it is specified whether or not the selected order matches the actual stop order. Thereby, even if the second control means is configured to independently manage the progress of the game state, the progress of the game state does not require transmission of information from the second control means to the first control means. The situation can be grasped by the first control means.

  As described above, by providing a plurality of control means, it is possible to achieve further optimization of the structure in a configuration in which the processing load of each control means is reduced.

  Feature I2. The game machine according to feature I1, wherein the order selection means always selects the order when the regular combination is won in the combination lottery process.

  According to the feature I2, since the selection of the order is always performed when the ruler combination is won, it is not necessary to switch between the state of performing the order selection and the state of not performing the order selection. Can be simplified.

Feature I3. The second control means is a progress management means (executing an in-AT process in the sub MPU 82) for managing the progress of the advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's degree of advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state (non-AT state). Function),
The gaming machine according to the feature I1 or I2, wherein the notification determination means causes the notification of the selection order information to be performed by the order notification control means in accordance with the progress status of the advantageous gaming state.

  According to the feature I3, since the progress of the advantageous gaming state is independently managed in the second control means, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced. In this case, the information from the second control means to the first control means is provided even if the second control means independently manages the progress of the advantageous gaming state by being provided with the configuration of the feature I1. It becomes possible to grasp the progress of the advantageous gaming state in the first control means without requiring the transmission of.

Feature I4. The progress management means is configured to set a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state to be started after completion of one execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state when a continuation condition of the advantageous gaming state is established. Means (a process for setting the pre-branch AT state in the sub MPU 82 and a function of executing the processes of steps S2909 to S2911);
The notification determination means is configured to notify the selection order information by the order notification control means in a situation where the execution setting of the advantageous gaming state is continued by the continuation setting means. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature I4, even if the progress of the advantageous gaming state is independently managed in the second control means, the advantageous game is not required to transmit information from the second control means to the first control means. It becomes possible to grasp the occurrence of the consecutive villas of the state.

  Feature I5. The gaming machine according to the feature I3 or I4, wherein the regular role is a role having the highest probability of winning in the role lottery process at least in the advantageous gaming state.

  According to the feature I5, it is possible to increase the chances of grasping the progress of the advantageous gaming state in the first control means, and when the progress of the advantageous gaming state changes, etc., it is early in the first control means It is possible to

Feature I6. As combinations to be selected by the combination lottery process, there exist order corresponding combinations (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enable the occurrence of a prize when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order Yes,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features I3 to I5, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order correspondence role is achieved.

  According to the feature I6, in the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to reliably generate an order-corresponding winning combination, which is advantageous to the player.

  Feature I7. Specific output setting means (step S3112 and step in the main side MPU 72) for performing the external output setting corresponding to the first control means based on the fact that the correct order event has been identified by the order identification means A game machine according to any one of features I1 to I6, characterized in that the game machine has a function of executing the process of S3404.

  According to the feature I7, even if the second control means is configured to independently manage the progress of the gaming state, the game does not require transmission of information from the second control means to the first control means. It becomes possible to perform the external output setting corresponding to the state progress status in the first control means.

  Feature I8. The specific output setting unit is configured to perform the external output setting corresponding to the specific operation based on the fact that the occurrence of the correct order event is specified a plurality of times by the order specification unit. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature I8, the possibility that the external output setting for the specific correspondence is performed when the correct order event happens by chance is reduced.

  Feature I9. The specific output setting means is specified by the order specifying means a plurality of times that the correct order event has occurred without an event that the correct order event does not occur on the way when the regular combination is won. The gaming machine according to the feature I8, characterized in that the external output setting corresponding to the specific one is performed based on information.

  According to the feature I9, the possibility that the external output setting for the specific correspondence is performed when the correct order event happens by chance is reduced.

  Feature I10. The second control means causes the different order notification control means to notify different order information corresponding to the order different from the order selected by the order selection means (processing of step S3507 and step S3605 in the sub side MPU 82 A game machine according to any one of the features I1 to I9, characterized in that it has a function of performing

  According to the feature I10, it is possible to positively prevent the occurrence of the correct order event by chance, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the content grasped by the first control means.

Feature I11. The second control means is a progress management means (executing an in-AT process in the sub MPU 82) for managing the progress of the advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's degree of advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state (non-AT state). Function),
The notification determination means causes the notification of the selection order information to be performed by the order notification control means in accordance with the progress of the advantageous gaming state.
The gaming machine according to feature I10, wherein the different order notification control means is configured to notify the different order information according to the progress status of the advantageous gaming state.

  According to the feature I11, since the progress of the advantageous gaming state is independently managed in the second control means, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced. In this case, selection order information is notified according to the progress of the advantageous gaming state, and different order information is notified according to the progress of the advantageous gaming state. Thus, even if the second control means independently controls the progress of the advantageous game state, the progress of the advantageous game state does not require transmission of information from the second control means to the first control means. It is possible to accurately grasp the situation in the first control means.

Feature I12. The progress management means is configured to set a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state to be started after completion of one execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state when a continuation condition of the advantageous gaming state is established. Means (a process for setting the pre-branch AT state in the sub MPU 82 and a function of executing the processes of steps S2909 to S2911);
The notification determining unit is configured to notify the selection order information by the order notification control unit when the continuation setting unit continues execution of the advantageous gaming state.
The different order notification control means is characterized in that the different order information is notified in a situation different from the situation where the execution time of the advantageous gaming state is continued by the continuation setting means. The gaming machine according to feature I11.

  According to the feature I12, even in the configuration in which the progress of the advantageous game state is independently managed in the second control means, the advantageous game does not require transmission of information from the second control means to the first control means. It becomes possible to accurately grasp the occurrence of the state's consecutive villas.

Feature I13. The first control means is a specific handling means (step S3112 and step S3404 in the main side MPU 72) that executes the specific handling process based on the fact that the correct order event has occurred a plurality of times by the order identifying means. Function to execute the processing of
The second control means is provided with a second side order specifying means (function to execute the processing of step S3510 and step S3608 in the sub side MPU 82) for specifying that the correct order event has occurred,
The different order notification control means is characterized in that the different order information is notified based on the fact that the correct order event has occurred is specified by the second side order specifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of features I10 to I12.

  According to the feature I13, since the specific handling process is executed when the correct order event occurs a plurality of times in the first control means, there is a possibility that the specific handling process may be performed when the correct order event happens by chance. Reduced. Further, the second control means is configured to execute the out-of-order notification when the correct order event occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the out-of-order notification from being performed more than necessary.

  Feature I14. A game machine according to any one of the features I1 to I13, characterized in that, when the regular role is won, winning occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means in relation to the variable display position of the symbol. .

  According to the feature I14, the player's profit depends on whether or not the selection order information is informed by daringly selecting the order in which the variable display of the pattern should be stopped when the rule winning with no so-called omission occurs. It does not change. This makes it difficult for restrictions on notification of selection order information to occur.

Feature I15. The plurality of variable display units include a left variable display unit (left reel 32L), a middle variable display unit (middle reel 32M), and a right variable display unit (right reel 32R).
The gaming machine according to any one of the features I1 to I14, wherein the order selection unit does not select the order in which the first stop order is the left variable display unit.

  According to the feature I15, since the player generally stops the left side variable display portion first, the correct order event is accidentally generated by not selecting the order in which the first stop order is the left side variable display portion. It is possible to reduce the possibility of

  Feature I16. The gaming machine according to any one of the features I1 to I15, wherein the regular role is a replay role.

  According to the feature I16, it is possible to achieve the above-described effects by using the replay role.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A10, the feature B1 to B11, the feature C1 to C11, the feature D1 to D11, the feature E1 to E10, the feature F1 to F11, the feature G1 to G10, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature I1 to I16 One or more configurations among H7, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. Pattern display means (reel unit 31) comprising a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Combination lottery execution unit (function of executing lottery processing in main side MPU 72) that executes combination lottery processing when the start operation unit is operated;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display portion and operated to stop variable display of a pattern on the corresponding variable display portion;
The variable display of the symbols on the plurality of variable display portions is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display portion corresponding to the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means Variable display control means (function to execute the reel control process in the main side MPU 72) for controlling the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern in the above is stopped;
Winning correspondence giving means (winning determination in the main side MPU 72) which grants a prize corresponding privilege to the player based on the fact that the stopping symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery processing is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped Function to execute processing),
In a gaming machine provided with
When a winning combination is made as the combination to be selected by the combination lottery process, a defined combination (normal replay combination) in which a prescribed combination occurs regardless of the stop order of the variable display of the symbols on each of the variable display portions ) Exists,
A first control unit (main MPU 72) having the variable display control unit, and a second control unit (sub MPU 82) that executes predetermined control based on transmission information transmitted by the first control unit. ,
The first control means is
Order selection means for selecting the order in which the variable display on the variable display portions should be stopped when the regular role is won in the lottery process (function to execute the process of step S405 in the main MPU 72) When,
Order specifying means for specifying the occurrence of the correct order event in which the variable display of the symbols on the variable display portions is stopped in the order selected by the order selecting means Function),
Equipped with
The second control means is
Order notification control means (function of executing processing of step S1109 and step S3505 in sub side MPU 82) for notifying selection order information corresponding to the order selected by the order selection means;
An out-of-order notification control means (function of executing the processing of step S3507 and step S3605 in the sub MPU 82) so as to notify different order information corresponding to the order different from the order selected by the order selection means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature J1, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced by providing not only the first control means but also the second control means as the control means.

  In this case, the first control means daresly selects the order in which the variable display of the patterns should be stopped when the regular winning combination is made regardless of the stop order of the variable display of the patterns. The second control means may notify of the selected order or may notify of an order different from the selected order. Then, in the first control means, it is specified whether or not the selected order matches the actual stop order. Thereby, even if the second control means is configured to independently manage the progress of the game state, the progress of the game state does not require transmission of information from the second control means to the first control means. The situation can be grasped by the first control means.

  In particular, by notifying the different order information, it is possible to positively prevent the occurrence of the correct order event by chance, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the content grasped by the first control means. Become.

  As described above, by providing a plurality of control means, it is possible to achieve further optimization of the structure in a configuration in which the processing load of each control means is reduced.

Feature J2. The second control means is a progress management means (executing an in-AT process in the sub MPU 82) for managing the progress of the advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's degree of advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state (non-AT state). Function),
The order notification control means is configured to notify the selection order information according to the progress status of the advantageous gaming state,
The gaming machine according to Feature J1, wherein the different order notification control means is configured to notify the different order information according to the progress status of the advantageous gaming state.

  According to the feature J2, since the progress of the advantageous gaming state is independently managed in the second control means, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced. In this case, selection order information is notified according to the progress of the advantageous gaming state, and different order information is notified according to the progress of the advantageous gaming state. Thus, even if the second control means independently controls the progress of the advantageous game state, the progress of the advantageous game state does not require transmission of information from the second control means to the first control means. It is possible to accurately grasp the situation in the first control means.

Feature J3. The progress management means is configured to set a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state to be started after completion of one execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state when a continuation condition of the advantageous gaming state is established. Means (a process for setting the pre-branch AT state in the sub MPU 82 and a function of executing the processes of steps S2909 to S2911);
The order notification control means is configured to notify the selection order information when the continuation setting means continues execution times of the advantageous gaming state.
The different order notification control means is characterized in that the different order information is notified in a situation different from the situation where the execution time of the advantageous gaming state is continued by the continuation setting means. The gaming machine according to feature J2.

  According to the feature J3, even in the configuration in which the progress of the advantageous gaming state is independently managed in the second control means, the advantageous game does not require transmission of information from the second control means to the first control means. It becomes possible to accurately grasp the occurrence of the state's consecutive villas.

  Feature J4. The gaming machine according to Feature J2 or J3, wherein the regular role is the one with the highest probability of winning in the role lottery process at least in the advantageous gaming state.

  According to the feature J4, it is possible to increase the chances of grasping the progress of the advantageous gaming state in the first control means, and when the progress of the advantageous gaming state changes, etc., it is early in the first control means It is possible to

Feature J5. As combinations to be selected by the combination lottery process, there exist order corresponding combinations (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enable the occurrence of a prize when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order Yes,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J2 to J4, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order correspondence role is achieved.

  According to the feature J5, in the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to reliably generate an order-corresponding winning combination, which is advantageous to the player.

Feature J6. The first control means is a specific handling means (step S3112 and step S3404 in the main side MPU 72) that executes the specific handling process based on the fact that the correct order event has occurred a plurality of times by the order identifying means. Function to execute the processing of
The second control means is provided with a second side order specifying means (function to execute the processing of step S3510 and step S3608 in the sub side MPU 82) for specifying that the correct order event has occurred,
The different order notification control means is characterized in that the different order information is notified based on the fact that the correct order event has occurred is specified by the second side order specifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5.

  According to the feature J6, since the specific handling process is executed when the correct order event occurs a plurality of times in the first control means, there is a possibility that the specific handling process may be performed when the correct order event happens by chance. Reduced. Further, the second control means is configured to execute the out-of-order notification when the correct order event occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the out-of-order notification from being performed more than necessary.

  Feature J7. The game machine according to any one of the features J1 to J6, wherein the order selection means always selects the order when the regular combination is won in the combination lottery process.

  According to the feature J7, the processing contents are performed to grasp the progress of the gaming state independently managed in the second control means by always selecting the order when the regular winning combination is won. There is no need to change things. Thus, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Feature J8. Specific output setting means (step S3112 and step in the main side MPU 72) for performing the external output setting corresponding to the first control means based on the fact that the correct order event has been identified by the order identification means A game machine according to any one of features J1 to J7, comprising the function of executing the process of S3404.

  According to the feature J8, even if the second control means is configured to independently manage the progress of the gaming state, the game does not require transmission of information from the second control means to the first control means. It becomes possible to perform the external output setting corresponding to the state progress status in the first control means.

  Feature J9. The specific output setting unit is configured to perform the external output setting corresponding to the specific operation based on the fact that the occurrence of the correct order event is specified a plurality of times by the order specification unit. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature J9, the possibility that the external output setting corresponding to the specific response is performed when the correct order event happens by chance is reduced.

  Feature J10. The specific output setting means is specified by the order specifying means a plurality of times that the correct order event has occurred without an event that the correct order event does not occur on the way when the regular combination is won. The gaming machine according to Feature J9, characterized in that the external output setting corresponding to the specific one is performed based on information.

  According to the feature J10, the possibility that the external output setting corresponding to the specific response is performed when the correct order event happens by chance is reduced.

  Feature J11. A game machine according to any one of the features J1 to J10, wherein, when the regular role is won, winning occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means in relation to the variable display position of the pattern. .

  According to the feature J11, the player's profit depends on whether or not the selection order information is notified by daringly selecting the order in which the variable display of the pattern should be stopped when the rule winning with no so-called omission occurs. It does not change. This makes it difficult for restrictions on notification of selection order information to occur.

Feature J12. The plurality of variable display units include a left variable display unit (left reel 32L), a middle variable display unit (middle reel 32M), and a right variable display unit (right reel 32R).
The game machine according to any one of the features J1 to J11, wherein the order selection unit does not select the order in which the first stop order is the left variable display unit.

  According to the feature J12, since the player generally stops the left side variable display unit first, the correct order event is generated accidentally by not selecting the order in which the first stop order is the left side variable display unit. It is possible to reduce the possibility of

  Feature J13. The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to J12, wherein the regular role is a replay role.

  According to the feature J13, it is possible to achieve the above-described effects by using the replay part.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A10, the feature B1 to B11, the feature C1 to C11, the feature D1 to D11, the feature E1 to E10, the feature F1 to F11, the feature G1 to G10, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature J1 to J13 One or more configurations among H7, features I1 to I16, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. A first control unit (main MPU 72); and a second control unit (sub MPU 82) that executes predetermined control based on transmission information transmitted by the first control unit.
The second control means is
Notification control means (in the sub MPU 82) for performing notification to enable giving of a privilege to the player in each of the first advantageous gaming state (bonus AT state) and the second advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) A function of executing the processing of step S1109 and step S1806),
Second side ending means (a function of executing the processing of step S2913 in the sub side MPU 82) for ending the second advantageous gaming state when the ending condition of the second advantageous gaming state is satisfied;
Equipped with
The first control means is a first end means (a function of executing the processing of step S1009 in the main MPU 72) for ending the first advantageous gaming state when an ending condition of the first advantageous gaming state is satisfied. A game machine characterized by comprising.

  According to the feature K1, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced by providing not only the first control means but also the second control means as the control means. In addition, since notification to enable awarding of a bonus to the player in each of the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state is performed by the second control means, in the configuration in which diversification of the advantageous gaming state is achieved. The processing load of the first control means can be reduced.

  In this case, the determination of the termination opportunity of the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state is not all performed in the second control means, but the determination of the termination opportunity for the first advantageous gaming state is the first control means To be done. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute special processing in the first control means according to the progress status of the first advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to enhance the rendering effect while reducing the processing load of the first control means. It becomes possible.

  As described above, by providing a plurality of control means, it is possible to achieve further optimization of the structure in a configuration in which the processing load of each control means is reduced.

  Feature K2. The first control means sets a progress standby period (end wait time) for waiting for the progress of the game in the game execution means (reel unit 31) according to the progress status of the first advantageous gaming state A game machine according to feature K1, characterized by including (a function of executing the process of step S1011 in the main MPU 72).

  According to the feature K2, by setting the progress standby period according to the progress status of the first advantageous gaming state, the progress of the first advantageous gaming state is given while giving the player unexpectedness through the setting of the progress standby period. It is possible to make the player aware of the situation.

Feature K3. Pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Combination lottery execution unit (function of executing lottery processing in main side MPU 72) that executes combination lottery processing when the start operation unit is operated;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop variable display of the pattern;
The variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means as one game. Variable display control means (function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the pattern display means in each game;
Winning correspondence giving means (winning determination in the main side MPU 72) which grants a prize corresponding privilege to the player based on the fact that the stopping symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery processing is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped Function to execute processing),
Equipped with
The game machine according to the feature K2, wherein the progress standby setting means sets the progress standby period according to the progress status of the first advantageous game state to cause the progress of the game to stand by.

  According to the feature K3, the progress of the game is waited by setting the progress waiting period according to the progress status of the first advantageous gaming state. In this case, it is possible that the player can grasp the progress of the first advantageous gaming state by feeling that the progress of the game has been awaited and having a surprise and grasping that the progress standby period is set. Become.

Feature K4. The progress standby setting means causes measurement of the progress standby period to be started after the variable display of the pattern is stopped,
The gaming machine according to feature K3, wherein the variable display control means waits for the start of variable display of the pattern during the progress standby period.

  According to the feature K4, when the progress standby period is set, the start of the variable display of the pattern is waited, so that the player can clearly recognize that the progress standby period is set. .

  Feature K5. The game according to the feature K4, characterized in that it comprises means (a function to execute the processing of step S1109 and step S1208 in the sub-side MPU 82) for performing the progress standby correspondence effect during the progress standby period. Machine.

  According to the feature K5, it is possible to execute an effect according to the progress status of the first advantageous game state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature K6. Role lottery execution means (function to execute lottery process in main side MPU 72) which executes the role lottery process;
A winning correspondence giving unit (a function for executing a winning determination process in the main side MPU 72) for giving a winning correspondence bonus when a winning corresponding to a winning combination in the part drawing process occurs;
Equipped with
The first control means at least indicates that the correspondence result, which is one of the result of the part drawing process and the result of the winning, has become the first correspondence result (the first to third special replay combination winning, outlier) First result correspondence transitioning means for shifting the gaming state to the first advantageous gaming state as one condition (function to execute processing of step S802 to step S803, step S809 to step S810 and step S903 to step S904 in the main side MPU 72 Equipped with
The second control means is
Second result correspondence transitioning means (step S1644 in the sub MPU 82) to shift the gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state with at least one condition that the correspondence result has become the second correspondence result (normal replay combination winning). A function of executing the process of step S1617),
Event correspondence transition means for shifting the gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state under at least one condition that an event different from the correspondence result has become a correspondence event (performing the processing of step S1706 to step S1709 in the sub MPU 82 Function),
A game machine according to any one of the features K1 to K5, comprising:

  According to the feature K6, since the transition patterns are different between the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state, diversification of the game is achieved, and the interest of the game is improved. In this case, by making the transition pattern of the second advantageous gaming state more complicated than the transition pattern of the first advantageous gaming state, diversification of the game is achieved while reducing the processing load of the first control means. It becomes possible.

Feature K7. The first control means is configured to start a new execution cycle of the first advantageous gaming state based on the establishment of the first continuation condition when one execution cycle of the first advantageous gaming state is ended. Means (function of executing the processing of step S219 in the main MPU 72);
The second control means starts a new execution cycle of the second advantageous gaming state based on the establishment of the second continuation condition when one execution cycle of the second advantageous gaming state is ended. And (a function of executing the processing for setting the pre-branch AT state in the sub MPU 82 and the processing in steps S2909 to S2911),
The game machine according to any one of the features K1 to K6, wherein the number of patterns in which the second continuation condition is satisfied is greater than the number of patterns in which the first continuation condition is satisfied.

  According to the feature K7, by differentiating the establishment condition of the continuation condition between the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state, diversification of the game is achieved, and the interest of the game is improved. In this case, since the fulfillment pattern of the continuation condition for the second advantageous gaming state is more than the establishment pattern of the continuation condition for the first advantageous gaming state, the game load is reduced while the processing load of the first control means is reduced. It is possible to diversify the

Feature K8. The second control means is
The benefit numerical value information (benefit point) is selected as the benefit storage means (benefit point counter of the sub-side RAM 84) when the benefit numerical condition is satisfied in the second advantageous gaming state (a privilege point is won in the benefit point lottery process). Storage executing means (function of executing the processing of step S2005, step S2007, step S2011 and step S2504 in the sub MPU 82) to be stored;
Benefit criterion determination means for determining whether or not the benefit numerical information stored in the benefit storage means corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the benefit reference value when it becomes a determination trigger (step S2301 in the sub MPU 82) And a function of executing the process of step S2609),
Equipped with
A feature K1 to K7 characterized in that a new execution cycle of the second advantageous gaming state is started when it is determined that the information corresponding to a value equal to or more than the benefit reference numerical value by the benefit reference determining means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature K8, the second advantageous gaming state is continued because the privilege numerical information stored by the establishment of the privilege numerical condition in the second advantageous gaming state becomes information corresponding to the value equal to or higher than the privilege reference numerical value. In the second advantageous gaming state, the player plays a game while expecting that the benefit numerical condition is established, and plays the game while expecting that the benefit numerical information becomes information corresponding to a value greater than or equal to the benefit reference value. It becomes. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved. In this case, since the second control means performs the continuous setting of the second advantageous gaming state in relation to the benefit numerical information, the interest of the game can be improved while reducing the processing load of the first control means. Is possible.

Feature K9. The second control means is a continuation lottery whether or not a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state is to be started after one execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state is ended when the continuous lottery is triggered. The continuous lottery executing means (function of executing the process of step S2309 in the sub MPU 82) for executing the process is provided.
A game machine according to any one of features K1 to K8, characterized in that a new execution cycle of the second advantageous gaming state is started when the continuous lottery process results in continuous winning.

  According to the feature K9, the player plays the game while expecting the continuous winning in the second advantageous gaming state because the second advantageous gaming state is continuously played when the continuous lottery processing results in the continuous winning. Thus, the interest of the game can be improved. In this case, since the second control means performs the continuous setting of the second advantageous game state in relation to the continuous lottery process, the interest of the game can be improved while reducing the processing load of the first control means. Is possible.

Feature K10. Role lottery execution means (function to execute lottery process in main side MPU 72) which executes the role lottery process;
A winning correspondence giving unit (a function for executing a winning determination process in the main side MPU 72) for giving a winning correspondence bonus when a winning corresponding to a winning combination in the part drawing process occurs;
Equipped with
The first control means performs remaining execution of the first advantageous gaming state, with at least one condition that the correspondence result, which is either the result of the winning lottery process or the result of the winning, has become the first correspondence result. The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K9, comprising: number setting means for setting the number (a function for executing the processing of step S803, step S810 and step S904 in the main MPU 72).

  According to the feature K10, since the first advantageous gaming state can be continuously played, the player can play a game while expecting the continuous gaming in the first advantageous gaming state, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, since the remaining number of executions of the first advantageous gaming state is set in relation to the result of the part lottery process or the result of winning, the fun of the game is improved while reducing the processing load of the first control means. It is possible to

Feature K11. Pattern display means (reel unit 31) comprising a plurality of variable display portions for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Combination lottery execution unit (function of executing lottery processing in main side MPU 72) that executes combination lottery processing when the start operation unit is operated;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display portion and operated to stop variable display of a pattern on the corresponding variable display portion;
The variable display of the symbols on the plurality of variable display portions is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display portion corresponding to the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means Variable display control means (function to execute the reel control process in the main side MPU 72) for controlling the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern in the above is stopped;
Winning correspondence giving means (winning determination in the main side MPU 72) which grants a prize corresponding privilege to the player based on the fact that the stopping symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery processing is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped Function to execute processing),
Equipped with
As combinations to be selected by the combination lottery process, there exist order corresponding combinations (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enable the occurrence of a prize when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order Yes,
The first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state are gaming states in which the predetermined order is notified when the order correspondence role is won, according to any one of the features K1 to K10. Of gaming machines.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature K11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  Note that for the configurations of the features K1 to K11, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to One or more configurations among H7, features I1 to I16, features J1 to J13, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  Each invention of the above-mentioned feature I group, the above-mentioned feature J group, and the above-mentioned feature K group can solve the following subject.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is provided to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is general that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  Specifically, with respect to the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means by operating the start lever in the situation where the medals are betted. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  In addition to the reel device, in the slot machine, there is known a configuration in which a rendering device such as a liquid crystal display device is provided to improve the interest of the game through the rendering performed by the rendering device. In addition, in the configuration in which the rendering device is provided as described above, the rendering control device is provided separately from the main control device that performs the lottery process and the drive control of the reel, and the rendering device is controlled in the rendering control device. There is also known a configuration in which the processing load of the main control means is reduced.

  Here, it is necessary to further optimize the configuration in a configuration in which the processing load of each control unit is reduced by providing a plurality of control units as in the above-mentioned example and the like, and there is still room for improvement in this respect. is there.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. Pattern display means (reel unit 31) comprising a plurality of variable display portions for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Combination lottery execution unit (function of executing lottery processing in main side MPU 72) that executes combination lottery processing when the start operation unit is operated;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display portion and operated to stop variable display of a pattern on the corresponding variable display portion;
The variable display of the symbols on the plurality of variable display portions is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display portion corresponding to the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means Variable display control means (function to execute the reel control process in the main side MPU 72) for controlling the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern in the above is stopped;
Winning correspondence giving means (winning determination in the main side MPU 72) which grants a prize corresponding privilege to the player based on the fact that the stopping symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery processing is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped Function to execute processing),
In a gaming machine provided with
As the winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, the order corresponding winning combination (the first bell combination and the first winning combination) which enables the occurrence of the order corresponding winning when the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of variable display portions is stopped in a predetermined order. 2 Bell role exists,
First control means (main MPU 72) having the combination lottery execution means and the variable display control means;
A second control unit (sub MPU 82) that executes notification control so that the predetermined order is notified when the order response combination is won in the advantageous gaming state (normal AT state);
Equipped with
The first control means is
A prize specifying unit (function for executing the processing of step S3203 in the main MPU 72) for identifying whether or not the order responsive prize has been generated when the order responsive combination is won.
First setting means for performing an external output setting indicating that the advantageous gaming state is based on the fact that occurrence of the order-ready winning has been identified by the prize-identifying means when the order-enabled hand is won A function of executing the process of step S3105 in the main MPU 72),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature L1, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced by providing not only the first control means but also the second control means as the control means. Further, since notification control of the predetermined order in the advantageous gaming state is performed by the second control means, the processing load of the first control means is reduced in the configuration in which the interest of the game is improved by setting the advantageous gaming state. Be

  In this case, the first control means performs an external output setting indicating that the game is in the advantageous gaming state when it is specified that the order-ready winning has occurred when the order-ready winning combination is won. Thus, even if the second control means is configured to independently manage the progress of the advantageous gaming state, it is the advantageous gaming state without requiring transmission of information from the second control means to the first control means. It is possible to perform an external output setting indicating that.

  As described above, external output can be suitably performed.

  Feature L2. The first setting means is an external output setting indicating that the advantageous gaming state is established when the number of times specified by the winning specifying means has occurred a specific number of times determined as a plurality of times that the order-corresponding winning has occurred. The gaming machine according to feature L1, characterized in that:

  According to the feature L2, the possibility that the external output setting indicating that the game is in the advantageous gaming state is performed is reduced when the order corresponding winning combination occurs by chance.

  Feature L3. The first setting means does not specify that the order-adaptive winning has not occurred by the prize specifying means, and the number of times that the order-identifying prize has been specified by the prize specifying means is made multiple times. An external output setting indicating that the game is in the advantageous gaming state is performed when a specific number of times defined as has occurred, the gaming machine according to the feature L2.

  According to the feature L3, the possibility that the external output setting indicating that the game is in the advantageous gaming state when the order-oriented winning is generated by chance is reduced.

Feature L4. The plurality of variable display units include a left variable display unit (left reel 32L), a middle variable display unit (middle reel 32M), and a right variable display unit (right reel 32R).
The gaming machine according to any one of the features L1 to L3, wherein the predetermined order does not include the order in which the first stop order is the left variable display unit.

  According to the feature L4, since the player generally stops the left side variable display unit first, the order corresponding winning combination happens by chance because the order in which the first stop order is the left side variable display unit is not included as the predetermined order. It is possible to reduce the possibility of occurrence.

  Feature L5. In the predetermined gaming state which is not the advantageous gaming state, a disadvantage that causes an event to be disadvantageous to the player based on the first stop of the variable display of the pattern in the variable display portion different from the left variable display portion. The gaming machine according to the feature L4, comprising setting means (function of executing the processing of step S1408 and step S1411 in the sub MPU 82).

  According to the feature L5, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the order-ready winning will occur by chance in the predetermined gaming state.

  Feature L6. The first control means indicates that the player is not in the advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the order specifying winning means has not occurred when the order supporting case is not won when the order supporting role is won. A game machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, comprising a second setting unit (function to execute the process of step S3107 in the main MPU 72) for setting an output.

  According to the feature L6, whether or not the order corresponding winning has occurred in either of the case of performing the external output setting indicating that it is the advantageous gaming state, and the case of performing the external output setting indicating that it is not the advantageous gaming state You can monitor the As a result, the types of events to be monitored can be suppressed and the processing load can be reduced.

Feature L7. The first setting means performs an external output setting indicating that the advantageous gaming state is in effect when the number of times the occurrence of the order-corresponding winning is specified by the winning specifying means reaches a first specific number. And
The second setting means is an external output setting indicating that the advantageous gaming state is not in effect when the number of times specified by the prize specifying means that the order corresponding winning has not occurred is equal to a second specified number. It is what you do,
The gaming machine according to Feature L6, wherein the first specified number of times and the second specified number of times are different.

  According to the feature L7, it is monitored whether or not the order corresponding winning has occurred in either of the case of performing the external output setting indicating that it is in the advantageous gaming state and the case of performing the external output setting indicating that it is not the advantageous gaming state In the configuration, it is possible to set the execution timing and accuracy of the external output setting according to the type of each external output setting.

  Feature L8. The gaming machine according to Feature L7, wherein the first specific number is greater than the second specific number.

  According to the feature L8, it is possible to accurately perform the external output setting indicating the advantageous gaming state while enabling the external output setting indicating the non- advantageous gaming state to be performed early.

  Feature L9. A game machine according to any one of features L1 to L8, characterized in that a plurality of roles are included as the order response role.

  According to the feature L9, it is possible to quickly perform the external output setting corresponding to the advantageous gaming state while enhancing the freedom of setting the winning probability of each combination.

  Note that for the configuration of the features L1 to L9, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to One or more configurations among H7, features I1 to I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The invention of the feature L group can solve the following problems.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is provided to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is general that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  Specifically, with respect to the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means by operating the start lever in the situation where the medals are betted. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above etc., the external output of information is performed in order to make the management computer of the gaming hall recognize the state of the gaming machine, but it is still improved to preferably perform this external output. There is room.

<Feature M group>
Feature M1. Role lottery execution means (function to execute lottery process in main side MPU 72) which executes the role lottery process;
A winning correspondence giving unit (a function for executing a winning determination process in the main side MPU 72) for giving a winning correspondence bonus when a winning corresponding to a winning combination in the part drawing process occurs;
Equipped with
As a combination to be selected by the combination lottery process, there is a winning maintenance combination (CB combination) in which the winning state is maintained until a winning combination corresponding to the winning is generated,
The gaming machine is in the advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's degree of advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state (non-AT state), at least one condition being that the winning maintenance role is in the winning state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising advantageous transition means (a function to execute the processing of step S1614 to step S1617 and step S1706 to step S1709 in the sub MPU 82).

  According to the feature M1, since transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs when the winning maintaining role is in the winning state, it is possible to limit a period during which transition to the advantageous gaming state is possible in relation to the winning combination. Become. As a result, the player pays attention to winning the winning maintenance role and maintaining the winning state of the winning maintenance role. From the above, it becomes possible to provide novel game content.

In addition, “a pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop variable display of the pattern;
The variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means as one game. Variable display control means (function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the pattern display means in each game;
Equipped with
The combination lottery execution unit executes the combination lottery process when the start operation unit is operated,
The winning correspondence granting means gives the winning correspondence privilege as a winning when the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the part drawing process is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped.
Even when the player holds the winning maintenance role, by applying the configuration that the occurrence of the winning corresponding to the winning maintenance role can be avoided by the operation mode of the stopping operation means, the winning maintenance is maintained by the operation mode of the stopping operation means It becomes possible to generate and avoid winnings corresponding to the winning combination, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Feature M2. The non-advantage transition means (main side to shift to a non-favorable gaming state in which the number of game media of the player at the time of termination does not increase more than the number of game media of the player at the start A game machine according to feature M1, characterized by comprising the function of executing the processing of step S704 to step S706 in the MPU 72.

  According to the feature M2, when the winning maintenance role is in the winning state, the transition to the non-favorable gaming state occurs when the winning is generated, while the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs by preventing the generating of the winning. there's a possibility that. As a result, it is possible to make the player's profit largely different depending on whether or not to generate a winning maintenance of the winning maintenance role, and it is possible to increase the attention to the game in the winning state of the winning maintenance role.

  Feature M3. The gaming machine according to feature M2, wherein the non-advantage game state is a game state in which the number of game media of the player at the time of termination is the same as the number of game media of the player at the time of initiation.

  According to the feature M3, not only the transition opportunity to the advantageous gaming state disappears but also the transition to the non advantageous gaming state is made when generating a prize of the winning maintenance role, but in the non-advantaged gaming state, the game medium Although it is impossible to expect an increase in As a result, it is possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage of the player who has unintentionally generated a winning of the winning maintenance role.

Feature M4. Pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop variable display of the pattern;
The variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means as one game. Variable display control means (function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the pattern display means in each game;
Equipped with
The combination lottery execution unit executes the combination lottery process when the start operation unit is operated,
The winning correspondence granting means gives the winning correspondence privilege as a winning when the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the part drawing process is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped.
The gaming machine according to feature M2 or M3, characterized in that the non-advantage gaming state is a gaming state which continues over a plurality of games.

  According to the feature M4, it is possible to make the profit of the player largely different depending on whether or not to generate a winning of the winning maintaining role, and it is possible to increase the attention to the game in the winning status of the winning maintaining role. .

  Feature M5. It has a winning notification means (a function for executing the processing of step S 707 in the internal status notification unit 63 and the main side MPU 72) for executing a winning condition notification that the winning maintenance role is in the winning condition. The game machine according to any one of features M1 to M4 characterized by the features.

  According to the feature M5, it is possible to urge the player not to generate a winning when the winning maintenance role is achieved.

Feature M6. It has external setting means (a function to execute the processing of step S3105, step S3404 and step S3406 in the main side MPU 72) that performs external output setting indicating that it is the advantageous gaming state,
The winning notification means is configured to start the notification of the winning state before the external output setting indicating the advantageous gaming state is performed when the winning maintaining role of the winning maintaining role is achieved. The gaming machine according to feature M5, characterized in that

  According to the feature M6, it is possible to notify the player that the winning maintenance role has been won, before notifying the outside of the gaming machine.

Feature M7. Pattern display means (reel unit 31) comprising a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display portion and operated to stop variable display of a pattern on the corresponding variable display portion;
The variable display of the symbols on the plurality of variable display portions is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display portion corresponding to the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means Variable display control means (function to execute the reel control process in the main side MPU 72) for controlling the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern in the above is stopped;
Equipped with
The combination lottery execution unit executes the combination lottery process when the start operation unit is operated,
The winning correspondence granting means gives the winning correspondence privilege as a winning when the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the part drawing process is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped.
The winning notification means is configured to be able to stop the variable display of the pattern on the variable display portion to be finally stopped when the winning maintenance role is won in the role lottery process. The gaming machine according to the feature M5 or M6, characterized in that status notification is started.

  According to the feature M7, it is possible to make the player recognize that the winning keep combination has been won before a prize corresponding to the hold keeping combination occurs in the game in which the winning keep combination is won. It becomes possible to avoid the occurrence of the prize corresponding to the winning maintaining role.

  Feature M8. The winning notification means is configured to start the notification of the winning state before the stop operation of the variable display of the pattern is made possible in the game when the winning maintaining role is won in the role lottery process. A game machine according to feature M7, characterized in that:

  According to the feature M8, the player can be made aware of the winning of the winning maintenance combination before the variable display of the symbols in the game is started, and the occurrence of the prize corresponding to the winning maintenance combination can be avoided. It becomes possible.

Feature M9. Pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop variable display of the pattern;
The variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means as one game. Variable display control means (function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the pattern display means in each game;
Equipped with
The combination lottery execution unit executes the combination lottery process when the start operation unit is operated,
When the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the part drawing process is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped, the winning correspondence giving unit is to give the winning correspondence privilege as a winning. The game machine according to any one of features M1 to M8, which is a feature.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature M9, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above.

Feature M10. The pattern display means comprises a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts variable display of patterns on the plurality of variable display portions based on the start operation means being operated, and the stop operation means based on the stop operation means being operated Controlling the pattern display means so as to stop variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to
As combinations to be selected by the combination lottery process, there exist order corresponding combinations (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enable the occurrence of a prize when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order Yes,
The gaming machine according to the feature M9, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order correspondence role is achieved.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature M10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A10, the feature B1 to B11, the feature C1 to C11, the feature D1 to D11, the feature E1 to E10, the feature F1 to F11, the feature G1 to G10, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature M1 to M10 One or more configurations among H7, features I1 to I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature N group>
Feature N1. Pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Combination lottery execution unit (function of executing lottery processing in main side MPU 72) that executes combination lottery processing when the start operation unit is operated;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop variable display of the pattern;
The variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means as one game. Variable display control means (function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the pattern display means in each game;
When the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process is displayed when the variable display of the pattern is stopped, the winning correspondence giving means (the winning determination process in the main side MPU 72) which gives the above-mentioned winning correspondence privilege as a prize occurrence And the ability to perform
First transition means (a function of executing the processing of step S704 to step S706 in the main MPU 72) that causes transition to the first gaming state (CB in progress state) when the first transition condition is satisfied;
Second transition means (the step S802 to step S803, step S809 to step S810 and step S903 to step S904 of the main MPU 72) to shift to the second gaming state (bonus AT state) when the second transition condition is satisfied Function to execute)
The game corresponding end means (the processing of step S1007 to step S1012 in the main side MPU 72 is executed to end one execution cycle of the second gaming state when the game of the predetermined continuation game number is executed in the second gaming state) Function),
In the game in which the transition condition to the second gaming state is established or in the second gaming state, when the first transition condition is established, the priority means (preferrable) is to give priority to the game content of the first gaming state A function of executing the process of step S706 in the main MPU 72),
The game number management means (the processing of step S1005 in the main side MPU 72 handles the game portion executed under the situation where the game content of the first gaming state is prioritized by the priority means as the digest of the predetermined continuation game number Function to execute)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature N1, in the game in which the transition condition to the second gaming state is established or in the second gaming state, when the first transition condition is established, the game content in the first gaming state is prioritized. In this case, instead of completely stopping the progress to the second gaming state, the number of games executed under the situation where the gaming content of the first gaming state is prioritized is the number of predetermined continuation games of the second gaming state. Treated as digestion. Thereby, the player, for example, prevents the transition to the first gaming state from occurring in the second gaming state, for example, expects that the transition to the first gaming state does not occur in the second gaming state, for example For example, it is expected that the game mode is shifted to the first game mode in the second game mode, or that the game mode is shifted to the first game mode in the second game mode. From the above, it becomes possible to provide novel game content.

  Note that a configuration may be applied that "the first gaming state is a gaming state that continues over a plurality of games".

Feature N2. After the termination condition of the first gaming state is satisfied under the situation where the game contents of the first gaming state are prioritized by the priority means, the second transition means makes the transition to the second gaming state Transition means (function of performing an affirmative determination in step S1103 and step S1104 in the sub MPU 82 and executing the process of step S1106);
In the second gaming state in which the game corresponding end means has transitioned by the transition control of the end after transition, the remaining game number of the predetermined continuation game number is digested when the transition control occurs. The gaming machine according to the feature N1, characterized in that the execution time is ended.

  According to the feature N2, in the game in which the transition condition to the second gaming state is satisfied or in the second gaming state, when the first gaming state is shifted, the second gaming state is reached after the end of the first gaming state Also, the second gaming state is ended when the remaining predetermined number of continued games after the number of games executed in the first gaming state is subtracted is digested. As a result, the first gaming state and the second gaming state can be associated with each other as compared with the configuration in which the transition of the second gaming state is simply invalidated, and novel game contents can be provided. Become.

  Feature N3. The after-transition transition means is after the completion condition of the first gaming state is satisfied under the situation where the game contents of the first gaming state are prioritized by the priority means, and the winning state of the winning maintaining role and When it becomes, it is made to shift to said 2nd game state, The game machine as described in the feature N2 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the feature N3, the second gaming state is not started immediately after the end of the first gaming state, and the second gaming state is not started unless the winning maintaining role is won. As a result, the player who expects the transition to the second gaming state will pay attention to whether or not he will win the winning maintenance role after the end of the first gaming state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Feature N4. The number-of-games managing means determines that the winning state of the winning maintaining role is after the ending condition of the first gaming state is satisfied under the situation where the game contents of the first gaming state are prioritized by the priority means. The gaming machine according to Feature N3, characterized in that the game portion executed until then is treated as a digest of the predetermined number of continuing games.

  According to the feature N4, after the end of the first gaming state, the portion of the game which is required until the winning state of the winning keep combination is reached is treated as a portion of the predetermined number of continuing games in the second gaming state. As a result, the player who expects the transition to the second gaming state is expected to be elected to maintain the winning combination by the end of the first gaming state until the completion of the game for the predetermined continuation game number is completed. The game will be played, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Feature N5. The gaming machine according to any one of the features N1 to N4, wherein the second gaming state is more advantageous for the player than the first gaming state.

  According to the feature N5, the player prevents the transition to the first gaming state from occurring in the second gaming state, and expects that the transition to the first gaming state does not occur in the second gaming state As a result, the degree of attention to the game in the second gaming state is improved. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Feature N6. The gaming machine according to Feature N5, wherein the first gaming state is a gaming state in which the number of gaming media of the player at the time of termination is not larger than the number of gaming media of the player at the time of initiation.

  According to the feature N6, the profit of the player is largely different depending on whether or not the transition to the first gaming state occurs in the second gaming state. This makes it possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the second gaming state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Feature N7. The gaming machine according to Feature N6, wherein the first gaming state is a gaming state in which the number of gaming media of the player at the time of termination is the same as the number of gaming media of the player at the time of initiation.

  According to the feature N7, although the increase of the game medium can not be expected in the first gaming state, the decrease does not occur. This makes it possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage of the player when the transition to the first gaming state occurs.

Feature N8. The pattern display means comprises a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts variable display of patterns on the plurality of variable display portions based on the start operation means being operated, and the stop operation means based on the stop operation means being operated Controlling the pattern display means so as to stop variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to
As combinations to be selected by the combination lottery process, there exist order corresponding combinations (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enable the occurrence of a prize when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order Yes,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features N5 to N7, wherein the second gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when becoming the order correspondence role.

  According to the feature N8, since the predetermined order is notified in the second gaming state, the gaming state is advantageous for the player.

Feature N9. As a combination to be selected by the combination lottery process, there is a winning maintenance combination (CB combination) in which the winning state is maintained until a winning combination corresponding to the winning is generated,
The first transition condition is that a prize corresponding to the winning maintenance role is generated,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features N1 to N8, wherein the second transition condition is satisfied with at least one condition being a winning state of the winning maintaining role.

  According to the feature N9, it is possible to generate the transition to the second gaming state by maintaining the winning state of the winning maintaining role, and it is the second gaming state when generating a prize corresponding to the winning maintaining role Also, the game state is shifted to the first gaming state, and the number of games digested in the first gaming state is subtracted from the predetermined continuation game number. As a result, it is possible to make the progress of the subsequent game largely different depending on whether or not to generate a prize corresponding to the winning maintaining role, and it is possible to increase the attention to the game in the winning state of the winning maintaining role Become.

  The operation of the stop operation means can be applied by applying the configuration that “even if the player holds a winning maintenance role, the occurrence of a prize corresponding to the winning maintenance role can be avoided by the operation mode of the stop operation means”. According to the aspect, it becomes possible to generate and avoid a prize corresponding to the winning and holding role, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature N10. The second gaming state is configured to have a player's advantage higher than the first gaming state,
It has a winning notification means (a function for executing the processing of step S 707 in the internal status notification unit 63 and the main side MPU 72) for executing a winning condition notification that the winning maintenance role is in the winning condition. The gaming machine according to the feature N9 characterized by the feature.

  According to the feature N10, it is possible to urge the player not to generate a winning when the winning maintenance role is achieved.

Feature N11. It has an external setting means (a function to execute the processing of step S3118, step S3408 and step S3703 in the main MPU 72) for performing external output setting indicating that the second gaming state is set,
The winning notification means is configured to start the notification of the winning state by the time the external output setting indicating the second gaming state is performed when the winning maintaining role is in the winning state. The gaming machine according to feature N10, characterized in that

  According to the feature N11, it is possible to notify the player that the winning maintenance state of the winning maintenance role has been achieved, to the outside of the gaming machine.

Feature N12. The pattern display means comprises a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts variable display of patterns on the plurality of variable display portions based on the start operation means being operated, and the stop operation means based on the stop operation means being operated Controlling the pattern display means so as to stop variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to
The winning notification means is configured to start the notification of the winning state before the variable display of the symbols on all the variable display portions is stopped when the winning maintaining role is won in the role lottery process. The gaming machine according to feature N10 or N11, which is characterized in that:

  According to the feature N12, it is possible to make the player recognize that the winning keep combination has been won before the winning combination corresponding to the win holding combination occurs in the game in which the winning keep combination is won. It becomes possible to avoid the occurrence of the prize corresponding to the winning maintaining role.

  Feature N13. The winning notification means is configured to start the notification of the winning state before the variable display of the symbol is started in the game when the winning maintaining role is won in the role lottery process. The gaming machine according to Feature N12, which is characterized in that

  According to the feature N13, the player can be made aware of the winning of the winning maintenance combination before the variable display of the symbols in the game is started, and the occurrence of the prize corresponding to the winning maintenance combination is avoided. It becomes possible.

  Note that for the configuration of the features N1 to N13, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to One or more configurations among H7, features I1 to I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, and features M1 to M10 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The respective inventions of the feature M group and the feature N group can solve the following problems.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is provided to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is general that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  Specifically, with respect to the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means by operating the start lever in the situation where the medals are betted. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, it is necessary to provide novel game contents in game machines such as those described above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-described features can be applied will be shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball firing means for firing game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the fired game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine comprising: each gaming component arranged in an area, and providing a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of the gaming components.

  Throttle type gaming machines such as slot machines: Start rotation of the orbiter based on the operation of the start operation means, stop rotation of the orbiter based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player according to the pattern after the stop A gaming machine that grants benefits.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Slot machine, 31 ... Reel unit, 32L, 32M, 32R ... Reel, 41 ... Start lever, 42-44 ... Stop button, 63 ... Internal state notification part, 66 ... Image display apparatus, 67 ... Bonus point notification part, 68 ... stock notification unit, 69 ... victory number notification unit, 70 ... main control unit, 72 ... main side MPU, 73 ... main side ROM, 74 ... main side RAM, 80 ... sub control unit, 82 ... sub side MPU, 83 ... Sub ROM, 84 ... Sub RAM.

Claims (2)

Pattern display means for variably displaying a pattern;
Starting operation means operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Role lottery execution means for executing the role lottery process when the start operation means is operated;
Stop operation means operated to stop variable display of the pattern;
Variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling;
A winning correspondence giving unit for giving a winning correspondence bonus as a winning when the stop symbol corresponding to the winning combination in the combination lottery processing is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped;
Advantage transition means for transitioning the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state in which the player's degree of interest is higher than the predetermined gaming state, at least one condition being that the predetermined part winning is won in the part drawing process in the pre-transition state;
A means for increasing the expectation for the advantageous gaming state in the pre-transition state, using at least one condition that the winning combination has been won in the part drawing process in the pre-transition state;
Equipped with
The separate role does not serve as a trigger for giving the advantageous gaming state in the pre-transition state, but in the other gaming states, it has a configuration to serve as the trigger for giving the bonus state,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the predetermined combination is won in the combination lottery process, a prize is generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means in relation to the variable display position of the pattern. .   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a game is performed using a gaming medium.

Images